The PERCEPTION electronic business com-

munications system is registered in accordance

with the provisions of Part 68 of the Federal Before connecting a PERCEPTION system to
Communications Commission’s Rules and the telephone network, the telephone company
Regulations. must be provided with the following:

A. Your telephone number

. The FCC registration number (BF287N-
7~443-~F-~)
C. The ringer equivalence number 1.2B(AC)/
The Federal Communications Commission 4.O(DC)
(FCC) has established rules which permit the D. The USOC jack required (RJ21X)
PERCEPTION electronic business communications
system to be connected directly to the telephone items B and C are also indicated on the equipment
network. Connection points are provided by the label.
telephone company-connections for this type of
customer-provided equipment will not be pro- You must notify the telephone company upon
vided on party lines or coin lines. final disconnection of your equipment.

If a PERCEPTION system is malfunctioning, Warning: -This equipment generates, uses, and

it may also be disrupting the telephone network. can radiate radio frequency energy and if not
The system should be disconnected until the installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
problem can be determined and repaired. If this tions manual, may cause interference to radio
is not done, the telephone company may tem- communications. It has been tested and found
porarily disconnect service. to comply with the limits for a Class A computing
device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC
atibi Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference when operated
The telephone company may make changes in a commercial environment. Operation of this
in its technical operations and procedures. If equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
such changes affect the compatibility or use of interference; in which case, the users, at his own
a PERCEPTION system, the telephone company expense, will be required to take whatever measures
is required to give adequate notice of the changes. may be required to correct the interference.
 Toshiba Telecom reserves the right, without prior notice, to revise this information
publication for any reason, including, but not limited to, utilization of new advances in
the state of technical arts or to simply change the design of this document,

Further, Toshiba Telecom also reserves the right, without prior notice, to make such
changes in equipment design or components as engineering or manufacturing methods may
warrant.

All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, with
the exception of the Programming Record Forms, may be reproduced in any form or by
any means-graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopy,
or information retrieval systems-without express written permission of the publisher
of this material.

In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs will be performed by Toshiba

America, Inc., Toshiba Telecom, or an authorized agent of Toshiba America, Inc.,
Toshiba Telecom.
 SUBJECT PAGE
TABLE OF CONTENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
01 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ReservePower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AttendantConsole .....................................
Electronic Key Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLE A (Electrical Characteristics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLE B (Standard Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TABLE C (Optional Features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central Equipment Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Key Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AttendantConsole.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Failure/Emergency Transfer Unit (DPTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSTALLATION 2% MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FEATURE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TITLE
CABINET (Dimensions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CABINET (Interior) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAR CABINET CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTENDANT CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STANDARD IO-key EKT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SYSTEM DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTENDANT CONS0 LE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
 01.10 Physical Description

0 Summary Dew-i 1.11 The physical parameters of the metal

PERCEPTION equipment cabinet (Figure 1) are:
01.01 PERCEPTION is an advanced business
communication system, employing stored program Height 39.25 in. (997 mm)
control, digital switching, and custom LSI Width 20.47 in. (520 mm)
circuitry. Depth 15.75 in. (400 mm)

1.02 Utilizing the same electronic key tele- It weighs 187.4 lb. (85 kg) when fully equipped.
hone as the new Toshiba STRATA electronic
key telephone systems (EKTS), PERCEPTION 2 The central equipment cabinet is divided
combines the functions of conventional electronic into four shelves (Figure 2); two shelves for plug-in
private branch exchange (EPABX) systems and printed circuit board (PCB) mounting, one shelf
electronic key telephone systems into a single for the power supply, and the top shelf contains
design while remaining compatible with existing the Floppy Disk/Ringer Assembly (DFRA).
switching and station equipment.
External connections are made to the
3 PERCEPTION has a capacity of 120 via amphenol-ended cables connected
stations and 32 trunks. The system provides a at the rear of the cabinet (Figure 3), and ter-
wide variety of basic and optional features to minated on a main distribution frame (MDF).
users of conventional rotary dial or touchtone
telephones, as well as to users of Electronic Key PCBs measure 12.01 inches (305 mm)
Telephones. high by 12.01 inches (305 mm) deep, and each
one has a metal faceplate riveted to the front
Two different Electronic Key Tele- edge. The rear edge connector carries the electrical
s (EKTs) are available with PERCEPTION. terminals: 60- and 40-pin terminals on the peri-
Each is equipped with a push-button dial pad, pheral equipment PCBs and loo-pin terminals
speaker, four fixed feature keys (SPKR, MUTE, on the common equipment PCBs.
CONF and HOLD) and either 10 or 20 flexible
assignment keys (hence the names IO-key and .I5 The 5 l/4-in. Floppy Disk Drive Unit
20-key). Of the four fixed keys, only the j FDD) stores system programs and customer
key is equipped with an LED. Both EKTs feature office data securely. The DFDD is mounted in
modular handset cords and are connected to the the left side of the DF RA subassembly.
system via four-conductor modular line cords.
The 20 Hz ringing power supply (DRNG)
The basic PERCEPTION EKT is a IO-key, is mounted on the right side of the DFRA sub-
with 10 keys that may be assigned as directory assembly.
number (DN) pickups or as access keys to any
of the station custom calling features. 1.17 The primary power supply (DPSA)
-
IS mounted in the bottom of the equipment
The expanded 20-key EKT has an additional cabinet. It is operated by 115 VAC, 50/60 Hz
10 flexible assignment keys that may be commercial power and provides a fused output
assigned as DN pickups or feature access keys. of -48 VDC, -24 VDC, *I2 VDC and k5 VDC.

The PERCEPTION Attendant Console 1.2

th attractive and efficient. Its digital display
provides the operator with all the information 1.2 A commercially-available Uninterruptible
required for easy operation. Two attendant con- Power Supply system is used to supply emergency
soles may be equipped in the system. power.

Housed in a single attractively styled

cabinet, the noiseless operation, small size and
environmental tolerance of the central equipment 1.3 The PERCEPTION Attendant Console
allows a wide choice of installation locations. (Figure 4) is enclosed in an off-white plastic
 --- ---
iI --- -- - l nl
 DFRA

r- I-

f;
:

s531 6
:

c- I-

r- L
-

E;
; :
G:
tc
 -

“,.’

‘_‘ ‘/’

housing with headsei/hapdse$ .jacks, located on _ “hundreds group” identifier that shows which
both sides. It is equipped with a keyboard having of the two groups is currently being displayed.
two horizontal rows. of non-locking keys and The display alternates between groups in response
LEDs, a standard la-key dial pad and a vertical ‘to operations of the m key (located on the
row of four keys. The ‘console display functibns ” console keyboard). Trunk group busy display,
include incoming carI identification, source (calling call waiting and alarm indications are also provided.
party), class of service, destination (called party) The Attendant Console measures:
and status (of called party). In addition, the Height 4.72-in. (120 mm)
console is equipped with a .busy lamp field that Width 14.17 in. (360 mm)
displays 100 2-digit numbers (OQ-w99), and a ,,, Depth 10.24 in. (260 mm)
 Both EKTs feature modular handset cords and
are connected to the system via 4-conductor mod-
The two EKTs that are available with ular line cords.
PERCEPTION are housed in an off-white plastic The basic PERCEPTION EKT (Figure 5) is a
case with interchangeable colored faceplates IO-key, with IO keys that may be assigned as
(brown, blue, black and wine). They are the same directory number (DN) pickups or as access
units as the STRATA series EKTs and measure: keys to any of the station custom calling
features.
Height 4.0 in. (102 mm)
Width 8.8 in. (224 mm) The expanded 20-key EKT has an additional
Depth 9.1 in. (230 mm) 10 flexible assignment keys that may be
assigned as DN pickups or feature access keys.
Each is equipped with a push-button
dial pad, speaker, four fixed feature keys (SPKR, Electrical Characteristics
MUTE, CONF and HOLD) and either IO or 20
flexible assignment keys. Of the four fixed keys, 01.5’1 The electrical characteristics of PER-
only the ‘SPI(R] key is equipped with an LED. CEPTION are detailed in Table A.
Station loop limit
Standard telephone 500 R (including telephone)
Electronic key telephone 1000 ft. 24 AWG cable

Minimum leak resistance 30,000 R

Maximum ringer/line (std. tele.) 3

Ringing (std. tele.) 85f 10 Vrms, 20 Hz, immediate ringing

Ringing tone (EKT) 500/640 Hz, modulated at IO Hz

Buzz tone 300 Hz

Busy override tone 2400 Hz

ing trip During silent or ringing period

Dial tone 3501440 Hz, continuous

Busy tone 480/620 Hz, interrupted at 60 ipm

Ringback tone 4401480 Hz, 1 sec. on, 3 sec. off

Overflow tone 480/620 Hz, interrupted at 120 ipm

Recall dial tone 350/440 Hz, three l/8-sec. pulses, followed by continuous tone

Miscellaneous tones 440 Hz

Crosstalk > 75 dB down

Insertion loss
Station-to-station 5 dB
Station-to-trunk 1 dB
Trunk-to-trunk 1 dB

Longitudinal balance > 60 dB (200 h 1000 Hz) on- and off-hook

> 40 dB (1000 ‘L 4000 Hz) on- and off-hook

Return loss > 18dB ERL

idle circuit noise 25 dBrnC

System impedance 600 Q for stations

600/900 5-2 for trunks

Switching TDM, PCM, non-blocking

Primary power 9 0 5 125 V A C , 500 watts, 50160 Hz

Reserve power An external charger/inverter supplies 115 VAC to the primary

power supply

Central office loop limit 1500 r;2

Maximum distance between 1000 ft. (24 AWG)

console and equipment cabinet

Operating temperature 32 m 104” F (0 ti 40” C)

Operating humidity 20 I\J 80% without condensation

Storage temperature 14 I‘v149’ F (-10~65°C)

 Features and Services in PERCEPTION are summarized in Tables B and
C, which list the basic and optional features,
All the features and services available respectively.

Access to Paging Night Service-Universal

Remote Access to Services
Class of Service Restrictions Remote Administration/Maintenance
Code Restrictions-3-digit Rotary Dial Compatibility
Console-less Operation Route Advance
Data Transmission-voice band Station Set Mix
Distinctive Ringing Tandem Switching
Flexible Numbering Tenant Service
Immediate Ringing Tie Trunks
Toll Restriciton
Tone Dialing (DTMF)
Multiple Console Operation Tone-to-dial Pulse Conversion
Multiple Trunk Groups Traffic Measurement
Music-on-hold and Camp-on Uniform Distribution Wiring
Night Service-Fixed Variable Time-out
Night Service-Flexible

Automatic Callback
Call Forward-All Calls Private CO Line Services
Call Forward-No Answer Remote Retrieval of Held Calls
Call Pickup-Directed
Call Pickup-Group
Call Waiting
Conference-3-party With Transfer
Direct Outward Dialing Station Hunting-Circular
Do Not Disturb Station Hunting-Distributed
Hold-All Calls Station Hunting-Secretarial
Manual Line Service Station Hunting-Terminal
Meet-me Page Trunk-to-trunk Connections
Message Waiting Uninterrupted Line Connection

Automatic Dialing On-hook Dialing

Automatic Line Preference Prime Directory Number
Call Status Indication Privacy
Common Audible Signalling Privacy Release
End-to-end Signalling Push-button Dialing
Handsfree Answerback with Speaker Cut-off Push-button/key Access to Features
Handsfree Monitoring Release
l-hold Indication Speaker/Amplifier
I-use Indication Speakerphone
Manual Signall ing Tone Buzzing
Modular Cords Tone Ringing
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Voice Paging
Non-locking Keys Volume Control
*Future feature
 Attendant Camp-on with Indication
Attendant Conference
Attendant Emergency Transfer Control
Attendant Initialize Speed Dialing-System
Attendant Recall
Busy Lamp Field
Call Waiting Lamp Station Verification
Digital Information Display Switched Loop Termination
Direct Access to Paging Through Dialing
Incoming Call lndentification Timed Reminders-Variable
Individual Trunk Access Time of Day Display, Set, Reset
Trunk Group Access Control
Trunk Group Busy Indication
Trunk Equipment Number Display
Night Service Control Trunk-to-trunk Connections
Non-delayed Operation Trunk Verification
Overflow Facility

Power Failure/Emergency Transfer Least Cost Routing

ect Inward Dialing (DID) Station Message Detail Recording
Call Forward-Busy Reserve Power
Multiple Listed Directory Number

20-key EKT Wall Mount Kit

“Future featuke

a) Power Section:
Main power supply
Q2.00 eneral 20 Hz ringing

- 02.0 The system diagram in Figure 6 shows b) Central Control:

the central equipment cabinet, attendant console, Floppy disk unit
electronic key telephone, conventional 500/2500- DCCU
type telephone, and emergency transfer unit. DPEU
An external customer-provided tuner (or equiva- A portion of DPMU
lent) is required as a music-on-hold source. All c) Central Service Equipment:
connections to on-premise equipment and the DTCU
public telephone network are made via a customer- DSWU
provided main distribution frame (MD F). DRCU
A portion of DPMU
2.02 The functional block diagram in Figure 7
shows the central equipment divided into four ipheral Interface Equipment:
main sections; power, central control, central DSTU (interfaces conventional telephones)
service equipment and peripheral interface equip- DEKU (interfaces the EKTs and attendant
ment. consoles)
1

______ -----
 ---
1 --I-
--
---
.-- PE
r -----7---1 r---- --l

--

20Hz - 4 8 - 2 4 +12 +5 -65 (ONLY DCCU

 Various trunk interfaces, such as: Central Control Unit (DCCU)-contains the
DCOU (CO trunk) central processing unit and system memory;
DEMU (tie trunk) performs all system control functions.

2.03 PERCEPTION utilizes a non-blocking, Peripheral Unit (DPEUI-performs data trans-

pulse code modulated (PCM), time division net- mission and receiving functions between
work consisting of six 32-time-slot PCM highways station and trunk interfaces and the central
and a multiplexer circuit that performs time slot control.
interchange, digital padding, and conferencing
functions. Analog-to-digital conversion is per- Receiver Unit (DRCUJ-provides DTMF re-
formed on each peripheral PCB. System tones ceivers, which are required for receiving dialing
(dial, busy, etc) are stored in digital form in from 2500 telephones. Two types of DRCU
read-only-memory (ROM). PCBs are available: DRCU 2-4 and DRCU 2-6.
The DRCU 2-4 contains four circuits and is
Central control consists primarily of a suitable for most systems. For use in systems
processor and its associated memory. Hard- with extremely high outgoing traffic, the
ware logic necessary for various system interfaces DRCU 2-6 (housing six circuits) is available.
is located on the DPEU PCB; a floppy disk unit Only *one DRCU per system is permitted. .*%*
-;&kc. ” , s f”
is used for secure memory storage. “*u
Paging and Music Unit (DPMU)-interfaces _’ “’
with the music source (MOH) and the paging _ “-* -:
equipment. It also has the following functions: _ a-::
.Q
System program loading switch n‘-,lr
0 entral E System initialization switch
Attendant console power supply “.
0 Figure 2 shows the location of the PCB UNA signal control 1,
mounting shelves, power supply, ringing supply, Power failure/emergency transfer unit ‘:’ ,. ‘f,
>” *
and floppy disk unit in the central equipment (DPFT) control
cabinet (DCEC). All PCBs plug in from the front
of the cabinet; all external connections are made CO Trunk Interface Unit (DCOU)-interfaces
at the rear of the cabinet (Figure 3). four CO lines to the system.

0 The DCEC is divided into four shelves, E & M T r u n k U n i t (DEMU)-connects four

designated #I through #4 from top to bottom. TIE trunks to the system.
~~:,‘-J “i’$G “>: j! 1, ;i”, I Li 4-i ;e
Shelf #I houses the DFRA subassembly AI0 TE:
containing the following equipment: Either trunk PCB may be used at each trunk
PCB slot.
a) Floppy Disk Drive (DFDD)-a secure storage
area for system programs and customer office 5 Shelf #3 houses the station line PCBs.
_ data. There are 15 slots, each PCB interfaces with eight
stations. There are two types:
b) 20 Hz Ringing Supply (DRNG).
1) Standard Telephone Interface Unit (DSTU)
03.04 Shelf #2 houses the following PCBs
(eight types) : 2) Electronic Key Telephone Interface Unit
(DEKU)
a ) T i m e S w i t c h U n i t (DSWU)-performs the
time slot interchange function for the PCM Shelf #4 contains the power supply
switching and conferencing. Also provides (DPSA).
digital speech path with digital padding.

b) T i m e C o n t r o l U n i t (DTCU)-provides t h e
timing and control for time slot switching 1 Two electronic key telephones are
and system tones. available with PERCEPTION (the same two
EKT models are used in the Toshiba STRATA faceplate but three additional colors (black, blue
EKTS series). Each EKT is housed in an off-white, and wine) are available as options.
impact resistant plastic case with interchangeable
colored faceplates, and is equipped with handset, The EKT is easily wall mounted by
dial pad, speaker, ringing volume control, speaker- using the optional wall mounting kit.
phone volume control, and modular handset and
tail cords. In addition, each EKT has four fixed 03.16 A l l P E R C E P T I O N EKTs a r e f u l l y
feature keys (SPKR, MUTE, CONF and HOLD) functional speakerphones with handsfree answer-
and either 10 or 20 flexible assignment keys back capability,
(hence the names IO-key and 20-key). Of the
four fixed keys, only the j key is equipped tte~da~t Console
with an LED.
03.21 The PERCEPTION attendant console
03.12 The IO-key EKT has 10 flexible assign- is the switched-loop type, and its housing is con-
ment feature keys. The 10 feature keys are all structed of impact resisitant, off-white plastic.
equipped with LEDs and may be assigned as The layout of the console display panel and
Directory Number (DN) pick-ups or as access faceplate is shown in Figure 8. A volume control
keys to any of the station custom calling features, for the console tone buzzer is located on the rear
of the console behind the busy lamp panel. Modular
03.13 T h e e x p a n d e d 20-key E K T h a s 1 0 jacks for the handset/headset are provided on
additional keys (equipped with LEDs) that may both sides of the console. Also, the handset cradle
be assigned as DN pickups or to access features. can be mounted on either side of the console.
The console display panel includes a Busy Lamp
Each EKT is supplied with a brown Field and the following displays: Incoming Call

SRC cos DEST 7STATUS 7

t- ‘C’ 1
TIE CO WAT FX INT RCL R N G BSY F W D D N D
FIST HNT VCT TLK

ITGB- -ALARM I C W
0 1 2 3 4 MAJ MIN MDR

5 6 7 8 9

POS OVER VER/ EXCL EXCL

NITE B S Y BUZZ CONF FLOW CHG DEST SRC “OLD

~~~1 ELFa

SER
M S G C A L L ;;AL J O I N P A G E L P K 4 LPKB LPKZ LPK, RLS

nuunnnnonn
Identification, Calling Source Number, Class of DND : Called station is in Do Not Disturb mode
Service, Call Destination Number and Call Destina- FWD: Called station is forwarded to number
tion Status. now displayed as DES-T.
RST: Attempted connection is not allowed.
3.22 The Busy Lamp Field (BLF) displays HNT: Called station was busy and hunting
100 2-digit numbers (OOw991, and is equipped has occured to the number now dis-
with a “hundreds group” identifier that shows played as DEST.
which group is currently being displayed. The VCT: Called number does not exist or is
display alternates between groups in response disabled.
to operations of the / key (located on the T L K : Attendant is in a voice connection with
console keyboard). the called party.

Displays: 3.2 The console keyboard design includes

a display window, two horizontal rows of 10 keys
The Incoming Call Identification (ICI) display each, a ‘l2-key dial pad, and a vertical row of
is a backlighted panel that indicates the type of four keys.
call that is currently connected to a console
Loop / key. TwelveII.^_._^ different displays are The faceplate display window houses the
possible:
a” ^^ _^ following displays:

TIE: TIE trunk Trunk Group Busy (TGB) provides 10

co: CO trunk numbered LEDs to indicate the status of
WAT: WATS trunk trunk groups 0 w9. , ’ : f
FX: Foreign exchange trunk
OPR: Dial “0” call ALARM LEDsforMAJOR, MINOR & MDR:
RCL: Recall
SER: Serial call MAJOR: Alarm occurs when the system is
HLD: Held call recall not functional and is accompa-
TIM: Timed reminder (Camp-on, RNA, etc.) nied by an emergency transfer.
LNI: DID call to listed directory number 1 MINOR: Indicates that the system ringing
LN2: DID call to listed directory number 2 power (DRNG) has failed or the
INT: Intercept system time and date was not
reset following a reload or
The Source (SRC) display is a 3character, initialize.
7-segment LED display that gives the attendant MDR: Alarm indicates a problem with
the number of the calling station or trunk external SMDR equipment.
equipment number.
Call Waiting (CW) LED indicates a call is
Class of Service (COS) is displayed as a 2 waiting for the attendant.
character, 7-segment LED display, giving the
attendant the Class of Service of the calling The lower horizontal row of keys are all
- station. equipped with LEDs and (reading from left
to right) are labeled:
The Destination (DEST) display is a 3-charac-
ter, 7-segment LED display showing the station MSG : Activates the Message Waiting
or trunk equipment number called by the feature if the attendant is desig-
attendant. nated as the Message Center.

SER CALL: Activates the Serial Call feature.

The Status (STATUS) display is a backlighted
panel that indicates the status of the called SP DIAL: Activates the Speed Dial-System
trunk or station. Eight different displays are f e a t u r e . - I;., ,>L /”
possible:
JOIN: Connects two parties which have
RNG: Called station is ringing. reached the attendant on two
SY: Called station is busy. different LPK keys.
)‘.I 1 p. ”
.m! 0
 PAGE: Provides attendant with a direct, system clock (while being dis-
push-to-talk access to one paging played the clock can be corrected).
zone or All Page.
BLF: Used to alternate between the
LPK I-4: The four Loop keys are used for “hundreds groups” displayed on
answering and originating calls. the console.

RLS: Releases the console from any RLS SRC: Disconnects the source party from
connection. a Loop key.

The upper horizontal row of keys, with the R LS DEST: Disconnects destination party from
exception of the HOLD key, are all equipped a Loop key.
with LEDs and are labeled left to right:
03.25 A volume control for the console tone
%ITE: Activates the fixed, flexible and signal is located on the rear of the console below
universal night answering features. the Busy Lamp Field housing.
. )“i.
POS B S Y : Used to “busy out” one position The console may be used with either
of a 2-console system. dset or headset, which may be plugged in
on either side of the unit. Also, the handset cradle
SPARE: Reserved for future use. may be mounted on either side of the console.

BUZZ: Allows attendant to select wheth- 3.27 Two switches are located on the under-
er or not signal tone will be heard side of the console. These switches are for emer-
during a Call Waiting condition. gency use only and are labeled as follows:

CONF: Activates attendant conferencing EMT: The Emergency Transfer switch allows
(up to six parties including the the attendant to set the EMT circuits
attendant console). manually in the event of a system mal-
function.
OVERFLOW: Transfers waiting calls to an
alternate answerinq point. INT: The Initialize switch resets the system
logic in the event of a system malfunction.
VER’CHG: Overrides busy station or trunk
- _- (also used to record an account mergency Transfer
number when extending a call).

EXCL DEST: Excludesdestination party from 3.31 The DPFT is mounted external to the
a 3-way conversation. DCEC (typically adjacent to the MDF) and is con-
trolled via the DPMU PCB. This unit will connect
EXCLSRC: Excludes source party from a eight conventional telephones to eight preselected
3-way conversation. trunks. When a reset signal is given to the DPTU
active connections will be protected and finally
HOLD: Holds calls connected to Loop reset when they become idle.
keys.

The dial pad is the standard 12-key alpha-

numeric configuration and is used to dial both
internal and outgoing calls from the console. I All connections to the Central Equipment
Cabinet (DCEC) are made via plug-in connector
The four keys in the vertical row on the right cables. Complete installation instructions, including
of the console are not equipped with LEDs connection diagrams, programming instructions,
and are labeled top to bottom: and operational procedures are included in the
relevant sections of the Installation and Main-
DIS TOD: Displays time and date from tenance manual.
 04.02 PERCEPTION maintenance is aided by Distinctive Ringing:
software diagnostics, which assist in pin-pointing Three types of ringing are provided to dis-
the fault to a particular printed circuit board or tinguish among station-to-station calls, trunk-
subassembly. A system malfunction is corrected to-station calls and automatic callbacks.
by replacing a PCB or other subassembly.
Flexible Numbering:
.j Station directory numbers, as well as trunk
/ J, and special service access codes, may be assigned
*
Stan Features in accordance with the numbering plan desired
by the customer.
5.01 This section contains a brief description
of the PERCEPTION features listed earlier in immediate Ringing:
Tables B and C along with some associated oper- Ringing occurs at a called station as soon as
ating procedures. Detailed operation instructions it is determined to be idle. There is no delay
can be found in the appropriate sections of the caused by waiting for the ringing cycle.
system documentation. Software for the features
listed as standard is present in all PERCEPTION Intercept:
systems. Calls that cannot be completed because of
system restrictions or dialing errors are inter-
2 System Features: cepted and routed to either the attendant or
to overflow tone depending on the type of
Access to Paging: call.
Allows stations to access and use a customer-
supplied amplifier for voice paging. The system Line Lockout:
provides five paging zones, which may be Stations that do not hang up at the end of a
accessed individually or all together. call, or that go off-hook and do not complete
dialing within a predetermined length of time,
* CCSA Access: are released from the common equipment.
Accesses a Common Control Switching Arrange-
ment (CCSA) network for network inward Multiple Console Operation:
dialing to the system, direct outward dialing to Two attendant consoles,, may be used with
the CCSA network, and other features similar PERCEPTION. 41’siyf #sy .1.: )j +I :
to those provided on the public exchange
network. Multiple Trunk Groups:
PERCEPTION can accommodate up to 16
Class of Service Restrictions: trunk groups.
The system provides 16 classes of service
which may be assigned to stations to allow Music-on-hold and Camp-on:
or deny access to features. g s. ! ,:;* A standard interface allows connection to a
customer-provided music source. When music
Code Restriction-3-digit: is provided in the system, it is connected to
.IStations may be restricted from toll calls- all calls placed in the hold or camp-on condi-
i
<‘” a toll call is detected by system analysis of the tion by a station or the attendant.
.i first three digits dialed after the trunk access
,: code.
Night Service-Fixed:
Console-less Operation: When the system is in the night service mode,
The system may be operated without a console, incoming trunk calls are routed to preselected
all incoming trunk calls are handled using the stations.
Plight Service features.
Night Service-Flexible:
Data Transmission: Allows the attendant to assign trunks to
PERCEPTION is suitable for voice-band data stations for night service. During night service,
applications and is compatible with conven- incoming calls on these trunks will be routed
tional modems. , T;.X to stations assigned by the attendant.
I
y‘ I & h ’
i ,i _
* Future Feature
Night Service-Universal: Tone Dialing:
Trunks not otherwise assigned by Fixed or When equipped with DTMF receivers (DRCU
Flexible Night Service will ring a common PCS), PERCEPTION is compatible with 2500
bell or chime to indicate an incoming call. telephones.
Any station can answer the call by dialing a
specific access code. Tone-to-dial Pulse Conversion:
DTMF signals from 2500 telephones are
automatically converted to rotary dial pulses
Remote Access to Services:
for transmission to a rotary dial central office.
Allows a user outside the system to acce
the system services via an exchange network
connection. The user dials a preselected DDD Traffic Measurement:
The system provides traffic information, such
number to connect to the system and then
as peg counts and usage, to a terminal or printer.
dials a 3-digit authorization code. The user
may then make any call as if the user were
a system station. This service is provided only Uniform Distribution Wiring:
when signalling is on a DTMF basis. Since PERCEPTION employs a d-wire elec-
tronic key telephone, conventional key equip-
ment is not required. It is possible, therefore,
Remote Administration/Maintenance: to prewire an installation site with 2 or 3-pair
System will interface with a standard modem cable without concern for the future configura-
to allow administration and diagnostic soft- tion of the system.
ware routines to be accessed from a software
location.
Variable Timeout:
The timeout intervals associated with most
Rotary Dial Compatibility: features are variable by system programming.
The system is compatible with conventional
rotary dial telephones. Station Features:

Route Advance: A/O TE:

Routes outgoing calls over alternate facilities The fdlowing station features are available
when the first trunk choice is busy. with either conventional telephones or EKTs.

Automatic Callback:
irectory number can appear simul- Permits a calling station user, upon encounter-
taneously on a mixture of 500/2500 telephones ing a busy directory number or trunk access
and El<Ts. A maximum of eight appea code, to operate a dedicated key or dial an
is possible for a given directory number access code which causes the system to monitor
the called number and alert the calling station
when the number becomes idle.
Tandem Switching:
_ Trunk-to-trunk connections through the system
Call Forward-All Calls:
are possible without attend nt assistance. Allows calls destined for a station to be routed
@C r>, Pt‘ $1 t:““‘“@“L,..?
_
to another station or trunk. The activating
Tenant Service: station may be used to originate calls while
PERCEPTION can be used to serve two tenants. the feature is activated.
-~\i’ki, _. -‘I +,: . . c”; ” \
,
TIE Trunks: Call Forward-No Answer:
TIE Trunk PCBs are available to allow con- Any call which is not answered after the end
nections to other PBXs. of a specific time period is automatically
routed to the next DN in the hunting sequence
Toll Restriction: specified for the called DN. _ ii,, I._ (2 :
Stations may be restricted from making toll
calls. The system detects toll calls by recog- Call Pickup-Directed:
nizing “0” or “1” dialed as the first or second A station user can answer calls ringing at
digit following the trunk access code. another station by operating the dedicated key

*Future Feature
 or dialing a special pickup code and then indication is a ring every 20 minutes or an
dialing the ringing station’s number. EKT can be equipped with a m key/LED.

Call Pickup-Group: Override:

A station user can operate a dedicated key or Enables a station user (after reaching a busy
dial a special code to answer an incoming call number) to override the busy condition and
ringing on another station within the same enter the existing conversation on a bridged
pickup group. basis. A warning tone notifies the existing
conversation that a third party is about to
Call Waiting: enter the conversation.
During an established call, a tone signal informs
the station user that a trunk call is waiting to Private CO Line Services:
be connected. The called station can accept Permits the appearance of a CO line on an
the waiting call and then _l_l”.
talk alternately
,. “_” to EKT key or as the number of a 500/2500
telephone. Upon going off-hook, the station
is connected to the CO by a dedicated trunk
Qnfere~ce- arty with sfer: system.
Stations may consult with another party ring that
(station or trunk) while on any type of call. station directly.
The original party is held during this time an
is excluded from the conversation. The station alls:
user may transfer the held party to the con- Calls that have been placed on hold by a
sulted party or the consulte arty may be retrieved by a different station
added to the original conversation to form ick-up-Directed feature.
a S-party conference.
Repeat Last Number Dialed:
Direct Outward Dialing: The system automatically stores the last
Station users can gain access to trunks by number dialed by each station. The number
dialing an access code. can be redialed by dialing an access code or
operating the dedicated key.
Do Not Disturb:
Allows a station to give a busy indication to Speed Dialing:
callers when the user does not wish to be Enables a station user to dial telephone num-
disturbed. bers using abbreviated codes. Two types of
Speed Dialing are provided:
Hold-All Calls:
A station user may hold any call in progress Speed Dial-Station allows the user to
by depressing the j] key or by dialing a maintain a separate IO-number directory
special hold code. which may be shared by any number of
stations. f.5 *pp;-; p” ;p p:: gL: ‘.
‘Manual Line Service
Manual or Hot Line service is provided to Speed Dial-System allows the station
500/2500 telephones only. When the station users or attendant to access a system
user comes off-hook the call is directed to the directory of up to 90 numbers.
attendant or to a preselected DN without
dialing. Station Hunting-Circular:
Hunting occurs over all station directory
Meet-me Page: numbers in the group, beginning with the
Allows the station user to remotely access a called number. The call is completed to the
call which was “parked” for him by the first idle station directory number in the
I ri (,, 1!’ iv-$ I a(i) / i; : ‘” x” : L
attendant. group. The directory numbers may be arranged
in either consecutive or nonconsecutive order.
Message Waiting:
The designated Message Center can indicate Station Hunting-Distributed:
to a station user that a- message is waiting. The This is a special circular hunt that provides
c>e ,. ‘i.:” i,i

* Future Feature
 a degree of call distribution. Hunting occurs End-to-end Signalling:
over all stations in the group in ascending The EKT is able to transmit DTMF tones
order by DN. The starting point for each hunt through the system to the distant end any-
is incremented for each call regardless of which time following normal address dialing.
DN is dialed. Five groups are possible with
a maximum of eight members per group. Handsfree Answerback with Speaker Cut-off:
All EKTs are equipped for handsfree answer-
Station Hunting-Secretarial: back on voice-announced calls. The EKT may
Any directory number can be used as the also be assigned a Speaker Cut-off m key.
last number in two or more station hunting Activating SC0 temporarily defeats handsfree
groups. answerback and forces all calls to ring the
station.
Station Hunting-Terminal:
Hunting always starts with the called directory Handsfree Monitoring:
number and ends with the last directory num- The handset can go back on-hook for hands-
ber in the prearranged group; however, the free monitoring of an on-hold condition.
call is completed to the first idle number.
The hunting sequence can be either consecutive I-hold Indication: / lc-..:, ?.
or nonconsecutive. A distinctive LED flash is provided to indicate
the call that is on-hold at a given EKT.
Trunk-to-trunk Connections:
A station user can use the Conference/Transfer i - u s e I n d i c a t i o n :
feature to connect two trunks. A distinctive LED is provided to indicate
which Directory Number is currently in use
Uninterrupted Line Connection: at a given EKT.
Prevents the insertion of “Warning Tones”
on any given station line. This feature is Manual Signalling:
intended to provide security for the line(s) A station user may signal a predesignated
used for data transmission, although other station by operating a dedicated key on the
applications are also possible. EKT.

NOTE: Modular Cords:

The following sration features are available All EKTs are equipped with modular line
on the EKT. cd iy and handset cords.

Automatic Dialing: Multiple Appearance Directory Number:

One or more keys may be assigned as auto- This type of DN has key appearances on more
matic dialing keys with each key controlling than one station. Calls can be originated or
a single telephone number. Operation of each received at any appearance.
key, after receiving dial tone, causes the
- stored number to be outpulsed. Non-locking Keys:
All EKT keys are non-locking. l-use and l-hold
Automatic Line Preference: indications are provided on DN LEDs to pre-
Automatically connects the EKT to its Prime vent confusion over which DN is active on a
Directory Number (PDN) upon going off-hook. given EKT.

Call Status Indication: On-hook Dialing:

LEDs associated with DN kevs provide a visual Permits the EKT user to dial without lifting
indication of the status of’the call on that the handset.
DN by various illumination states.
Prime Directory Number:
Common Audible Signalling: Each EKT has a Prime Directory Number
Permits tone ringing at a station when an (PDN) that is selected automatically when
incoming call is presented on any DN appear- the station user goes off-hook (Automatic
ing at that station. Line Preference). k( , :.
Privacy: directly toward the EKT. If SC0 is activated,
Prevents the station user from entering an the call must be answered via the handset.
existing conversation. Privacy is the inherent
mode of operation for all calls in PERCEPTION. Volume Control:
The only exception is where bridging is speci- The EKT has two volume controls: one varies
fically provided by use of the EKT/500 Station the volume level of the ringing tone, buzzing
Set Mix feature. tone and voice page, the other controls speaker-
phone volume.
Privacy Release:
By operating the Privacy Release key (if Attendant Console Features:
equipped), an EKT user can permit up to four
more stations to enter a conversation on a Alarm Lamps: 1). . \: , \ “.
Multiple Appearance DN. The attendant console ‘Ts equipped with LEDs
to indicate Major or Minor system alarms.
Push-button Dialing: An MDR alarm is also provided for use with
All EKTs are equipped with push-button dial an external Message Detail Recorder.
pads which generate digital messages to be
translated by the system CPU. The buttons Attendant Camp-on with Indication:
are arranged in the same fashion as a conven- Enables an incoming trunk call, which has
tional DTMF dial pad. been extended by the attendant to a busy
station, to be held until the called station
Push-button/key Access to Features: becomes idle. The busy station hears a tone to
The EKT allows simplified access to sophis- indicate the waiting call. When the called
ticated system features via dedicated keys. station becomes idle it rings with the waiting
call. Camp-on and Call Waiting are mutually
Release: exclusive.
A Release key can be provided on the EKT
which allows the user to disconnect from an Attendant Conference:
existing call without having to go on-hook or The attendant has the ability to establish a
operate the hookswitch. conference with up to six parties (including
the attendant console) or five parties with the
Speaker/Amplifier: console not included.
Each EKT is equipped with a speaker and
amplifier to produoe the ringing tone, buzz Attendant Emergency Transfer Control:
tone, warning tone and voice-page signals. A switch is-provided on the bottom of the
console to manually control the optional
Speakerphone: ‘__ Emergency Transfer Unit. The switch initiates
All EKTs are,/fully funcfional speakerphones. j/: transfer action for all emergency lines and
r ‘4% ~#‘. ‘+, it* trunks regardless of the system operational
Tone Buzzing: status.
- Alerts the EKT user via a buzz tone through
the speaker, used for warning tones. Attendant Initialize:
A switch is provided on the bottom of the
Tone Ringing: console to initialize the system logic. This
An adiustable volume rinqins tone via the switch is for emergency use.
EKT speaker is used to alert-the user to an
incomina call.
Y Attendant Recall:
A station user may recall the attendant to
Voice Paging: any 2-party conference-
By depressing an assigned key, the calling
EKT user causes a single tone burst to be Busy Lamp Field:
sounded at the called EKT. Following the tone, The PERCEPTION attendant console is e-
the caller can speak and be heard through the quipped with a IOO-LED panel (displaying
called EI<T’s speaker. The called station user busy DNs) and a 7-segment display, under
answers via handsfree answerback by speaking the control of the j key, indicating which

..
 of the two possible hundreds group is being Overflow Facility:
displayed. When activated by the dedicated key, the over-
flow facility automatically transfers any
Call Waiting Lamp: \?.* - .( , , :\ ” I, .^_ incoming calls which remain unanswered by
Indicates calls are waiting in the attendant the attendant for a specified time period to a
queue. preassigned station or the Universal Night
Answer facility.
Digital Information Display:
Displays five specific call details: Position Busy:
In a 2-console”system, either of the consoles
ICI: Incoming Call Identification can be taken out of service by using \=I
SRC: Source or calling party’s number key. If both consoles are “made busy”, the
cos: Class of Service of calling party system automatically switches to Night Service.
DES-T: Destination or called party’s number
STATUS: Status of called party Push-button Dialing:
The attendant uses a push-button dial pad to
Direct Access to Paging: establish all calls.
The 1x1 key on the attendant console pro-
vides the operator with direct, push-to-talk Secrecy:
access to one paging zone or to all paging Secrecy automatically splits the Source party
zones. from the connection when the attendant
starts to extend the call or answers an atten-
Incoming Call Identification: dant recall. The attendant can void the split
The ICI section of the console display provides manually.
the attendant with the identity of each type
of incoming call. Serial Call:
If an incoming trunk caller wishes to be con-
Individual Trunk Access: nected to several stations in sequence, the
The attendant can access each trunk individu- attendant can arrange the trunk to recall the
ally with the -1 key. console as each station disconnects.

“Interposition Call Transfer: Speed Dialing:

In a 2-console system, an attendant at one A dedicated key provides access to the Speed
position can transfer a call to the other posi- Dialing-System feature for the attendant. The
tion for handling. attendant also has the ability to reprogram the
Speed Dial-System directory.
-\, *Interposition Calling:
‘” Each attendant can call the other for consul- Splitting:
tation. The attendant is able to consult privately with
either party of a call that appearson the console.
* Lockout:
The attendant is denied the ability to re-enter Station Number Display:
an established connection held on the console The SRC and DEST displays show the identity
unless recalled by the station user. of any station connected to the console.

Night Service Control: Station Verification:

The console operator has the ability to activate The attendant has the ability to establish a
and de-activate Night Service and to post voice connection with a busy- DN. During the
trunks to specific night stations. connection, periodic bursts of tone alert the
conversation to the attendant’s presence.
Non-delayed Operation:
The console operator can make a call for a Switched Loop Termination:
station user (who has reached the console Each call requiring attendant assistance is
by dialing “0”) without requiring the station automatically switched to one of four Loop
user to go on-hook. keys.

*Future Feature
Through Dialing: eaau res
At the attendant’s discretion, station users
may complete dialing after the attendant System Features
selects the trunk facility on attendant-handled
outgoing calls. Power Failure/Emergency Transfer:
If a control or power failure causes loss of call
Timed Reminders-Variable: processing, selected trunk lines are automa-
The time-out intervals (that determine the tically connected directly to preselected
recall of the attendant to the calling party) standard telephones. Optional hardware is
are adjustable by system programming. required.

Time of Day Display, Set, Reset: *Direct Inward Dialing (DID):

The time and date from the system’s real- Stations are assigned T-digit listed directory
time clock can be displayed and reset at the numbers and can be called directly from the
attendant console. : $\ “i: 1 central office via direct-in-dial trunks.

Trunk Group Access Control: Call ~~rwar

The attendant can restrict dial-access by all calls are automatically routed to the atten-
station lines to individual trunk groups. Sta- dant when the called station line is busy.
tions attempting to dial-access the restricted
groups will be routed to the attendant for call Multiple Listed Directory Number (LDN):
completion. Allows two LDNs to be used for DID
purposes on one installation. Each LDN
Trunk Group Busy Indication: can be assigned a unique Incoming Call
The console is equipped with LEDs showing Identification (ICI) on the attendant
an “all trunks busy” condition for up to ten console.
trunk groups.
*Least Cost Routing:
Trunk Equipment Number Display: Provides automatic routing over alternate
The SRC and DEST displays show the identity customer facilities based on the dialed number
of any trunk connected to the console. and a customer-specified selection algorithm.

Trunk-to-trunk Connections: Station Message Detail Recording:

The attendant has the ability to connect an Provides PERCEPTION with the capability
incoming trunk to an outgoing trunk through to record (on magnetic tape or hard copy
the console. device) the message data (such ascall duration,
digits dialed, and originating station) of calls
Trunk Verification: made to and from the system.
The attendant has the ability to establish a
voice connection with an apparently busy Reserve Power:
e trunk or special service access line to determine The primary power supply is designed to
if it is in working order. When the attendant operate from 115 VAC, which is provided by
is connected to a busy trunk, periodic bursts of an optional charger/inverter and batteries
tone alert the conversation to the attendant’s mounted outside the equipment cabinet.
presence.
Station Features-EKT

20-key E KT:
The PERCEPTION EKT is available in an
expanded 20-key version.

The EKT can be easily converted for wall

mounting with an optional kit.

"Future Feature
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
CONNECTOR TABLE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
ILLUSTRATION LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
01 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
UNPACKING and INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PACKINGandSTORlNG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CENTRAL EQUIPMENT CABINET LOCATION REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . .
Commercial Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Reserve Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Room Recommendations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CENTRAL EQUIPMENT CABINET ASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DFRA Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Power Supply Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printed Circuit Board Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printed Circuit Board Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MDF ARRANGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CABLE CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Key Telephone Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Telephone Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attendant Console Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
TrunkConnections ...........................................
Maintenance Terminal/MODEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ELECTRONIC KEY TELEPHONE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EKT Wall Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting the EKT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
EKT Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SYSTEM INDICATORS and CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
SYSTEM POWER UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Power Failure/Emergency Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Paging Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Music-on-hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Universal Night Answer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Station Message Detail Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
LIST OF CONNECTOR CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEKU/DSTU POSITIONS L 00% L 01(1/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEKU/DSTU POSITIONS L 01(1/2) Q L 02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEKU,‘DSTU POSITIONS L 03 * L 041 l/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEKU/DSTU POSITIONS L 04(1/2) w LO5. .................
DEKU/DSTU POSITIONS L 06 -JL 07( l/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEKU/DSTU POSITIONS L 07(1/2)-~ L 08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEKU/DSTU POSITIONS L 09 WL 10(1/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEKU/DSTU POSITIONS L 10(1/2) -., L Il. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . #
DEKU/DSTU POSITIONS L 12~ L 13(1/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEKU/DSTU POSITIONS L 13(1/2) Q L14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTENDANT CONSOLE #O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTENDANT CONSOLE #I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGING, MUSIC and UNA RING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRUNK CARD POSITIONS OObO2 Csc PFT CONTROL . . . . . . .
TRUNK CARD POSITIONS 03 ~05 & PFT CONTROL . . . . . . .
TRUNK CARD POSITIONS 06~07 UNA RING & PFT CONTR
CENTRAL OFFICE LINE CONNECTION & PFT CONTROL . . .
STATION LINE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MINIMUM DCEC FLOOR SPACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GROUND CONNECTION BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING DCEC REAR COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCECTOPSHELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DFRACABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSAFRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSA REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VOLTMETER CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSAPINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSALOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCEC CONNECTOR PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSACABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSA MOUNTING SCREWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLIDING DPSA INTO PLACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSA GROUND CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLOSED CONNECTOR PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCECINTERIOR............................................~ ....
DTCUPCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCCUPCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPEUPCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCOUPCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEMUPCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCEC REAR CONNECTOR PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EKT CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STANDARD TELEPHONE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTENDANT CONSOLE #O CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTENDANT CONSOLE #I CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO-key EKT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20-key EKT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOVING EKT BASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EKTWIREACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EKT WIRE ROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HANDSET HANGER KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSA POWER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INSERTING DISKETTE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPFT FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGING WITH MOH FROM SAME AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGING WITH ONE AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PAGING WITH MULTIPLE AMPLIFIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PRINTER CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXAMPLE: SMDR CALL RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
 invet-ter).

This section describes the installation

procedures necessary to ensure proper operation
of the PERCEPTION system. Humidity at the central equipment
t (DCEC) location should be within 20 w 80%
(without condensation), and the temperature
When the PERCEPTION system is re- should be relatively constant within a range of
ceived, examine all packages and make careful 32 ~104” F (0~40” C). Exposure to dust and
note of any visible damage. If any damage is found, airborne chemicals should be avoided.
bring it to the attention of the delivery carrier and
ations
make the proper claims.
Check the PERCEPTION system against The minimum floor and maintenance
the purchase order and packing slip. If it is deter- space required for installation of the DCEC is
mined that equipment is missing, contact your shown in Figure ‘I.
supplier imm~djately.
After unpacking (before the installa-
tion is started), inspect all equipment for damage.
If any damage is detected, contact your supplier
immediately.

When storing or shipping PCBs, be sure

re packed in their original anti-static bags for
protection against static discharge. The following requirements must be
considered when selecting a location for the
DCEC:
The location E:
Dry and clean
Well ventilated
Well lit
Easily accessible
The location E:
The PERCEPTION system requires a Subject to extreme heat or cold
power source of 90 w 125 VAC, 50/60 Hz, and has Subject to corrosive fumes
a maximum power consumption of 500 watts. Next to a reproducing or copying machine
The AC power outlet should be grounded and
eratio
separately fused.
1 The operating loop limits of the sta-
equipment must be considered when choosing
the location of the DCEC. The limit for each type
0 If reserve power is required, it must
of instrument:
be provided by a commercially-available unin-
terruptable power source system (battery, charger, EKT (‘IO- or 20-key)-1000cable feet (24AWG)
 Conventional telephone-500 ohms (including
telephone) AI”. :/. 1

Attendant Console-1000 cable feet (24 AWG)

Acceptable cable for all telephones is

22 or 24 AWG twisted pair inside telephone
station cable, jacketed but not shielded. Two
1. Obtain a suitable voltmeter and set it for a
twisted pairs are required for an EKT and one
possible reading of up to 250 VAC.
pair for a conventional telephone.
2. Connect the meter probes between the two
A 25pair cable is required for the
main AC voltage points on the wail outlet.
ant console. The console is equipped with
The reading obtained should be 90 m 130 VAC.
a male 50-pin amphenol-type connector.
3. Move one of the meter probes to the third
prong terminal (GND). Either the same reading
The PERCEPTION system requires a or a reading of 0 volts should be obtained.
solid earth ground on the ground connection block
located behind the connector panel at the lower . If the reading is V, leave one probe on the
rear of the DCEC (Figure 2): Failure to provide GND terminal and move the other probe to
such a ground may lead to confusing trouble the second voltage terminal. if a reading of
symptoms in the system and, in extreme cases, OV is obtained on both voltage terminals, the
circuit board failure. t properly grounded. Omit steps
oceed directly to step 8.

on one terminal and a read-

7, and proceed

on one terminal and a read-

on the other terminal
both probes from the
outlet.

7. Set the meter on the”OHlVlS/Rxl”scale, place

-
robe on the GN terminal and the other
In most installations, within the continental probe on the terminal which gave a reading
- United States. the crrounc 1 provided by the of OV. A reading of less than 1 ohm should
“third wire ground”-at : the commercial power be obtained. If a reading of less than 1 ohm
outlet will be satisfactory for all PERCEPTION is not obtained, the outlet is
requirements. However, in a small percentage grounded.
of installations this ground may be installed
incorrectly. Therefore, prior to installing a 8. If the above tests show that the outlet is not
PERCEPTION system, the third wire ground properly grounded, that condition should
must be tested for continuity by either measur- be corrected (per Article 250 of the National
ing the resistance between the 3rd prong Electrical Code) by a qualified electrician
terminal (earth ground) and a metal cold water before the PERCEPTlON system is connected.
pipe (maximum: 1 ohm), or by using a com-
mercially-available earth ground indicator. If
neither procedure is possible, then the test
procedures outlined in Paragraph should
be performed. The central equipment cabinet (DCEC)
consists of a single, free-standing cabinet mounted
on casters for easy movement. Assembly of the
DCEC consists of installing the disk drive/ringing
supply subassembly (DFRA), the power supply
assembly (DPSA), and the various printed circuit
boards (PCBs).

5. ~stal~atio~

5.14 The DFRA subassembly, housing the

Disk Drive (DFDD) and the ringing supply
(DRGU), is mounted on the top shelf of the DCEC.
To install the DFRA:

a) Loosen the 6 screws securing the rear cover

of the DCEC and lift the cover off while
allowing the screw heads to clear the “keyhole”
provided for each screw (Figure 3).

b) Remove and save the 4 screws from the front

of the DCEC top shelf (Figure 4).

4 Unpack the DFRA and inspect it carefully

for any visible damage.

d) The DFRA is shipped with all cables attached

but the connectors may have worked loose
during shipping-check each connector care-
fully to be sure it is seated properly.

e) Slide the DFRA into place from the front

of the DCEC. Take care that its cables are
not damaged and do not cause damage.

f) Attach all DFRA cables to the DCEC mother-

board as shown in Figure 5. Thecableconnec- marked to designate its associated jack on the
tors are all different sizes and each one is motherboard.
g) Secure the DFRA to the front of the DCEC ground pins and the various voltage outputs.
using the 4 screws removed earlier. (Refer to Figure 9; use -24GND pin for testing
the -24V pins, +5GND pin for +5V pins, etc.)
h) Replace the DCEC rear cover and tighten Verify that the voltages are within the fol-
the 6 screws. lowing tolerances:

Power Supply installation

5202
05.21 The DPSA (Figures 6 and 7) consists of (7) (1)
a single metal chassis. Circuit breakers and LED
indicators for each output, along with an AC
FF switch, are located on the front panel.
An AC power cord, green ground wire and two
connectors are found on the rear of the unit.
The two connectors are labeled J201 and J202
and will receive the two mating plugs in the DCEC.

05.22 Before the DPSA is installed in the

DCEC, it should be bench tested in the following
manner:

a) Start with DPSA power switch off. -

b) Plug AC power cord into AC outlet. RANGE (!/DC) NOM INAL (VDC)
-47.52 w48.96 -48
c) Momentarily depress each DPSA circuit breaker -23.52 rv 24.96 -24
to be certain that it is not tripped. +I 1.76 - 12.48 +I2
-11.76 rv 12.48 -12
d) Place the DPSA power switch in the 0 t-5.0 N 5 . 4 +5
position. -5.0 IAJ 5 . 4 -5
If any failures are noted, replace the DPSA.
e) Verify that all DPSA power indicator LEDs 05.23 The DPSA is installed in the bottom
are on. If any failures are noted, replace the shelf of the DCEC (Figure 10) as follows:
DPSA.

f) The DPSA outputs are checked at the two

connectors (J201 and J202) on the rear (Figure
8). Each pin is plainly marked as to what
voltage should be found there. Using a digital
voltmeter (DVM) adjusted to the appropriate
range, measure between the corresponding
4 Remove and save the two screws located in e) Remove and save the four DPSA mounting
the upper corners of the DCEC connector screws from the front of the DCEC (Figure 13).
panel (Figure 1 I).
f) Slide the DPSA in from the front of the DCE
b) Loosen the thumb screws that are provided (Figure 14). Take care that the AC power cord
for securing the connector locking passes through the rear opening and that the
the connector panel can move freely (F ground wire is not caught behind the unit.

The connector panel is hinged on the bottom; g) Make certain that the DPSA is not crushing
lower it carefully to expose the internal wiring. any wires and then secure the front panel
to the DCEC using the four screws removed
d) Locate the tw e plastic connectors in- earlier.
tended for the Remove the tape secur-
ing their cables t o the bottom of the D h) Plug the two connectors into J201 and J202
and ensure that they are positioned so as on the rear of the §A and connect the
be damaged or cause damage when the ground wire to the erminal in the upper
ner of the ground connection block

il ower cord through the

slot in the left rear of the

1) or panel with the two screws

o not install the connector
locking bar until the cables are in

nit)-one per system:

Performs the time slot interchange function
CM switching, digital padding and
conferencing.

CU (Time Control Unit)-one per system:

Provides the timing and control for the time
 main memory. Performs all system control
functions.

DPEU (Peripheral Equipment Interface Unit)-one

per system:
Performs data transmission and receiving func-
tions between the central control, and all
peripheral equipment, including: (
Station PCBs
Trunk PCBs <*‘ 3 .‘(
Modem interface $‘” _:.
TTY interface
SMDR interface : %

D RCU (Receiver Unit)-one per system:

Optional PCB provides DTMF receivers, which
are required for receiving:.dialing from 2500
slot switching on the DSWU PCB and supplies telephones. Two types of DRCU PCBs are
the system tones. available: DRCU 2-4 and DRCU 2-6. The
m7-‘DRCU 2-4 contains four circuits and is suitable
DCCU (Central Control Unit)--one per system: for most systems. For use in systems with
Contains the system central processor and ’ extremely high outgoing traffic, the DRCU
‘* ,.
L-

aQ 3
cl

L- -

c
I

i “.
\ “’
 2-6 (housing six circuits) is available. Only one operated in an Immediate Start, Delay Dial,
DRCU per system is permitted. or Wink Start mode. Each DEMU occupies
a DCOU position and, therefore, a maximum
DPMU (Paging and Music-on-hold Unit)-one of eight may be installed in a system.
per system:
This PC6 is required in every system, and per- DEKU (Electronic Key Telephone Unit):
forms several miscellaneous functions. Interfaces eight EKTs to the system. It is also
used as thrxendant console interface. Each
Paging interface and control attendant console utilizes one specific EKT
Music-on-hold interface circuit.
Power Failure/Emergency transfer control
UNA signal control ATT #O-PCB position LOO circuit #I
Attendant Console power transmission ATT #I-PCB position Ll2 circuit #I
Houses program load and initialize control
switches If that console is not used, a normal EKT
can be connected to that circuit. A maximum
entral Office Trunk of fifteen (15)
DCOU PCB interfac CO/FX/WATS stations) may be i
lines to the system. It provides the following
options on a per-circuit basis. DSTU (Standard Telephone Unit) :
Interfacese-ightconventional telephones (DTMF
Loop or Ground Start or rotary dial) to the system. A maximum of
600- or 900-ohm termination fifteen (15) DSTU or DEKU PCBs (120 sta-
tions) may be installed in the system.
A maximum of eight (8) DCOU PCBs (32
trunk lines) can be installed in a system (see 5.40
DEMU).
Install the DSWU, DTCU, DCCU, DPEU,
DEMU (E & M Trunk Unit): and DPMU in their proper positions per
Each DEMU PCB interfaces four E & M Tie Figure 17. There are no options to select on these
trunks to the system. The DEMU provides PCBs; however, there are plug verifications to be
a “Type 1” 2-wire E & M interface with the made on the DTCU, DCCU and DPEU boards.
option of a 600- or 900-ohm voice line ter- Refer to Figures 18, ‘I9 and 20 and verify that
mination, and, under software control, can be the connection plugs are in place at the locations

! .>A‘ ; PI;” j I;,

, l *’
 shorting bar that can connect any one pair
a n d 600/900-ohm termination options that must of adjacent pins. Select the desired option
be selected before they are installed: according to the following table. (Note; the
table is printed on each DCOU PCB for ref-
a) Ground/Loop Start selections are made in- erence.)
dividually for each of the four circuits using
the strapping terminals (Figure 21). OPTION STRAP PINS
NO EXTEND D-E
T B 102-Circuit ‘I EXTEND B-C
TB 202~Circuit 2
TB 302-Circuit 3 NORlVlAL C-D
T B 402-Circuit 4 LOOP START REVERSE A-B
b) The strapping terminal consists of five pins
labeled A, B, C, D, and E, and an insulated c) T h e G R O U N D S T A R T “EXTEIVD/NO EX-
 T E N D ” option refers to the use of “loop line to be used, and then make the selection
extenders” on long CO lines. with the shorting bar.

If a battery boost is used on the trunk Connect the center pin to the outer pin
line, select “EXTEND’‘-otherwise, “NO labeled either “600” or “900”.
EXTEND” should be selected.
h) Install the DCOU PCB(s) (one for each group
d) The LOOP START “NORMAL/REVERSE” of four circuits) in the slots designated TOO
option refers to the system’s ability to detect through TO7 on the DCEC upper shelf (Figure
a pre-ring supervision signal in the form of a 17).
battery polarity reversal on the CO line TIP
& RING. DEMU PCBs have 600/900-ohm voice
ermination selections that must be made
If “‘NORMAL” is selected, the system before they are installed:
will not be sensitive to CO line polarity.
a) The selections are made on an individual
If “REVERSE” is selected, the CO circuit circuit basis using the strapping terminals
will be “made busy” when the CO reverses (Figure 22):
polarity prior to ringing on an incoming call.
- TB 101 -Circuit 1
e) 600/900-ohm termination selections are made TB 201--Circuit 2
on an individual circuit basis using the strap- TB 301-Circuit 3
ping terminals (Figure 21). TB 401 -Circuit 4

TB 101 -Circuit ‘l b) The strapping terminals consist of three pins

TB 201 -Circuit 2 and an insulated shorting bar capable of con-
TB 301 -Circuit 3 necting two adjacent pins.
7-B 401 -Circuit 4
c) Determine the proper impedance for the trunk
f) The strapping terminals consist of three pins lines to be used and make the selection with
and an insulated shorting bar capable of the shorting bar.
connecting two adjacent pins.
Connect the center pin to the outer pin
g) Determine the proper impedance for the trunk labeled either “600” or “900”.
 Ts. If an attendant console is to be installed,
ust be included in the EKT count. A DEKU
PCB must be used in the LOO position when
tendant Console #O is used and in the LIZ?
sition for Attendant Console #I. Other DEKU
positions are flexible.

s are installed in locations

hrough L14 on the lower shelf of the DCEC
at the rate of one PC for each group of eight
conventional teleohones to be used.

‘7-U

All connections from the DCEC to

external equipment, such as trunks, station equip-
ent, etc. are made via a customer-provided main
stribution frame (MDF).
-
A typical layout for a PERCEPTION
d) Install the DEMU PCB(s) (one for each group MDF is shown in Figure 24. Cables with amphenol-
of four circuits) in the slots designated TOO type connectors are attached to the connector
through TO7 on the DCEC upper shelf (Figure panel of the DCEC and secured with the connector
17). locking bar (Figure 23). Plastic cable clamps are
provided along the base of the DCEC to secure the
NO 7-E: cables. The opposite ends of the cables are then
The combined tot-a/ of DCOU and DEM terminated on “66’‘-type quickconnect terminal
PC8s cahnot exceed e&h r. blocks. Split blocks with bridging clips should
be used to allow for fault isolation. Connect each
s are installed in locations cable from the DCEC to one side of the block,
through l-14 on the lower shelf of the external equipment cables to the other side, and
rate of one r each group of eight use bridging clips to make the connections.
 PERCEPTION CENTRAL EQUIPMENT CABINET

(AMPHENOL) 1

DCOUI
DEMU

(x3)

DSTU/ 1

CHARGER, BATTERY, INVERTER

DPMU

115VAC ,/’ ATT0

_ - - - -
r - - - -
I
EXTERNAL GROUNDF

l-o co
OR
25-PAIR TIE LINE

ATT CONSOLE
500-TYPE OR
2500-TYPE 500-TYPE OR
TELEPHONE

FOR POWER FAILURE

OR EMERGENCY

06.03 FCC regulations prohibit unregistered on the connector panel at the lower rear of the
equipment from being terminated on the same DCEC and on the Power Failure Transfer Unit.
block as trunk lines. It is good practice to separate Cables with standard amphenol-type connectors
trunk lines and all other equipment. are used for everything except the TTY, SMD R
and MODEM terminals.

07.03 Detailed connection information for

each cable is shown in Tables B through S.
07.01 A listing of connector cables required
for the PERCEPTION system is shown in Table A.

All connections to the system are made

 ection

a) Find a station Port Number as follows: See the DEKT Program in Section
100-l 00-300, Programming, for inputting infor-
PCB Location Circuit on PCB Port No. mation concerning the various EKTs. The system
LOO hJ L14 ‘ih8 must be told which type of EI<T (IO- or 20-key),
EX. LO1 3 LO13 and what key assignment is required.

b) Find a trunk Port Number as follows: EKTs are connected to the MDF via
standard twisted pair jacketed telephone cable.
PCB Location Circuit on PCB Port No. To accommodate the EKT modular line cord,
TOO k TO7 IN4 terminate the cable in a modular station connector
EX. TO2 4 TO24 block at the station location. The standard modular

PCB CONNETOR
CROSS-CONNECT BLOCK
DEKU IfCB BLOCK

ELECTRONIC
KEY TELEPHONE

(JOI-JlO)
EKT cord length is 7 ft., while the maximum 100-100-300, Programming, for inputting infor-
allowed length is 25 ft. mation concerning single line telephones. The
system must be told which type of telephone
08.03 The overall length of the cable run must is at each station.
not exceed 1000 ft. for 24 AWG wire.
08.12 Conventional telephones require only
single-pair wire and are connected to the MDF
via standard twisted pair telephone cable.
08.13 Standard telephone connection details
are shown in Figure 26.

08.2 Attendant Console Connection

08.21 The PERCEPTION attendant consoles
EKT connection details are shown are connected to the MDF via industry-standard
in Figure 25. 25-pair cables equipped with a female amphenol-
type connector at the console location.

08.22 Connection details for the attendant

8.11 See the DSTT Program in Section console are shown in Figures 27 and 28.

CONNECTING
500 TYPE OR
PCBCONNECTOR CROSS-CONNECT BLOCK
DSTU P,CB 2500 TYPE
I I

TL2
TO TELEPHONE #2
RL2 1

TL3
TO TELEPHONE #3

5 RL3 1

12A 32 TL4
TO TELEPHONE #4

7 RL4 I
I

14A -(R-BR) I I
34 TL5
TO TELEPHONE #5
I 1
148 9 -(BR-R) I RL5
I I

1
16A 36
I TO TELEPHONE #6
6
RL6 I ,
11
I 16B I I

38
18A
TO TELEPHONE #7
13
188 I

20A 40
TO TELEPHONE #8

PART OF 25
PAIR CABLE
u ti~NEcT03

(JO%JlO)
 PCB CONNECTOR
CROSS-CONNECT BLOCK
DEKU it00

i-4 r - l r
TLOOl --
RLDOI --
OTLfm.-(W-O)
ORL001.-(0-W)

CONSOLE
CONNECTOR CORD

ATTENDANT
0 .-(BR-W)
JlYO.-(S-W)

CONSOLE #0

CDNNECTORJ 1,

/
CONSOLE
CONNECTORCORD

------I ATTENDANT
CONSOLE #,

L-J
t
CONNECTOR J12
 .30 Tfll onnecti~~s 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready (from
TTY)
Connections from the telephone com- *Connect to + 12 VDC internally
ny jack (RJ21X for CO/FX/WATS and RJ2EX
for E & M TIE trunk) should be terminated on a
“66’‘-block, and then cross-connected to the Pin No. Designation
appropriate leads on the CO portion of the PER- 2 T X D Transmit Data (to modem)
CEPTION MDF, using Tables 0, P and 0 as guides. 3 RXD Receive Data (from modem)
4 RTS Request to Send (to modem)
5 CTS Clear to Send (from modem)
6 DSR Data Set Ready (from modem)
1 A keyboard/printer terminal (Texas 7 SG Signal Ground
Instruments Model 743/745 or equivalent) is
required to communicate with the PERCEPTION
system. (See Section 100-I 00-300, Programming,
for operating details.)

The terminal is connected to the system

’ via a female-type RS 232C connector (labeled All standard PERCEPTION EKTs may
TTY) located on the connector panel on the be used as desk units or wall-mounted telephones.
lower rear of the DCEC. Each one measures:
Width: 8.8 inches (224 mm)
In addition to the TTY connector, Depth: 9.1 inches (230 mm)
DEM connector is provided. By attaching Height: 4.0 inches (‘I 02 mm)
a customer-provided “answer only” modem,
all functions normally performed by the local and is equipped with 14 line and feature keys in
terminal can be performed from a remote location. addition to its push-button dial pad. All 10 keys
in the vertical row are equipped with LEDs and
The TTY and MO M ports can operate are available for flexible assignment (Figure 29).
peed of 300 or 1200 s, and utilize a stan- Normally one key in the vertical row is designated
dard 7-level ASCII code with one start bit, one as the DN key, while the remaining keys may have
stop bit and one parity bit. The system transmits several different designations depending upon
even parity and ignores the parity bit on the programming. The horizontal row of keys on
receive side. The speed is selected by a push-on/ each EKT has fixed assignments. Looking from
-off switch located o the front of the DPEU left to right, they are ISPKR/ , j , jCONFl and
The associated LE is on when 1200 bps IHOLD/ . Of the four, only the speaker key is
is selected. equipped with an in-use LED.

The speed selection is made simultan-

eously for the TTY and MODEM ports. These
two ports are wired in a logical “OR” fashion
and cannot be used at the same time. One must
be “open”.

The pin assignments of the TTY and

modem connectors are:

Pin No. Designation

2 RXD Received Data (from TTY)
3 T X D Transmit Data (to TTY)
,#“!i CTS Clear to Send”
6 DSR Data Set Ready”
7 ‘ SG Signal Ground
&‘8 CD Carrier Detect”
 2 The XI-key EKT (Figure
same overall dimensions as the standard EKT, and
is installed in exactly the same manner. It provides
an additional 10 flexible assignment keys in the
vertical row.

3 Each EKT has a modular handset cord

and is connected to the system via a &conductor
modular line cord.

al unti

1 An optional handset anger kit is re-

quired to convert either type f EKT for wall Secure the base to the desired wall
mounting. The EKT may be mounted on a wall site. Use a spirit level and make certain the top
or any other flat, vertical surface to which the of the base is level and that the deeper portion
base can be secured. is down.

2 When selecting the mounting site, con- Route the tail cord through the holes
sider the EKT weight and the additional stresses in the base and secure the EKT (Figure 33).
to which the mounting will be subjected.

3 Mounting screws or mollies, appropriate

for the surface on which the telephone is to be
secured, must be provided by the installer.

Locking tabs secure the base to the

EKT. The direction in which the base is attached
to the EKT determines whether it will be used
as a desk unit or wall unit (it is factory-configured
as a desk unit). Disengage the locking tabs by
pushing downward on the base (Figure 31).

5 Refer to Figure 32, choose which of

the knockouts are appropriate for the tail cord
route, and then cut them.
 The optional 13-ft. modular handset DTCU
cord is recommended for use with wall-mounted CLOCK LED-flashes continuously when sys- 2
tern is functioning normally. \
E KTs. f ;r. -i
‘$, I _*
\, 1%
’
I-“/ s/‘!.: :- >.>>I ”
9.20 Co~w~rti~~ the E DCCU
P LEDs 1 through 8-used to display sys- k’ ’
Refer to Figure 34, the optional handset status during a program load (see Para-
hanger kit (available from your Toshiba supplier) graph 11.02) and to indicate the following
must be used whenever the EKT is wall-mounted. fault conditions.
DISP LED #6 will light to indicate a failure
of the 20 Hz ringing power. This will be
accompanied by a MIN alarm on the console.
DISP LED #7 will light to indicate that the
system clock has not been set. This will be
accompanied by a MIN alarm on the console.

DPEU
MAJ LED-lights when a major alarm exists
in the system.
MDR LED-lights when the DTR signal from
the_SMD R device is not present.
TTY/MODEM switch-push-on/push-off switch
used to select 300 or ‘I 200 bps speed for TTY
and MODEM ports. An LED visible near the
switch will be on when 1200 bps is selected
and off for 300 bps.
SMD R switch-push-on/push-off switch used
NUMBER CARD to select 300 or 1200 bps speed for the SMDR
CARD COVER
port. An LED visible near the switch will be
on when 1200 bps is selected and off for
300 bps.

DPMU
Remove the card cover by inserting a FALT LED-used to indicate software-detected
paper clip in the hole at one end. Bend the cover faults concerning the MOH or Paging circuits.
up and remove it and the number card. See maintenance section for details. -
#I I ights when any
3 Install the handset hanger into place page is in progress.
tighten the screws. Reinstall the number card BSY LED #I and #2 #2 indicates when MOH
and card cover. is in use (a call is on-
hold or camp-on).
MOH volume control-used to adjust Music-on-
hold volume level.
a Connect the appropriate length line cord LOAD switch-a momentary switch used in an
to the modular connector, route the cord to the emergency condition to reload system program
EI<T and connect to the EKT modular jack. Test and data from disk.
the EI<T using the TTRM Program, Section IOO- INT switch-a momentary switch used in emer-
100-300, Programming. gency conditions to reset system logic. All
existing calls will be dropped when this switch
is pushed.
PFT switch-a momentary switch used to
1 Several system indicators and controls manually activate a transfer with the DPFT
are located on the front panel of the various PCBs. unit. A transfer activated by this switch can
The location and functions are as follows: only be reset by this switch.
 PFT LED-LED is on whenever a transfer are provided with each system; one should always
condition, caused by anything other than a be mounted in the drive, the other kept as a spare.
power failure, exists.
Activate the system as follows:
D RCU-4
FALT LEDs 1 & 2-used to indicate software- a) Be sure the main power switch on the DPSA
detected faults or to indicate a disabled state FF position (Figure 35), and plug
caused by an input command from the main- the AC power cord into the outlet.
tenance terminal (TPER Program). Each LED
indicates for two of the four circuits on the
DRCU:

FALT #I = Circuits 1 & 2

FALT #2 = Circuits 3 & 4

DRCU-6
FALT LEDs 1, 2 & 3-used to indicate soft-
ware-detected faults or to indicate a disabled
state caused by an input command from the
maintenance terminal -iTPER Program). Each
LED indicates for two of the six circuits on
the DRCU:
FALT #I = Circuits 1 & 2
FALT #2 = Circuits 3 & 4
FALT #3 = Circuits 5 & 6 b) Place one of the diskettes in the drive, with the
title appliques on the disk facing up (Figure
361, and close the drive door.
EDs 1 & 2-used to indicate soft-
ware-detected faults or to indicate a disabled
state caused by an input command from the
maintenance terminal (TPE Program). Each
he four circuits

on the DCOU or
circuit is busy.

FALT LEDs 1 & 2-used to indicate software-

detected faults or to indicate a disabled state
caused by an input command from the main-
tenance terminal (TPER Program). Each LED
indicates for four of the eight circuits on the
DEKU or DSTU: c) Turn the main power switch on the DPSA to
FALT #I = Circuits ‘l h 4
FALT #2 = Circuits 5% 8
d) Floppy disk drive will run:
MAJ ALARM LED on DPEU will be on.
FALT LEDs on all peripheral PCBs will
1 Upon initial power up, PERCEPTION be on.
will automatically load its operating system and PFT LED will be on (DPMU).
customer data from the floppy disk. Two diskettes DISP LEDs (DCCU) will indicate loading
 sequence. LED #4 will light for a short
time and then 1, 2,3, and 4 will be on until
loading is complete.

e) When loading is complete, system will initialize

and clear all LEDs. Only a true fault indication
will remain. Refer to Section 100-100-500,
Fault Finding Procedures, for meaning of
indications and assistance with fault clearing.

f) Refer to Section 100-100-300, Programming,

to complete customer data assignments.

NOTE:
DlSP LED #7 and the console’s NIN LED
will be on until the system3 Date and Time
have been set via the console.

eneral are used, each of the assigned station instruments

must be equipped with a grounding push-button
All connections to miscellaneous equip- switch if the station is to make outgoing calls
are made via J13, TTY, Modem or SMDR during a power failure.
connectors on the connector panel of the DCEC.
A transfer can be caused by a loss of
NOTE: power or triggered manually by either of two
The DATA connector is reserved for future buttons, one of which is located on the under-
use. side of the attendant console and the other is on
the front of the DPMU PCB. A transfer that is
ai~~rel~~~~~ency Transfer caused by a power failure will be reset automati-
cally when power is restored; a manual transfer
The function of the Power Failure/ must be reset manually,
mergency Transfer Unit (DPFT) is to automati-
cally connect selected trunks to selected conven- 6 When the DPFT is reset after a transfer,
tional telephones in the event of system failure existing conversations will be protected. Individual
while permitting normal operation when the circuits will be restored only when they become
system is in service. idle.

The DPFT is a self-contained module 12.17 The DPFT is installed as follows:

e 37) that mounts externally to the DCEC,
typically on the MDF. Connections to the trunks, a) Mount the DPFT on the MDF.
stations and DCEC are made via two 50-pin
amphenol-type connectors (Jl and J2). A func- b) Using 25-pair cables with amphenol-type
tional diagram is shown in Figure 38.
connectors (female for Jl, male for J2),
connect the DPFT to two “66’‘-type quick-
3 The module consists of eight relays that connect blocks.
are normally held operated, thus connecting the
telephones to the DSTU circuit and the trunks
to the DCOU circuits. Should a transfer occur, c) Using Table R for a guide:
the telephones bypass the DCEC equipment and Connect the trunks selected for emer-
are connected directly to the trunks. gency use to the Jl block “CO TIP” and
“CO RING” terminals.
In systems where ground start trunks Connect the DCOU circuits relating to the
 TO DSTU-T1

TO DSTU-RI

CUR

TO DCOU-Tl Jl-26
TO CO-T1
I
TO DCOU-

PFT EG I Jl-50
T)

PFT
CONTROL

, PFT-24V
I Jl-25
- -

emergency trunks to the Jl block “DCOU with All Page capability.

TIP” and “DCOU RING” terminals.
12.22 Figures 39 & 40 show possible paging
d) Using Table S for a guide: arrangements. As a standard feature (part of the
Connect the conventional stations, desig- DPMU PCB), the system provides a 600-ohm
nated for emergency use, to the proper output to a paging amplifier. If more than one
terminals on the J2 block “TEL TIP” paging zone is required, the output of the ampli-
and “TEL RING” terminals. fier can be routed back to the DPMU PCB where
Connect the DSTU circuits relating to the it will be switched to one of five sets of speakers
emergency telephones to the J2 block via relays Kl through K5. The relay to be operated
“DSTU T I P ” a n d “DSTU R I N G ” t e r - is determined by the access code dialed by the
minals. station user. The actual access code is assigned
in software (see Section 100-100-300, Program-
e) Connect the DPFT to the DCEC control as ming).
follows: DPFT Jl - DCEC J14,15 or 16
Pin 25 (S-V) - Pin 25 (S-V) 12.23 An All Page code can also be defined
Pin 50 (V-S) - Pin 50 (V-S) in software. When that code is dialed, all relays
will be activated simultaneously to permit paging
12.20 to all speaker zones.

2.21 By combining a single customer-supplied 12.24 If the power loads of the different
paging amplifier with the PERCEPTION paging zones are such that a single amplifier is not suitable,
interface and speaker zone switching, it is possible multiple amplifiers (up to one for each zone)
to provide a paging system of up to five zones can be connected as shown in Figure 41.
 PAGING AMP.

I
I PGI
II < e

I
hI I
I
I PGGND
I <
I
-----------m-J

DPMU

------------1 J13
I
I
I PGOUT 1 ,d 6
I nrtn, 1 CIll ZONE 1

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

ZONE 4

ZONE 5

PAGING AMP.

I
I
I
I PGGND 2
------_------ _ _ _ _ _
I
I
- - - - - - - - - - - - A MUSIC AMP.
l-----g I - - - - - - - 1p----J
l---i I OPTIONAL
DPMU I
OUT; I CONNECTION
MUSIC ] i ! IN I
SOURCE, ! 1PUT PUT ; I
 DPMU J13

I
I PGOUT 1
i PGIN 1 4 ZONE 1

I
! PGOUT2
I ; PGlN2 ZONE 2
I
I ~

1P G O U T 3
I : PGlN3 ZONE 3
~

I
I PGOUT4
I
I I PGIN 4 ZONE 4
~

I
I PGOUI- 5
I PGlN 5
I I ZONE 5
l---_q ~

I PGGND
I

12.25 If background music is to be used on relay operates, the music is disconnected

the paging system, two arrangements are possible: from that zone, and the page amplifier out-
put is connected.
‘I) If the music is supplied from a separate ampli-
fier (as in Figures 40 & 41), it can be con- 2) If the music is connected to a second input of
nected between the speaker common line and the paging amplifier (as in Figure 39), the
the PG GND input to the DPMU (J13 pin PG 1 control lead (J13 pin #27) can be con-
#2). Through the Kl% K5 relay “break” nected to the MUTE terminal of the page
contacts, the music will be connected to all amplifier music channel. When any page access
speaker zones when no page is in progress. code is dialed, a ground output is applied to
When a page access code is dialed, the proper the PGI lead to mute the music.
 j_
12.2 All paging connections are made via 12.52 The SMDR output can be connected to:
J13 in the DCEC connector panel. See Table N
for details. A local 80-column printer for an on-line print-
out at the termination of each trunk call.

A recording device to store data for subse-

112.31 A Music-on-hold (MOH) interface is a quent processing, either on-site or by a ser-
standard PERCEPTION feature. The circuitry vice bureau.
occupies part of the DPMU PCB. When MOH is
equipped it will be heard by any station or trunks 12.53 The pin assignments of the SMDR
on-hold in the system, or by any trunk put into connectors are:
the camp-on state.
Pin No
-.----L Designation
12.32 A tuner or other program source must 3 TXD Transmit Data (to SMDR
be provided by the customer. The program source device).
is connected to the MOH input via pins #4 and 5 CTS Clear to Send”
#29 (Br-W and W-Br) of J13 (see Table N). The 6 DSR Data Set Ready*
input impedance is 600 ohms. 7 S G Signal Ground
8 CD Carrier Detect*
12.3 Adjust the MOH volume with the MOW 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready (from
volume control on the front of the DPMU PCB. SMDR device)
Maximum volume is limited by internal circuits *Connected to + I2VDC internally
in order to comply with FCC regulations.
Printers known to be compatible are:
niversal
Texas Instruments Silent 700 series
12. The Universal Night Answer (UNA) (models 743/745)
feature provides an output of interrupted ringing OKI Data model 82A
voltage (85 f ‘IO VRMS, 20 Hz superimposed on
-24 VDC) whenever the system is in NITE service See Figure 42 for proper connections.
and an incoming call is received by a trunk desig-
nated for UNA. Any station user, upon hearing
the chime or bell, can dial the UNA access code
and be connected to the caller. Texas Instruments 743/745

2 The ringing voltage output is intended

TXD 3 . 3 RD
ontrol a strategically located chime or loud
ringing bell. The available power is five (5) ringer
equivalents.

Connections to the UNA ringing signal

are via pins #22 and #47 (O-V, V-O) of J13 (see
Table N) or J16 (see Table Q).

OKI Data 82A

TX0 3 _ 3 RD
2.5 The PERCEPTION Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR) feature allows a business
to analyze, and thusly control, its telephone costs.
Data can be collected for each outgoing and/or
incoming trunk call. Each such call generates a
call record which is available at the female type
RS232C connector (labeled SMDR) located on
the connector panel at the lower rear of the DCEC.
 The data rate at the SMDR output may The recording criteria and Charge
ected as 300 or 1200 bps by operating the Account code length are defined in the DMDR
SMDR push-on/push-off switch on the front panel Data Block Program (see Section 100-100-300,
of the DPEU PCB. When the 1200 bps speed is Programming).
chosen, the LED will be lit.
Each time a trunk is seized, information
1 The code used by the SMDR is standard is collected for that trunk until it is released.
7-level ASCII using one start bit, one stop bit and The call record is output at t
one parity bit (even parity). the following format (see Figure

On an optional basis, it is possible to Time

the fo~io~~ng recording criteria for each Start of Call Hour - tens
- units
Minute - tens
Incoming calls only - units
Outgoing calls only Call Duration Hour - units
Incoming and outgoing calls inute - tens
Outgoing toll calls only - units
All incoming calls and outgoing toll calls Seconds - tens
- units
“1 When outgoing calls are chosen, all Condition Code (See Table)
calls seizing a trunk will be recorded’ regardless A = Attendant handled
of duration. On incoming calls, all answered D = Call > ‘IO hours
calls will be recorded. Calls disconnected by E = Maintenance (SMDR port)
Toll or Code Restriction features are not recorded. F = Maintenance (trunk test)
I = Incoming call
Timing for recorded calls will start as I( = Outgoing call
follows: L = Conference Attendant or 3-party
Outgoing-when trunk is seized M = Transfer or Call Forward
Incoming to attendant only-when attendant = SPCC #I
answers = SPCC #2
Incoming and extended by the attendant- Access Code 3 digits maximum
when attendant answers. Dialed Number 15 digits maximum
Calling DN 3 digits maximum
It is possible for the station users to Calling Port Number 3 digits maximum
enter a Charge Account code of up to 12 digits Account Code 12 digits maximum
into a call record.
This is a standard call record.

@gy- fg 9 “*3456jssol,r
Account Code
Port
Number

Called DN Access
Code

‘202’ + I--?
123456789012
The format of the special records, Initialize/Reload 12.63 Some complex calls will cause multiple
and Time Change is as follows: call records (CR) for the same station or trunk.
Initialize/Reload:
Examples:
NNNN etc. (previous records-usual call)
1) Station #I transfers Trunk #I to Station #2
00 (Initialize or Reload)
Any record printed after the initialize CR for Station 1 NTrunk 1
= Condition Code I or K
record will appear on the same line and
CR for Station 2 NTrunk 1
be offset three colums from the usual
= Condition Code M
record.
Example: 2) Station #I transfers Trunk #I to Trunk #2
NNNN (previous record) CR for Station 1 NTrunk 1
00 NNNNN (init. and next record) = Condition Code I or K
NNNNNN CR for Station 1 WTrunk 2
Time Change: = Condition Code L
Following an Initialize/Reload CR for Trunk 1 NTrunk 2
00 00 00 = Condition Code M
(elapsed time since Init. or Reload)
MM DD (new date) 3) Station #I holdsTrunk #I and callsTrunk #2
HH : MM (new time) CR for Station 1 Strunk 1
Without Initialize or Reload = Condition Code I or K
MM DD (old date) CR for Station 1 NTrunk 2
HH :MM (old time) = Condition Code K
MM DD (new date)
HH :MM (new time)

FROM DCEC CONN. REQUIRED DESC.

CONN. NO. CONTENT OF CONNECTOR
0. DCEC TO ON CABLE TABLE
1 MDF JO1 DSTU/DEKU OO%Ol (l/Z)” M 8
2 MDF JO2 DSTU/DEKU 01(1/2)sO2 M C
3 MDF JO3 DSTU/DEKU 03%04(1/2) M D
4 MDF JO4 DSTU/DEKU 04(1/2)%05 M E
5 MDF JO5 DSTU/DEKU 06%07(1/2) M F
6 MDF JO6 DSTU/DEKU 07(1/2)%08 M G
7 MDF JO7 DSTU/DEKU 09’L10(1/2) M H
8 MDF 1 JO8 DSI-U/DEKU 10(1/2)‘~11 M I
9 MDF JO9 DSTU/DEKU 12%13(1/2) M J
10 MDF JIO DSTU/DEKU 13(1/2)‘~14 M K
11 MDF Jll ATT 0 M/F** L
12 MDF J12 ATT 1 M/F M
13 MDF J13 DPMU M N
14 MDF J14 DCOU/DEMU OO’LO2 F 0
15 MDF J15 DCOU/DEMU 03,x05 F P
16 MDF J16 DCOU/DEMU 06%07 F Q
FROM PFT PFTCONN. CO LINE & DCOU 00~07
17 F R
TO MDF NO. Jl (maximum: 8) (maximum: 8)
FROM PFT PFT CONN. STT LINE & DSTU 00%14
18 M S
TO MDF NO. J2 (maximum: 8) (maximum: 8)
*(l/2) indicates that only the first four or last four circuits of that PCB are connected to that cable.
**Attendant console requires a male connector at the DCEC and a female connector at the console location.
 COLOR LEAD PCB
PAIR PIN FUNCTION
CODE RESIGNATION POSITION
IT 26 W-BI TL 001 TIP-LINE CKT 001 DEKUIDSTU LOO
R 1 1 1 BI-W RL 001 1RING-L.INE CKT 001 ” ” ”
2T 1 27 1 W-O 1 DTL 001 / D,il,T,C,TIp-LINE PI/-I-
cII\, nnl
““I , II I, II
R j 2 1 O-W 1 DRL 001 / DATA RING-LINE f-~-r
vs., n vvn>i I I, I, ,I
3T ( 28 1 W-G / TL 002 1 TIP-LINE CKT 0 0 2 I’ lf 1’
R 1 3 1 G-W / RL 002 1 R I N G - L .INE CKT 002 ” ” ‘J
4T I
29 1 W-Br I D T L 002 I DATATIP-LIN E f-w-r
bI\ I
nn9
““L ,
r, II 1,
R 1 4 1 Br-W 1 DRL 0 0 2 j DATA RING-LINE i-~-r
“,,, nn9 I,
VVL I, I, I,
5T / 30 1 W-S 1 TL 003 / TIP-LINE CKT 0 0 3 / ” ” 1’
R 5 s-w RL 003 RING-LINE CKT 003 1 ” ‘I ”
6T 31 R-BI DTL 0 0 3 DATA - ,-Ip-LI,QE r-l/T nn-2 1 rr II I, I
R 6 BI-R DRL 003 DATA RING-LINE
7T 32 R-O TL 004 TIP-LINE
R / 7 1 O-R / RL 004 / RING-LINE
8T 1 33 1 R-G / DTL 0 0 4 1 DATATIP-LINE CKT 004 1 ” ” ”
R 1 8 / G-R CKT 004 1 ” ” ‘I
9T R-Br CKT 005 ) ” ” ,,
t- R Br-R CKT 005 1 ” ” ”
IOT CKT 005 “ ” ”
5 / DATA RING-I INE CKT 005 “ ” ”
CKT 006 ” “ ”
, RING-LINE CI(T 006 ” “ ”
6 IDATATIP-LINE CKT 006 ” ” ”
R 1 12 / 0-Bk 1 DRL 006 j /DATA RING-LINE Cl<T -... 006 ” ” ”
13T / 38
-- / -.. -
Rk-G / TL 007 I . TIP-LINE CKT 007 ” ” I,
I
R 13 G-Bk RI 007 R I N G - L .INE CKT 007 I’ ” “
14T 39 Bk-Bt DTL 007 DATA TIP-LINE CI<T 007 ” ” ”
R 14 Br-Bk DRL 007 DATA RING-LINECKT 007 ” ” ”
15T 40 Bk-S TL 008 TIP-LINE CKT 008 ” ” ”
R / 15 / S-Bk / RL 00s / RING-L.INE CKT 008 ” ” ‘I
j 16T j 41 1 Y-BI / DTL 008 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 008 / ” ” ”
,, I, I,
R 1 16 1 BI-Y 1 DRL 00 8 DATA RING-LINE ru-r u,.., fm2
“vu I,
17T 1 42 j Y-O 1 TL 011 TIP-LINE CKT 011 1 DEKU/DSTU L O 1 (l/2)
PI/-r n,, I I I, ,I I,
R 1 17 / O-Y 1 RL 011 RING-LINE b,\, “I

1 18-i- 1 43 1 Y-G / D TL 011 DATA TIP- LINE CKT 011 ” ” ”

R 1 18 1 G-Y 1 DRL c-1 ,slsvL
irklc f-u-r I, ,, I,
011 DATA RIN, ut\a nil
v,, ,
19T 1 44 1 Y-Rr 1 TI ,..I,C ,-.“_ I, I, I,
.-. -. .- -.
012 TIP-LINE LKi UIL
R
. .
1 IR
.- 1 Rr-Y
L. . I RI
I.L
nl 2V. RING-LINE CKT012 ” ” “
20T 45 Y-S DTL 012 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 012 ” ” I’
R 20 S-Y DRL 012 DATA RING-LINE CKT 012 1 ” ” ”
217 46 V-B/ TL 013 TIP-LINE CKT 013 1 ” ” “
R 21 BI-V RL 013 RING-LINE CKT 013 1 ” ” ”
77T A7 \I 43 i-3TI (-V-r nl(-l ,I I, I,
nl3 DATA TIP-LINE cIn, U1.3
I n I LL I V-V I UriL lJ13 nATA RING-LINE CKT013 ” ” I‘
L31 / *c, , v-u / IL Ul4 I TIP-LINE CKT014 ” ” ”
I ~~ R
I 24T
1
1
23
AQ I
1 G-V
\f.Rr
1 RL 014 1 RING-LINE (-‘KTn14
“,\I -. .
” ” ”

- ZKT014
1” 1 wll
DTL 014 1 D A T A T I P - L I N E r ” ” ”
R 24 Br-V -,..,.S,/I N G - L I N E ZKT
D R L 0 1 4 1DA-i-A _. 014
I ” ” ‘I
25T 50 v-s SPARE II I
I,
R 25 s-v I
 I I
COLOR *---
LkAU PCB
PAIR PIN FUNCTlON
CODE , DF.(
--;iGNATIQN POSITION
IT 26 W-BI 1 TL 015 TIP-LINE C
-...K T _ 015 DEKU/DSTU LO1 (l/21
1 Bl-W 1 RL 015 1 RING-LIN E ,I ,I
R CKT 0.” llc;I, ” I

2 TR 2 27 W--w
n D ’1 DTL 015 / DATATIP-LINE CKT 0 1 5 1 ” ‘I ‘1
1 DRL 015 1 DATA RING-LINE CKT 0 1 5 1 I’ ‘I 1’
3T 28 -..
W-G TL 016 TIP-LINE C-...
K T -.-
016 1 ” 1’ 11
R 3 G-W RL 016 RING-LINE CKT 0 1 6 “ I’ $1
4T 29 W-Br DTL 016 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 016 ” II 1’
R 4 -. . .
Rr-W IDRL 0 1 6 1 DATA RING-LINE CK? 0 1 6 1 1’ IJ 1’
5T 30 w-s TL 017 TIP-LINE C-...
K T 017-., / I’ ‘1 1’
R 5 s-w RL 017 RING-LINE CKT 017 ” I’ ‘I
6T 31 R-BI DTL 017 DATA TIP-LINE CKT017 ” ‘I I’
R 6 BI-R / DRL 017 / DATA RING-LINE CKT 017 / ‘* I, I,
~ 7T 32 R-O TL 018 TIP-LINE ,
R 7 O-R RL 018 RING-LINE ( XKT 018 ” “ ”
8T
R 3 83 R-G
G-R DTL
DRL 018 DATA TIP-LINE 7KTnlQ
c.. . y,” / ” ” ”
018 DATA RING-LINE CKT 018 1 ” ‘I ”
9T 34 R-Br TL 021 TIP-LINE C.KT 071
-...
1
--.
DFKI I/nSTI I LO2
..-.....,-, .
. .”

R 9 Br-R RL 021 RING-LINE ,.:KT

-.., --.fl71 1 ‘I ” ”
i
IOT 35 R-S DTL 0 2!I DATA TIP-LINE CKT021 ” I’ “
R IO S-R DRL 021 DATA RING-LINE CKT 021 ” ” I’
L
IIT 36 Bk-BI TL 022 TIP-LINE CKT 022 ” ” ”
R 11 BI-Bk RL 022 RING-LINE CKT 022 ” ” ”
12TR 31 72 D Bk-0
T L D 0AD RT 2L A. 2 T_ I P - L I N E CKT 022 ” ” ‘I ,
0-Bk 022 DATA RING-LINE CKT 022 ” ,, 7
13T 38 TL I
Bk-G 023 TIP-LINE -..
CKT ---fl73 1 ” ” ” 1
R 13 G-Bk RL 023 RING-LINE CKT 023 ” ” “
14T 39 Bk-Br DTL 023 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 023 ” ” ‘I
R 14 0 Br-Bk ” 2 DRL 3 DATA RING-LINE ” CKT 023 ”
15T 40 Bk-S TL 024 TIP-LINE CKT -... --.
034 ” ‘I ”
R 15 S-Bk RL 024 RING-LINE CKT --.n7A
-.., 1 ” lr ”
16T 41 Y-BI D’ i-L 024 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 024 ” ” ‘I
R 16 BI-Y DRL 024 DATA RING-LINE CKT 024 ” ” ”
17T 342 1 Y-O TL 025 TIP-LINE
_- -.. CKT 025 “ “ “
R I/ U-Y 1 RL 0 2 5 / RING-LINE cIKT . . . Y&Y n3F; I’ ” ‘I

181 43 Y-G 1 DTL 0 2 5 1 DATATIP-LINE CKT i-i% 1 >I\, “L,J

(r II I,
R 18 G-Y /I DRL 025 1 DATA RING-LINE CKT 025 ” ” ”
-.
:KT
_... Y-v
Fl9R ” ” “
:KT 0 2 6 1 ” ” ”
rL 026 / DATA

SPARE
,I I I
I
 COLOR LEAD PC5
PAIR PIN CODE DESIGNATION FUNCTICI~ .A, I
POSITION
IT 26 W-BI TL 031 TIP-LINE CKT 031 DEKU/DSTU LO3
R 1 BI-W RL 031 RING-LINE CKT 031 ” ” ”
2T 27 w-o DTL 031 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 031 1 ‘1 1 1’
R 2 o-w D R L 031 DATA RING-LINE .- CKT 031 1 1 1’ f~
3T 28 W-G TL 032 / TIP-LINF
-.-- CKT
-.. 032 j 1’ )I 1
R 3 G-W RL 032 RING-LINE CKT 0 3 2 1 1 1’
4T 29 W-Br DTL 032 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 032 ” ‘I ”
R 4 Br-W D R L 032 DATA RIN( ;-LINE CKT 032 / ” “ I’ 1
5T 30 w-s TL 033 / TIP-I _..INF
.- CKT 0 3 3 /
R 5 s-w RL 033 j RING-LINE
6T 31 R-BI DTL 0 3 3 / DATA-TIP-LINE
R 6 BI-R DRL 033 / DATARING-LINE
7T 32

3ING-LINE CKT 034 / ” ” ”

/ 1 34 R-BI TL 035 TIP-LINE ” ” ” CKT 035
R 9 Br-R RL 035 RING-LINE CKT 0 3 5 ” ” ”
R-S D-I-L. 0 3 5 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 035 ” ” I’
R 10 S-R DRL 035 DATA RING-LINE CKT _-- 035 ” ” ”
36 Sk-B1 TL 036 TIP-LINE CKT 036 ‘I I’ ”
11 BI-Bk R RI L N 0G3 6 - L I N E CKT 036 ” ‘I ‘I
37 Bk-0 DTL 036 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 036 ” I’ ”
12 0-Bk DRL 036 DATA RING-LINE CKT 036 ” ‘I ”
38 Bk-G TL 037 TIP-LINE CKT 037 ” I’ I’

_.., _.-
CKT na? I “ ” ”

;-LINE CKT 042 ” ”

0 4 3 / TIP-LINE CKT 043 ” ” ”
R 1 21 1 BI-V / RL 0 4 3 t R I N G - I INF CKT 043 ” ” ”
22-r 47 v-o DTL 0 4 3 1 DATA TIP-L -INE CKT 043 “ ” ”
R 22 O-V RRL 0 4 3 1 DATARIN( ;-LINE CKT 043 ” ” ”
37T
LY. ‘a?
.w V-G TL 044 TIP-LINE CKT 044 ” ” “
R 23 G-V RL 044 RING-LINE CKT 044 ” ” It
24T 49 V-Br D-I-L 044 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 044 I ” ” ” I
R 24 Br-V DRL 044 DATA RIN( ;-LINE CKT 044 “ ” ”
25T 50 V-S SPARE
 COLOR LEAD PCB
PAIR PIN FUNCTlON
CODE DESlGNATION POSITION
1T 26 W-61 TL 045 TIP-LINE CKT 045 D E K U , ‘ D S T U LO4(1/2)
R 1 BI-W RL 045 RING-LINE CKT 045 ” ” ”
2T 27 w-o DTL 045 , DATATIP-LINE CKT 045 I’ ” I‘
R 2 o-w DRL 045 j DATA RING-LINE CKT 045 1 ” ” ” 1
3T 28 W-G TL 046 TIP-LINE CI(T 0 4 6 ‘I ” ”
R 3 G-W RL 046 RING-LINE CKT 0 4 6 ” ” ”
4T 29 W-Br DTL 046 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 046 ” ” ”
f? 4 Br-W DRL 046 DATA RING-LINE CKT 046 ” ‘I ”
5T 30 w-s TL 047 TIP-LINE CKT 047 ,I I, I,
R 5 s-w RL 047 RING-LINE CKT 047 (( ‘I ,I
6T 31 R-BI DTL 047 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 047 I’ I’ ‘I
R 6 BI- R DRL 047 RING-LINE CKT 047 I’ ” ”
7T 1 32 ’ R-O TL 048 TIP-LINE CKT 048 ” ” ‘I
R / 7 O-R RL 048 RING-LINE CKT 048 ” ” )
8T I 33 R-G DTL 048 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 048I I’ ,I ,I

R 8 ( G-R ( DRL 048 1 DATA RING-LINE CKT 0 4 8 1 II ” ”

9T 34 1 R-Br j TL 0 5 1 j TIP-LINE CKT 051 1 DEKU/DSTU LO5 1
R 9 / Br-R 1 RL 051 1 RING-LINE CKT 0 5 1 7 ‘I ” ”
IOT 35 R-S DTL 051 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 051 1 ” ” ”
R IO S-R DRL 051 IIATA RING-LINE CKT 051 1 ” ” ”
11T 36 Bk-Bl TL 052 TIP-LINE CKT 052 / ” ” ”
R 11 BI-Bk RL ,, I,
052 1RING-LINE CKT 052 1 ”
12T 37 Bk-0 j DTL 05:? / D A T A T I P - L I N E CKT 052 j ” ” ”

c
R 12 0-Bk 1 D R L 052 DATA RING-LINE CKT 052 1 ” ” I’
13T 38 Bk, -G 053 TIP-LINE CKT 053 ” ” I’ ~1
1 R G-Bk 053 RING-LINE CKT 053 ” I, ,,

( 14T Bk-Br 053 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 053 ” ” I’

Br-Bk 053 DATA RING-LINE CKT 053 ” ” ”
Bk-S 054 TIP-LINE CKT 054 ” ” I’
S-Bk 054 RING-LINE CKT 054 ” ” ”
Y-BI 054 DATA TIP-LINE
BI-Y 054 DATA RING-LINE
055 TIP-LINE
R 17 O-Y RL 0 5 5 j RING-LINE CKT 055 j ” ” ”
18T 43 Y-G DTL 055 1 DATATIP-LINE CKT 055 1 I’ ” ”
R 18 G-Y DRL 055 / DATA RING-LINE CKT 055 / ” ” ”
19T 44 Y-Br TL 056 1 TIP-LINE CKT 0 5 6 1 ” ” ”
R 19 Br-Y RL 056 ( RING-LINE CKT 0 5 6 1 ” ” ”

1 21T 1 46 1 V-BI / TL 057 1TIP-LINE CKT 057 j- ” ”

, /
,I / I
R 1 25 1 S-V 1
 9T 34 R-Br TL 065 TIP-LINE CKT 0 6 5 ” ”
R 9 Br-R RL 065 RING-LINE CKT 065 ” ” ”
IOT 35 R-S DTL 065 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 065 ” ‘I ‘I
R 10 S-R DRL 065 DATA RING-LINE CKT 065 ” ” ”
IIT 36 Bk-BI TL 066 TIP-LINE CKT 0 6 6 ” ” ”
1
/ I !

R / 11 -. -.. RL 0 6 6 I R I N G - I INF “ ” ”
12T 3 Bk-0 DTL 066 7D A T A CKT
T 066 I P ”- L ” I N” E
R 12 0-Bk DRL 066 DATA RING-LINE CI<T 066 ” ” ”
I, I, I,
13T 38 Bk-G TL 067 TIP-LINE I-K-B- nf27
“I\ I ““I ,

rl I, I,
R 13 G-Bk RL 067 RING-LINE f-v-f nc7
LsI\I “VI , I

14T 39 Bk-BI DTL 067 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 067 ( ” I’ ”

R 14 Br-Bk / DRL 067 / nAT f2lNfZ.l IfilE CKT 067 1 ” ‘I ”
15T 40 Bk-S TL 068 TIP-LINE CKT 068 1 ” I’ ”
R 1 S-Bk 5 R L 068 RING-LINE CKT 068 1 ” ” ”
IRT
.-. 4.1 Y-RI n-i-1 068 -DATA
. . . TIP-I INI=
“.. -..“- CKT 068 1 ” ” ”

CKT n7!? 1 ” ” ” 1
I 47 / DTL I D CKT n77 I

R 23 G-V 1 R I
24T 49 V-Br I DTL 074 1 nATA T I P - I INF
R 24 Br-V
25T 50 v-s I SPARE
 R 23 G-V RL 088 RING-LINE CKT 088 ” ” ”
24T 49 V-Br DTL 088 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 088 ” I’ ”
R 24 Br-V DRL 088 DATA RING-LINE CKT 088 ” ” ”
25T 50 v-s SPARE
R ,,
25 s-v
 COLOR LEAD
PAIR PIN CODE DESIGNATION FUNCTION POSITION
IT 26 W-BI TL 091 TIP-LINE CKT 091 j DEKUIDSTU LO9
R 1 61-W RL 091 RING-LINE CKT 091 / ” ” ” /
2-r 27 w-o DTL 091 D A T A T I P - L I N E CKT
- 091 / ” “ ‘I
R 2 o-w DRL 091 DATA RING-LINE CKT 091 I’ ” ”
3T 28 W-G TL 092 TIP-LINE CKT 092 ” ” ”
R 3 G-W RL 092 RING-LINE CKT 0 9 2 ” ” ”
4T 29 W-Br DTL 092 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 092 ” ” ”
I R 1 4 Br-W / D R L 097 1 DATA RING-I INF CKT 092 / ‘I I’ ‘I
CKT 093 / ‘I I’ ”

7T 1 32 1 R-O / TL 094 1 TIP-I INF

,.. -.,_- “I\, vu, /
,I I, ,,

R / 7 ( O-R j RL 094 I F ?ING-LINE CKT 094 j I’ ” ”

8T 1 33 1 R-G / DTL 094 / I IA-r ‘A TIP-LINE CKT 094 / ” ” ” /
R 1 8 / G-R / DRL 094 / C IATA RING-LINE CKT 094 ” ” ”
9T 34 R-Br TL ---
095 TIP-LINE CKT 095 ” ” ”
R 9 Br-R RL 095 RING-LINE CKT 095 ” “ ”
IOT 35 R-S D-I-L 095 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 095 It ” ”
R IO S-R DRL 095 DATA RING-LINE-... CKT --- 095 ” ” ”
IIT 36 Bk-BI TL 096 TIP-LINE CKT 096 1 ” ” ‘I
R 11 Bl-Bk RL 096 RING-LINE CKT 0 9 6 ” ” ”
12T 37 Bk-0 DTL 096 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 096 ” ” ”
R 12 0-Bk DRL 096 DATA RING-LINE CKT 096 ” ” ‘I
13T 38 Bk-G 1 TL 097 TIP-LINE CKT 097 ” ” ”
R 13 G-Bk I RL 097 RING-LINE CKT 097 I’ ” ”
14-i- 39 Bk-Br 1 DTL 097 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 097 ” ” ‘I
R 14 Br-~ Bk I DRL 097 / DATA RING-I . - -. . - INF-, , , CKT
--. nR7 / ” I’ ” /
15T 40 Bk-S TL 098 TIP~.INE CKT 098 ” ” ‘I
R 15 S-Bk RL 098 RING-LINE CKT 098 ” ” ”
16T 41 Y-BI DTL 098 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 098 ” ” ”
R 16 B I -Y DRL 098 DATA RING-LINE CKT 098 ‘I ” ”
17T 1 42 / Y-O TL 101 TIP-LINE CKT 101 DEKU/DSTU L10(1/2)
R 1 17 1 O-Y RL 101 RING-LINE CKTIOI I’ ” I’
_ / 18; 1 ‘;‘8” / ,‘;G 1 DTL 101 DATA TIP-LINE CKTIOI ” ‘I ”
Y DRL 101 DATA I’ ” ‘I
1 19T I 44 / Y-Br 1I TL 102 I TIP-LINE RING-LINE C K T C K T 1 0 1 1 0 2 I ” ” ” 1
R 19 Br-Y RL 1 0 2 1 RING-LINE CKT 102I / ” ‘I ”
20T 45 Y-S DTL 102 I DAT ‘A TIP-LINE CKT 102 1 ” ” ‘I
R 20 S-Y DRL 102 1 DATA RING-I INF CKT In7 / / r1 11 ‘7
21T 46 V-BI TL 103 TIP-LINE CKT VI./
inn.-- ,
I ” ” ”
R 21 BI-V RL 103 RING-LINE CKT 103 / ” ” ‘I
22T 47 v-o DTL 103 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 103 1 ” ‘I ”
R I 22 I o-v I D R L 1 0 3 I DATA RING-LINE CKT In?? I I’. ” ” I
23T 48 V-G TL 104 TIP-LINE CKT 104 j ” ” ”
R 23 G-V RL 104 RING-LINE CKT 104 ” ” ”
24T 49 V-Br DTL 104 DATA TIP-LINE CKT104 ” ” I’
R 24 Br-V DRL 104 DATA RING-LINE CKT 104 ” ” ”
25T 50 v-s / SPARE
R I,
25 s-v /
 PAIR PIN
COLOR
CODE
LEAD
DESIGNATION FUNCTlON I PCB
POSITION
IT 26 W-BI TL IOE i 1 TIP-LINE CKT 105 j DEKU/DSTU L10(1/2)
R 1 BI-W RL IOEj / / RING-I
._.___ __.__ INF CKT
..,..* ..,-im I 1’ *’ ”
2T 27 w-o DTL 105 / DATATIP-LINE CKT 105 j ” ” ”
R 2 o-w D R L 105 / DATA F 2ING-LINE CKT 105 / I’ ” ” 1
3T 28 W-G TL 1 0 6 / TIP-LINE - .- CKT
-.-. - - -106 1 ” ‘1 ” /
R 3 G-W RL 106 RING-LINE CKT106 “ ” I’
4T 29 W-Br DTL 106 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 106 ” ” ”
R 4 Br-W D R L 106 DATA F ?ING-LINE CKT 106 t I’ ” ” 1
5T 30 w-s TL IOi’ / TIP-LINE CKT 107 I ‘1 ‘1 1’ 1
R 5 s-w RL 107 RING-LINE cIKT
. . . *-, In7 1 1’ 1’ 1’
6T 31 R-BI DTL 107 DATA TIP-LINE CKT107 ‘I ” ”
R 6 BI-R DRL 107 DATA RING-LINE CKT 107 ‘I I’ ”
7T 32 R-O TL IOE i 1 TIP-LINE CKT
- . - -108/ / ‘I ” I’ 1
R 7 O-R RL 108 1 RING-LINE CKT 108 j ” ” ”
8T 1 33 j R-G 1 DTL 108 j DATATIP-LINE CKT 108 1 ” ” ” /
R 8 1 G-R / D R L 108 / DATA RING-LINE CKT 108 1 ” ‘I “
9T 3 4 1 R-Br / TL 111 / TIP-LINE CKT 1 1 1 1 DEKU/DSTU Lll
R
I
9 I Br-R I RL 111 / RING-I INF
. . . . _ - CKT
- . . . - 111 1 I’ ” ”
IOT 35 R-S j DTL 111 DATA TIP-LIN IE CKT 111 I ” ” ”
R 10 S-R I DRL 111 DATA RING-LINE CKT 111 1 ” ” ” I
IIT 36 E ;k-BI TL 112 TIP-LINE CKTII~ ‘1 1’ ‘1
R 11 BI-Bk RL 112 RING-LINE CKT 112 ” ” ”
12T 37 Bk-0 DTL 112 DATA TIP-LINE CKT112 ” ” ”
R 12 O-Bk DRL 11;) 1’ DATA RING-LINE CKT 112 ” ‘I ”
13T 38 Bk-G TL 113 1 TIP-I INF CKT113 ” ” ”
,r I,
R 13 G-Bk RL 113 RING-LINE f-KT
VI., . . 112 . ”
14T 39 Bk-Br DTL 113 DATA TIP-LINE CKT113 ” ” ”
R 14 Br-Bk DRL 113 DATA RING-LINE CKT 113 ” ” ”
l!iT bn 1 Bk-S 1 TL 114 I TIP-LINF CKT 114 I’ ” I’
I R 1 15 I S-Bk I RL 1 1 4 1R I. N . .G - I -,._-
..- IMF CI<T 114 ” ” ”
16T 41 Y-BI DTL 114 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 114 ” ” ”
R 16 BI-Y DRL 114 DATA RING-LINE CKT 114 ” ” “
17T 42 Y-O TL 115 TIP-LINE CKT 115 ” ” ”
I R 1 17 1 O-Y 1 RL 115 / RING-LINE CKT 115 ” ‘I ”
18T 43 Y-G 1 DTL 115 /fATA
C TIP-LINE CKT 115 ” ” ”
R 18 G-Y 1 DRL IIF 5 1 DATA RING-LINE CKT 115 “ ” ”
L
19T 44 Y-Br / 116 1 TIP-LINE CKT116 ” ” ”
R 19 Br-Y / RL 116 1 RING-LINE CKT 116 1 “ ” ” 1
20T 45 Y-S 1 DTL 116 I DATA TIP-LIN E CKT 116 1 ” ” ”
R 20 1 S-Y 1 D R L IIE j ,1 DATA RING-L ..- -...-INF _...CKT .._ 116 1 ” ‘I ”
21T 46 V‘-BI I TL 117 / TIP-LINE CKT
-..* . 1. 1 7. 1 ” ” I’ I
R 21 BI-V 1 RL 117 I RING-LINE CKT 117 ‘I I’ ”
22T 47 V-O 1 DTL 117 1 DATA TIP-LIN E CKT 117 ” ” ”
R 22 o-v D R L 117~~ DATA RING-LINE CKT 117 / ” ” ” I
231 48 V-G TL 118 TIP-LINE CKT118 " " "
R 23 G-V RL 118 RING-LINE r,KT 118 ” ” ‘I
24T 49 V-Br DTL 118 DATATIP-LIN- E CKT
_.__ 118 I ” ” ” I
R 24 Br-V DRL 118 DATA RING-LINE CKT 118 1 ” ” ”
25T I
50 I
v-s I
SPARE II
I
,I
R 1 25 1 S-V 1
 1 RING-LINE CKT
-... 171
.-. t ” ” ”
CKT121 ‘I I’ I’
CKT121 ” ” I’
CKT122 *I ‘I I’
1 RING-LINE CKT
-... 177
.-- “ 11 1’
CKT 122 ” cl II
CKT 122 ” ‘I ‘I
CKT 123 1 ‘I ” ‘I
123 / RING-LINE CKT 17?, 1 ” 1’ ‘1
-.. .- CKT 123 ” ” ‘I
S-LINE CKT 123 rJ ‘I 11
CKT124 ” ” ”
R 7 O-R RL 124 / RING-LINE CKT124 ” ‘I lJ
8T 33 R-G DTI... 124 DATA TIP-LINE CKT124 ” ” ‘I
R 8 G-R DRL 124 DATA RING-LINE CI<T 124 ” ” ”
9T 34 R-Br TL 125 TIP-LINE CI<T 125 I’ ” ”
R 9 Br-R RL 125 / RING-LINE CKT 125 ” ‘I ”
10T 35 R -S / DTL 125 1 DATATIP-I INF CKT125 ” “ ”
R IO S-R 1 DRL 125 / DATA RING-LINE CKT125 ” ” ‘I
IIT 36 Bk-BI 1 TL 126 / TIP-LINE CKT126 ” ” “
R 11 BI- Bk 1 RL 126 / RING-I INF CKT126 ” ” ”
,I I, I,
12T 37 Bk-0 D-i-L 126 DATA TIP-L I.I”-RI F VI.8
C‘KT .--
136
R 12 0-Bk DRL 126 DATA RING-LINE CKT 126 “ I’ ”
13T 38 Bk-G TL 127 TIP-LINE CKT 127 ” ‘I ”
R 13 G-Bk RL 127 RING-LINE CKT127 ” “ ”
14T 39 l3k -Br / DTL 127 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 127 ” ” ”
R 14 Br- .Bk / DRL 127 DATA RING-LINE CKT 127 ” ” ”
15T 40 Bk-S j TL 128 / TIP-LINE CKT 128 / ” ” ”
R 15 S-Bk 1 RL 128 / RING-LINE CKT 128 / ” I’ ”
16T 41 Y -BI I DTL 128 / DATATIP-I INF CKT 178 / ” ” ‘I
R 16 BI-Y DRL 128 DATA RING-LINE CKT 128 ” ” ”
17T 42 Y-O TL 131 TIP-LINE CKT 131 DEKU/DSTU L13(1/2)
R 17 O-Y RL 131 1 RING-LINE _..,
CKT .-.
131 t ” ” ” t

18T 43 Y-G DTL 131 CKT 131 / ” ” ”

R 18 G-Y DRL 131 11 DATATIP-LINE 1-
DATA RIN( ;-LINE CKT 131 ” ” ”
19T 44 Y-Br TL 132 1 TIP-LINE CKT132 ‘I “ ”
R 19 Br-Y ,._
RI ._-
173 I RII\IC.I IRlC
IIII”U LllUl.. r-w-l- 19,-l I, I, I,
cII\I IJL ,
20T 45 Y-S DTL 132 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 132 1 ” ” ”
R 20 S-Y DRL 132 DATA RIN( :-LINE CKT 132 1 ” ” ” I
21T 46 V-BI TL 133 TIP-LINE CKT 133 ” ” ”
R 21 BI-V RL 133 RING-LINE CKT 133 ” ” ” I
22T 47 v-o DTL 133 / DATA TIP-LINF CKT 133 1 ” “ ”
I I, I, I,
R 22 o-v DRL 133 DATA RING-LINE
23T 48 V-G TL 134 TIP-LINE CKT
- .. .-
134 1 ” ” ” 1
R 23 G-V RL 134 RING-LINE -...
CKT *-.
l%l / ” ” ”
241 49 V-Br DTL 134 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 134 “’ ” ”
R 24 Br-V DRL 134 DATA RING-LINE CKT 134 ” I’ ”
25T 50 v-s SPARE
R I,
25 s-v I
 1 j BI-W RL 13Ej / RING-LINE CKT 135 1 ” ” I’
I
i LI I LI / ‘Y-O
v DTL 135 DATA TIP-LINE C:KT 135 / ” ” ”
R / 2 j o-w DRL 135 DATA RING-LINE C:I<T 135 j II ” ”
?T 1 38 1 \/j/-G TL 136 TIP-LINE CKT 136 / ” ” ”
:.\A/ RL 13( j / RING-LINE CKT 1% / ” I’ ‘I 1
DTL 136 DATA TIP-LINF c-
3KT 136 / I‘ ” ”
R 1 4 I Br-W / DRL 136 DATA RING-L INE CKT 136 / ” I’ ”
5T 30 w-s TL 137 TIP-LINE CI<T 137 ” ” ”
R 5 s-w RL 137 RING-LINE CKT 137 ” ‘I ”
6T 31 R-BI DTL 137 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 137 ‘I ” ”
I3 6 BI-R DRL 137 RING-LINE CKT 137 ‘l ” ” /
7T 32 R-O TL 138 TIP-LINE CKT138 ” I’ ”
R 7 O-R RL 138 RING-LINE CKT138 ” ” ‘I
8T 33 R-G DTL 138 DATA TIP-LINE CKT138 ” ” I’
R 8 G-R DRL 138 DATA RING-&NE :u-r 1-m
C... ,vu , I’ *I I)
9T 34 R-Br TL 141 TIP-LINE CKT 141 1 DEKU/DSTU L14
R 9 Br-R RL 141 RING-LINE CKT 141 ” I’ ”
IOT 35 R-S DTL 141 DATA TIP-I -“-INE
/ -.-...“’ CKT141 “ ” ”
R 10 1 S-R 1 DRL 141 DATA RING-LINE CKT 141 ” ” ”
i IIT t 36 / Bk-Bl 1 TL 14; ) TIP-LINE CKT142 ” “ ”
R 11 BI-Bk RL 142 RING-LINE CKT142 ” ” ”
12T 37 Bk-0 DTL 142 DATA TIP-LINE CKT142 ” ” ”
R 12 O-Bk DRL 142 DATA RING-LINE CKT 142 ” ” ”
13T 38 Bk-G TL 143 TIP-LINE CKT143 ‘I ” ”
R 13 G-Bk RL 143 RING-LINE CKT143 ” ” ”
14T 39 Bk-Br DTL 143 DATA TIP-LINE CKT 143 I’ ” ”
R 14 Br-Bk DRL 143 DATA RING-LINE CKT 143 ” ” ”
15T 40 Bk-S TL 144 TIP-LINE CKT144 I’ ” ”
R 15 S-Bk RL 144 RING-LINE CKT144 I’ “ ”
16T 41 Y-BI DTL 144 DATA TIP-LINF - cKT144 ” ” ”
R j 16 BI-Y DRL 144 DATA RING-LINE C:KT 144 / ‘I ‘I ”
17T / 42 145 .I,-%- *III- ,, ,< ,r
Y-O TL TIP-LINE Cnl I43 /
I
I R I **
17 .., .
I C-3-V 1 RL 145 / RING-LINE CKT 145 / ” ” ”
1 18T / 43 1 Y-G 1, DTL 145 / DATA TIP-LINE CKT 145 1 ” ” ”
R / 18 1 G-Y 1 DRL 145 1 DATA RING-LINE CKT 145-j ‘I I( I,
19T 1 44 1 Y-Br 1 TL 146 1 TIP-LINE CKT 14 6 I, ,t I,

R j 19 1 Br-Y 1 RL 146 1 RING-LINE CK~l46 ” I’ ”

20T [ 45 1 Y-S 1 DTL 146 1 DATATIP-LINE CKT146 I’ ” “
1 21T
R / 20
46
1 S-Y
V-Bl
1 DRL
TL
146
147
1 DATA RING-LINE
TIP-LINE
CKT
CKT147
146 [ ”
”
I,

”
I,

”
I

R 21 BI-V RL 147 RING-LINE CKT147 ” ” ”

22T 47 v-o DTL 147 DATA TIP-LINF CKT14.7
-... . a, ” ” ”
R 22 o-v DRL 147 DATA RING-L INE CKT 147 1 I’ ” ”
23T 48 V-G TL 148 TIP-LINE CKT 1453 / ‘I “ ” I
R 23 G-V RL 148 R ING-LINE
- - ..- L-KT 148 ’ ” ” ”
24T 49 V-Br DTL 148 DATA TIP-LINI z C KT 148 ‘I I’ ”
R I, ,, ,,
24 Br-V DRL 148 / DATA . .RINr,.l I
...“_ 3iE-T.. KT I_”
IAS? /
25T 50 v-s SPARE / -..”
,I I
R 25 s-v
 COLOR LEAD PCB
PAIR PIN CODE DESIGNATION FUNCTION POSITION
IT 26 W-BI TL 121 TIP-LINE CKT 121 DEKU/DSTU L12
I? 1 BI-W RL 121 RING-LINE CKT 121 ” ” ”
2T 27 w-o DTL 121 DATk TIP-LINE CKT 121 ” I’ *’
R 2 o-w DRL 121 DATA RING-LINE CKT 121 ” ‘I ”
3T 28 W-G SPARE
R 3 G-W 1,
4T 29 W-Br EMT 1 EMERGENCY TRANSFER SWT DPMU
R 4 Br-W INIT 1 INITIALIZE SWITCH ,,
5T 30 w-s SPARE
R 5 s-w MAJ IN 1 MAJOR ALARM DPMU
6T 31 R-BI SPARE
I,
R 6 BI-R
II
7T 32 R-O
7 ,,
R O-R
R-G I,
8T 33
R 8 G-R ATT 1 -24U -24U DPMU
9T 34 R-Br SPARE
R 9 Br-R ATT 1 -24U -24U DPMU
IOT 35 R-S SPARE
R 10 S-R ATT 1 -24U -24U DPMU
IIT 36 Bk-BI SPARE
R 11 BI-Bk ATT 1 -24U -24U DPMU
12T 37 Bk-0 SPARE
R 12 0-Bk ATT 1 -24U -24U DPMU
13T 38 Bk-G SPARE
R 13 G-Bk ATT 1 -24U -24U DPMU
14T 39 Bk-Bt SPARE
R II
14 Br-Bk
I,
15T 40 Bk-S
R I,
15 S-Bk
II
16T 41 Y-BI
R II
16 BI-Y
17T I,
42 Y-O
R ,I
17 O-Y
I,
18T 43 Y-G
R II
18 G-Y
19T 44 Y-Br ATT 1 EG GROUND DPMU
R 19 Br-Y SPARE
20T 45 Y-S ATT 1 EG GROUND DPMU
R 20 S-Y SPARE
21T 46 U-BI ATT 1 EG GROUND DPMU
R 21 BI-U i SPARE
22T 47 u-o ATT 1 EG GROUND DPMU
R 22 o-v SPARE
23T 48 V-G ATT 1 EG GROUND DPMU
R 23 G-U SPARE
24T 49 U-Br ATT 1 EG GROUND DPMU
R 24 Br-V SPARE
,I
25T 50 v-s
R I,
25 s-v
 COLOR LEAD PCB
PAIR PlN FUNCTION
CODE ~~Sl~NA~iO~ POSITlON
IT 26 W-61 PT 1 PAGING TIP DPMU
R 1 BI-W PR 1 PAGING RING I,
2T 27 w-o PG 1 PAGING EQUIP. CONTROL I,
R 2 o-w PG GND PAGING EQUIP. COMMON I,
3T 28 W-G SPARE
I,
R 3 G-W
4T 29 W-Br MT MOH SOURCE TIP DPMU
R 4 Br-W MR MOH SOURCE RING ,I
5T 30 w-s SPARE
5 ,I
R s-w
6T 31 R-BI PGIN 1 j PAGING AMP #I OUT DPMU
R 6 BI-R PGQUT 1 / PAGE ZONE #I OUT ,I
7T 32 R-O PGIN 2 / PAGING AMP #2 OUT I,
R 7 O-R PGOUT 2 / PAGE ZONE #2 OUT ,I
8T 33 R-G PGIN 3 PAGING AMP #3 OUT I,
R 8 G-R PG OUT 3 PAGE ZONE #3 OUT I,
9T 34 R-Br PGIN 4 PAGING AMP #4 OUT II
R 9 Bt--R PG OUT 4 PAGE ZONE #4 OUT I,
IOT 35 R-S PGIN 5 PAGING AMP #5 OUT ,I
R 10 S-R PG OUT 5 PAGE ZONE $5 OUT (1
IlT 36 Bk-BI SPARE
R 11 ,,
BI-Bk
12T I,
37 Bk-0
I,
R 12 0-Bk
I,
13T 38 Bk-G
II
R 13 G-Bk
,r
14T 39 Bk-Br
I,
R 14 Br-Bk
I,
151 40 Bk-S
I,
R 15 S-BI<
I,
16T 41 Y-BI
,J
R 16 BI-Y
I,
17T 42 Y-O
I,
R 17 O-Y
I,
18T 43 Y-G
* ,I
R 18 G-Y
19T 44 Y-BI
,l
R 19 Br-Y
I,
20T 45 Y-S
I,
R 20 S-Y
V-BI ,,
21T 46
21 BI-V ,,
R
22T 47 v-o UNA B UNA RINGING GROUND DPMU
R 22 o-v UNA A UNA RINGING 20 Hz II
23T 48 V-G SPARE
R G-V I,
23
24T V-Br ,I
49
R Br-V I,
24
25T I,
50 v-s
R II
25 s-v
NOTE: For clarification of designation, see Figures 39, 40 and 4 7.
 COLOR LEAD .PCR
--
PAIR PIN FUNCTION
CODE DESIGNATION POSITION
IT 26 W-BI T 001 TIP-TRUNK CKT 001 DCOU/DEMU TOO
R 1 BI-W R 001 RING-TRUNK. CKT 001 ‘I ” “
2T 27 w-o M 001 M LEAD-TRUNK CKTOOI ‘I I‘ ”
R 2 o-w E 001 E LEAD-TRUNK CKTOOI I’ I’ ”
3T 28 W-G T 002 TIP-TRUNK CKT 002 ” ” ”
R 3 G-W R 002 RING-TRUNK CKT 002 ” “ ”
4T 29 W-Br M 002 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 002 “ ” “
R 4 Br-W E 002 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 002 ” ” ”
5T 30 W-S T 003 TIP-TRUNK CKT 003 ” ” ”
R 5 S-W R 003 RING-TRUNK CKT 003 I
“ ” ”
6-r 31 R-BI M 003 M LEAD-’ TRUNK CKT 003 t ” ” ” I
R 6 BI-R E 003 I E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 003 11 ‘I 11
7T 32 R-O T 004 / TIP-TRUNK CKT 004 ‘I *’ ”
R 7 O-R R 004 1 RING-TRUNK CKT 004 ” ” ”
8T 33 1 R-G 1 M 004 / M LEAD-TRUNK CKT OC
R 8 G-R E 004 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 004 ” ” ”
9-r 34 R-Br T 011 TIP-TRUNK CKT 011 DCOU/DEMU TO1
R 9 Br-R R 011 RING-TRUNb : CKT 011 1I ” ” ,,
IOT 35 R-S M 011 Ml mEAD-TRUNK CKT 011 t ” I’ ”
R 10 S-R E 011 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 011 ” ” I’
IIT 36 Bk-BI T 012 TIP-TRUNK CKTOIZ ” ” ”
R 11 BI-Bk R 012 RING-TRUNK CKT012 ” ” ”
12T 37 Bk-0 M 012 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT012 ” ” ”
R 12 0-Bk E 012 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 012 ” “ ”
13T 38 Bk-G T 013 TIP-TRUNK CKT013 ” ” ”
R 13 G-Bk R 013 RING-TRUNK CKT013 ” “ ”
14T 39 Bk-Br M 013 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT013 ” ” ”
R 14 Br-Bk E 013 E LEAD-TRUNK CI<T 013 ,l ,, I,
I
15T 40 Bk-S T 014 TIP-TRUNK CKT014 ” ” ”
R 15 S-Bk R 014 RING-TRUNI< CKT014 ” ” ”
16T 41 Y-BI M 014 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT014 ” ” ”
R 16 BI-Y E 014 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT014 ” ” ”
17T 42 Y-O T 021 TIP-TRUNK CKT 021 DCOU,‘DEMU TO2
R 17 / n-y
- . Fcn71--. R!NG-TRUNK CKT 071 16 I’ ” ” 1
18T 43 Y-G M 021 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 071 1 II ,r ,I
-... --.
R 18 G-Y E 021 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 021 1 ” I’ I’
19T 44 Y-Br T 022 TIP-TRUNK CKT 022 1 “ ” ”
19 Br-Y R 022 j RING-TRUNK CKT 022 “ ” ”
45 I Y-S I M 022 / M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 022 “ ” ”
20 S-Y E 022 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 022 “ ” “
46 V-BI T 023 TIP-TRUNK CKT 023 j ” “ ”
21 BI-V R 023 RING-TRUNK2 CKT 023 I1 ” “ ” 1
47 v-o M 023 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 073
--- / ” ” ”
22 o-v E 023 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 023 / ” ” “
48 V-G T 024 TIP-TRUNK CKT 024 / “ ” ”
23 G-V R 024 RING-TRUNK CKT 024 1 ” ” “
49 V-Br M 024 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 024 ” ” I’
24 Br-V E 024 E LEAD-TRI JNK CKT 024 ” ” “
50 v-s PFT EG
25 s-v PFT -24V PFT -24V (OUTPUT) II
 COLOR LEAD PCB
PAIR PIN FUNCTION
CODE DESIGNATION POSITION
IT 26 W-BI T 031 TIP-TRUNK CKT 031 DCOU/DEMU TO3
R 1 BI-W R 031 RING-TRUNI< CKT 031 “ ” ”
3T
-. 37
-. W-T) M 031
_-. M -I -.
EAD-TRUNK
.- CKT 031 ” ” “
R 2 0-w E 031 E LEAD-TI ?UNK CKT 031 “ “ ”
3T 28 W-G T 032 TIP-TRUNK CKT 032 ” ” ”
R 3 G-W R 032 RING-TRUNK CKT 032 “ “ ”
4T 29 W-Br M 032 M LEAD-T1 ?UNK CKT 032 “ “ I’
R 4 Br-W E 032 1 EL EAD-TRUNK CKT 032 ” ” “
5T 30 w-s T C133 / TIP-TRUNK CKT 033 ‘I ” ”
R 5 s-w R 033 RING-TRUNK CKT 033 ” ” ”
i FiT
- 31
- R-BI M 033 M I EAD-TRIJNK CKT 033 ” ” ”
R 6 BI-R E 033 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 033 ” ” ”
7T 32 R-O T 034 TIP-TRUNK CKT 034 ” ‘I ”
R / 7 1 O-R / R 034 / RING-TRUNK CKT 034 ” ” ”
8T 33 R-G M 034 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 034 ‘I ” ”
R 8 G-R E 034 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 034 I’ ” ”
9T 34 R-Br T 041 TIP-TRUNK CKT 041 DCOU/DEMU TO4
R 9 Br-R R 041 RING-TRUNK CKT 041 ” ” ”
IOT 35 R-S M 041 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT041 ” ” ”
R 10 S-R E 041 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT041 ” “ ”
IIT 36 Bk-BI T 042 TIP-TRUNK CKT 042 ” I’ ”
R 11 BI-Rk R fl42 RING-TRUNK CI<T 042 ” ” ”
12T 37 Bk-0 M 042 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 042 ” ” ”
R 12 0-Bk E 042 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 042 ” ” ”
131 38 Bk-G T 043 TIP-TRUNK CKT 043 ” ” ”
R 13 G-Bk R 043 RING-TRUNK CKT 043 ‘I ” ”
14T 1 39 1 Bk-Br 1 M 043 / M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 043 / ” ” ”
R 1 14 / Br-Bk E 043 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 043 ‘I ‘I ”
15T 40 Bk-S T 044 TIP-TRUNK CKT 044 ” ” ”
R 15 S-Bk R 044 RING-TRUNl< CKT 044 ” ” ”
16T 41 Y-BI M 044 M LEAD-TRUNl< CKT 044 “ I’ ”
R 16 BI-Y E 044 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 044 ” ” ”
17T 42 Y-O T 051 TIP-TRUNK CKT 051 DCOU/DEMU TO5
L
R 17 O-Y R 051 RING-TRUNK CKT 051 ” “ ‘I
18T 43 Y-G M 051 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 051 ” ” ”
R 18 G-Y E 051 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT051 ” ” ”
19T 44 Y-Br T 052 TIP-TRUNK CKT 052 “ *‘ ‘*
R 19 Br-Y R 052 RING-TRUNK CKT 052 ” “ ‘I
20T 45 Y-S M 052 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 052 ” “ ”
R 20 S-Y E 052 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 052 ” ” ”
21T 46 V-BI T 053 TIP-TRUNI< CKT 053 ” ” ”
R 21 BI-V R 053 RING-TRUNK CKT 053 ” ” ”
22T 47 v-o M 053 iVl LEAD-TRUNK CKT 053 ” ” ”
R 22 o-v E 053 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 053 ” ” ”
23T 48 V-G T 054 TIP-TRUNK CKT 054 ” ” ”
R 23 G-V R 054 RING-TRUNK CKT 054 ” “ ”
24T 49 V-Br M 054 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 054 ” ” ”
R 24 Br-V E 054 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 054 ” ” I’
25T 50 v-s PFT EG PFT GROUND (OUTPUT) DPMU
R I 25 I S-V I PFT -24V I PFT -24V (OUTPUT)
 COLOR LEAD PCB
PAIR PIN CODE DESIGNATION FUNCTION POSlTlON
IT 26 W-Bl T 061 TIP-TRUNK CKT 061 DCOU/DEMU TO6
R 1 BI-W R 061 RING-TRUNK CKT 061 “ ” ”
2T 27 w-o M 061 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 061 “ I’ ”
R 2 o-w E 061 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 061 ” ” ”
3T 28 W-G T 062 TIP-TRUNI< CKT 062 ” ” ‘I
R 3 G-W R 062 RING-TRUNK CKT 062 “ I‘ I’
4T 29 W-Br M 062 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 062 ” “ ”
R 4 Br-W E 062 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 062 ” ” ”
5T 30 w-s T 063 TIP-TRUNK CKT 063 ” ” ”
R 5 s-w R 063 RING-TRUNK CKT 063 ” ” ”
6T 31 R-BI M 063 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 063 “ ” ”
R 6 BI-R E 063 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 063 ” ” ”
7T 32 R-O T 064 TIP-TRUNK CKT 064 ” ” ”
R 7 O-R R 064 RING-TRUNI< CKT 064 ” ” ”
8T 33 R-G M 064 1 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 064 ” ” ”
R 8 G-R E 064 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 064 ” ” ”
9T 34 R-Br T 071 TIP-TRUNI< CKT 071 DCOU/DEMU TO7
R 9 Br-R R 071 RING-TRUNI< CKT 071 ” ” ”
IOT 35 R-S M 071 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 07 1 ” ” ”
R 10 S-R E 071 E LEAD-TRUNK CI<T 071 ” ” ”
IIT 36 Bk-BI T 072 TIP-TRUNK CKT 072 ” ” I’
R 11 BI-Bk R 072 RING-TRUNK CKT 072 ” I’ ”
12T 37 Bk-0 M 072 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 072 ” ” ”
R 12 0-Bk E 072 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 072 ‘I ” ”
13T 38 Bk-G T 073 TIP-TRUNI< CKT 073 ” ” ”
R 13 G-Bk R 073 RING-TRUNK CKT 073 ” ” ”
14T 39 Bk-Br M 073 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 073 ” “ ”
R 14 Br-Bk E 073 E LEAD-TRUNK CKT 073 ‘I ” ”
15T 40 Bk-S T 074 TIP-TRUNI< CI<T 074 “ ” ”
R 15 S-Bk R 074 RING-TRUNK CKT 074 ” ” ”
16T 41 Y-BI M 074 M LEAD-TRUNK CKT 074 ” I’ ”
R 16 BI-Y E 074 E LEAD-TRUNK CI<T 074 ” ” ”
17T 42 Y-O SPARE
,1
R 17 O-Y
II
181 43 Y-G
II
R 18 G-Y
II
19T 44 Y-Br
li
R 19 Br-Y
I,
20T 45 Y-S
II
R 20 S-Y
I,
21T 46 V-BI
,I
R 21 BI-V
22T 47 v-o UNA B UNA RINGING GROUND DPMU
o-v UNAA UNA RINGING 20 Hz (1
R 22
23T 48 V-G SPARE
G-V I,
R 23
24T ,r
49 V-Br
r,
R 24 Br-V
25T 50 v-s PFT EG PFT GROUND (OUTPUT) DPMU
R PFT -24V 1,
25 s-v PFT -24V (OUTPUT)
 R 14 Br-Bk R RING-DCOU #7
15T 40 Bk-S T TIP-CO #8
R 15 S-Bk R RING-CO #8
16T 41 Y-BI T TIP-DCOU #8
R 16 BI-Y R R ING-DCOU #8
17T 42 Y-O SPARE
11
R 17 O-Y
II
18T 43 Y-G
,I
R 18 G-Y
II
19T 44 Y-Br
II
R 19 Br-Y
1,
20T 45 Y-S
I,
R 20 S-Y
I,
21T 46 V-BI
,I
R 21 BI-V
Ii
22T 47 v-o
o-v ,I
R 22
48 V-G I,
23T
II
R 23 G-V
I,
24T 49 V-Br
I,
R 24 Br-V
25T 50 v-s PFT EG PFT GROUND (INPUT) DPMU
R 25 s-v PFT -24V PFT -24V (INPUT) I,
 1 COLOR 1 LEAD I PCB
PAIR -111
riiu
r. In,,.-*
I-UIUL I ION POSITiON
CODE DESlGNATlON
IT 26 W-BI T TIP-TEL #I
R 1 BI-W R RING-TEL #I
2T 27 w-o T T IP-DSTU #I
R 2 o-w R R ING-DSTU #‘l
. . ...1...
-.-7.
3T -- ‘.’ - #2
R 3 G-W R RING-TEL #2
4T 29 W-Br T TIP-DSTU #2
R 4 Br-W R RING-DSTU #2
5T 30 1 w-s I T TIP-TEL #3
i
R 5 s-w R RING-TEL #3
6T 31 R-BI T TIP-DSTU #3
R 6 BI-R I? R ING-DSTU #3
7T 32 R-O T TIP-TEL #4
R 7 O-R R RING-TEL #4
8T 33 R-G T TIP-DSTU #4
R 8 G-R R RING-DSTU #4
QT -.?A . -.
R-RI T .
TIP-TFI .-_ -i&i
l-%--t- I 9 Br-R R I RING-TEL #5
/ IOT R-S T TIP-DSTU #5
_ /1 35 I I ,
R / 10 / S-R 1 R I RING-DSTU #5
IIT 36 Bk-BI T TIP-TEL #6
R 11 BI-Bk R RING-TEL #6
12T 37 Bk-0 T TIP-DSTU if6
R 12 0-Bk R R ING-DSTU #6
13T 38 Bk-G T TIP-TEL #7
R 13 G-Bk R RING-TEL if7
14T 39 Bk-Bi T TIP-DSTU #7
R 14 Br-Bk R R ING-DSTU #7
15T 40 Bk-S T TIP-TEL +‘+8
R 15 S-Bk R RING-TEL #8
16T / 4.1 / Y-BI / T TIP-DSTU #8
R ( 16 / BI-Y / R RING-DSTU #8
17T / 42 / Y-O / SPARE
O-Y ,I
R 17
Y-G II
18-T 43
G-Y I,
R 18
I,
19T 44 Y-Br
‘I
R 19 Br-Y
I,
20T 45 Y-S
II
R 20 S-Y
I,
21T 46 V-BI
I,
R 21 BI-V
22T j 47 ) V-O 1 I,
R 1 37 1 0-V 1 I,

2
I,
R 23 G-V
I,
24T 49 V-Br
,I
R 34
& I
R r-V
L. ~

,I
257 , 50 v-s
II
R 1 25 s-v
TOSHIBASY RACT OGR ING
ONIC LEPH SYSTE 200 300
BER 1984

GE
TABLE of CONTENTS ........................ i
TABLE LIST ii
01 INTRODUCTION ’ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
01 .oo General .............................
01.10 Customer Data .......................... 1
01.20 Utility Programs .......................... 1
01.30 Keyboard Terminal ........................ 1
01.40 Remote Administration ....................... 2
01.50 Data Format 2
02 DATA INPuT/~uTPu~PR~CEDURE~ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
General
~Y~EIVI DATA PREPARATION . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
System Data Block
Access Code Data Block
EKT Data Block
03.08 Standard Telephone Data*Blbck ’ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1%
03.08 Class of Service Data Block ..................... 12
03.10 Toll Restriction Data Block ..................... 13
03.11 Speed Dial Data Block 17
03.12 Station Message Detail Recording Data’Biodk ’ : : : : : : : : : : : : : 17
03.13 Attendant Data Block . 18
03.1 Traffic Measurement Data Block’ ’ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 : : 19
03.1 DTMF Receiver Data Block ..................... 20
03.1 Trunk Group Data Block 20
03.17 Trunk Data Block ... : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 23
Least Cost Routing Data Block
DATAINPUTPROCEDURES ..::::::::::::::::::: 2
Data Terminal Connection ..................... 30
04.20 Authorization Procedure ...................... 31
04.30 Utility Program Use ........................ 32
04.40 Authorization Codes Change .................... 33
05 DATA OUTPUT PROCEDURES 33
. 05.0 General ......... : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 33
05.0 Print System Data Block 34
05.04 Print Access Code Data Block ’ : : : : : 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 34
- 05.05 Print Station Data Block . 35
05.06 Print Class of Service Data Block’ * : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 35
05.07 Print Toll Restriction Data Block ................... 36
05.08 Print Speed Dial Data Block ..................... 36
05.09 SMDR Data Block . 37
05.10 Print Trunk Group Data Block * : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 37
05.11 Print Trunk Data Block ....................... 37
05.12 Print Least Cost Routing Data Block ................. 38
05.1 Print Call Pick-up Groups ...................... 38
05.1 Print Hunting Arrangements .................... 39
06 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES .................... 39
06.10 Data Dump (DDMP) Program .................... 39
06.20 EKT/Attendant Console (TERM) Program ............... 40
06.30 Peripheral Equipment Test (TPER) Program .............. 40
ABLE LE PAGE
A TTY & Modem Connections .................... 2
B Utility Programs ........................... 3
c Authorization Code Change ......................
D System Data Block
Access Code Data Block
Feature, Abbreviation & Code List ..................
EKTDataBlock ........................... 50
EKT Key Assignments ............. 51
EKT Directory Number 51
EKTPrivateCOLine .............................. ::::::::l:::: 51
EKT Features
Standard Telephone data Block ’ 1 : : : : : : : 1 1 : 1 : : : : : : 1 :
Class of Service Data Block ...................... 54
COS Features & Codes ....................... 66
Toll Restriction Data Block 56
Speed Dialing Data Block . : 1 : : : 1 : : 1 : : 1 1 : 1 : : 1 : : : : 58
SMBR Data Block
Attendant Data Block’ ’ : : : : : : : : : : : 1 : : : 1 : : : : : : : : E
Traffic Measurement ......................... 61
Traffic Measurement Report Format ................. 62
Traffic Measurement Parameters 62
DTMF Receiver Data Block ... : : : : : : : : : : : 1 : : : : : : 64
Trunk Group Data Block ...................... 64
Trunk Group Data Block Entries ................... 65
LossPlan ..................... 67
Trunk Data Block .......................... 68
Trunk Data Block Entries 69
Least Cost Routing Data Block ’ : : : : 1 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 69
Miscellaneous Parameters ..................... 70
AreaCodes .......................... ..7 0
Area/Office Codes ........................ 71
Routes ..... . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . 71
Modify Digits ... 72
Print System Data Block : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 73
Print Access Code Data Block .................... 74
T Print Station Data Block . 74
U Print Class of Service Data Block ’ : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 75
v Print Toll Restriction Data Block ................... 75
W Print Speed Dial List Data Block ................... 76
x Print SMDR Data Block 76
v Print Trunk Group Data, Block’ * : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 : : : 77
z Print Trunk Data Block .. .. 78
AA Print Least Cost Routing Data Block’ : : : : : : : : : : : 1‘ : : : : : : 78
AB Print Call Pick-up Groups ...................... 79
AC Print Hunting Arrangements ..................... 80
Data Dump Program ......................... 80
EKT Test Procedure ......................... 81
Attendant Console Test Procedure .................. 82
Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic Procedure .............. 83
Trunk Status Entries 85
Disk Drive Error Codes . : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 87
 NOV 19 PROGRAMMING(PRELIMINARY) PAGE 1

PERCEPTION is a stored program-controlled system utilizing an

8-bit microprocessor as the central processing unit (CPU), The system
memory is made up of both Read Only Memory (ROM) and Dynamic Random
Access Memory (DRAM) (the small amount of ROM that is provided contains
the "Loader" program for the Floppy Disk Drive (DFDD)). When the
system is first powered up or is reset manually, the remainder of the
Operating System programs and Customer Data are loaded into DRAM from
the diskette under the control of the Loader program,
Since Dynamic R is volatile; that is, its contents are lost
the diskette remains in the system as
non-volatile storage.

All PERCEPTION options are controlled by entries made in the

mer Data memory. Tables are provided for defining System
Parameters and Trunking, as ell as individual station features, The
Customer Data is unique to each system and is usually entered on-site
using a keyboard terminal. After the data has been entered into system
memory a simple keyboard command causes it to be copied onto the
diskette to remain as a permanent record.

In addition to the Operating System programs and Customer Data,

the diskette also contains many Utility Programs, which are divided
into three groups:
1) Data Input Procedures-- used when making changes to Customer Data-
2) Data Output Procedures-- used for obtaining printouts of the contents
of the Customer Data memory.
3) Maintenance Procedures-- used when testing the system.
When required, a Utility Program is called up using a command
entered via the keyboard terminal, The system responds by locating the
proper Utility Program on the diskette and then loading it into the
memory overlay area. When the loading is completed, a prompt will be
output to the terminal. The overlay area can accommodate only one
Utility Program at a time, therefore when another program is called up
the previous one is erased.
NOTE:
Any diskette operational failure will cause an error code to be output
to the terminal, See Table AG for the listing of the error codes.
 Nov 19 PRcGRAMMTNG(PRELIMINARY)
PAGE2

1 The PERCEZTION system. is designed to interface with standard

asynchronous keyboard/printer data terminals (aTexas Instrumntskdel
743 or 745, or equivalent, is suitable). An ELkcfxonic Industry
Association EIA) RS 232C-type data transmission interface is provided
systgn will support data speeds of 300 or 1200 bps, The
connects to the TEw connector at them connector panel
pinassigmantsareshown inTableA).

utilizing a locally-provided mE%l, the PEZQEMONsystem Utility

Programs canbe calledup, and the systemprcqrammj and tested frana
remote location vi ne line. An EIA RS 232~ interface is
provided for the a data speed of 300 or 1200 bps is
SUppOlFtad.
The is comected to the amnector on the
port pin assig ts are s Table A),

ThemEM and 'ITY connectors cannot be used simultaneously. one must

be "open" at any given time,

Utilizing one start bit, one stop bit and one parity bit, the
comnunicates via the standard 7-level ASCII code on the TTY and
ports. The system transmits even parity and ignores parity on
the receive side,
 (P

The Utility are divided

1) Data Inplt
2) Data outp
3) ntcenancePr
Each Utility Program has a
kdentify it and to call it up fr
mst be executed before a Utility Pr
The Utility
nits and the etablethats

I..-'
‘,'
DATAINPUTP- c

UrdTelephoneDataBlcck G
 (PRELmImRY)

the PEXEEIXONsystem data can be i ions

then listed on the System Record ( 11,
'11 thenserveasaprogramninggui ation record,,
contains a .form for eat
by the Utility Program
e: System Data Block-DsYS Program).
ing data via a Utility Program is a matter of responding to the
ts are listed in their pr order in the Sys Record
spaceisprovidedtorecordarespo
ord forms to record the var ethe
in

0 systan Data Rl S misCXl.1~

entries that are meaningful to le rather
individual. station or trunk,
0 Data is entered as follows:
(Request)--1 cates programhasloaded. Since ta is pr-tb
only the response is possible:
ily

DrzT(Daily Routine !FaskF-3pecifies themaintenance tobe run at the

Linre specified in r
mter: KEI
T!E%fWsnant Service+-Specifies if tenant service is Lo
calls, dial tOI calls, attZEZ%t I&al
11 be routed to the proper attendant console (Att.
. #1 for 3enant#l) according tm the response to
Data Block (DEKTProgram), Standard Telephone
Block (IxMTprogram) andTrunkGroupData&Lock WIu?Program). If
entered, the attend&cmsoleswilloperateintheloadshaxingnrode,
ERter: Y (yes) or N (no),
Icp 1 (Intercept --If the attendant takes control of a trunk grcup using ::-/'4 f '!." /, ,
the trunk group SC0 feature, stations calling that trunk group
ill be routed to Intercep This entry defines ICP 1 as being overfl
tone tOEL) or attendant NiT),'
Enter: ATTor OF%
ICP 2 (Inter
service and to n night service
defines ICP 2 as being overfl tone (OF%)or att
 19 ES

lb- 1 for

2b- ines 2 for use tb DID

or Universal.

ines of
(l--=9) *
EILF 2 msy Field --Defines one of
dispr;;yed by mole
Enter: 1 digit (l-9);
 19 6
OFT.4 1 ( DN- Attendant Console O)-Defines the
,?'i"< calls r
i, fran attef&nt console 1 due to the att t"
1‘ facility.
7
Enter: 1, 2, 3 digits or

t amiole,
ines the desti.fWzion for
erfl
facility.
Enter: 1, 2, 3 digits or
is datamaya attendant console.

not print the

Page DN tom DN used tto
for the
1, 2, or 3 digits.
Remte Access DNb--Defines the phantcxnDN used to assign a trunk for
teAccesst0 servicesn uperation 0mxim.m: 3 digits). The phantmDN
mSt be the sane as an assigned station DN. p.; ,, ‘:.. .
mter: 1, 2, or 3 digits,
(Recnote Access ines the access

ines the digit to by-f dial

:
not conflict e.
Access Code) Defines the digit Lo a r dial
in place of E
mter: 1 digit,
:
not conflict with DN or other access codes-not checked by
iting Time-outF-Defines
j.ifa/,* f; 0
(for le: 30).
( .".
F--Defines the ri for
Enter: Timeinseco le: 301,
3(* " ‘7
 19 7
AOF (Attendant Overfl Time-cutb-Defines the t for the at t
Overflow facility.
Enter: Time in seconds (for le: 301, I*,. z:; :')__

cm (Cal.1 Time-out)--Mines the

Enter: The in seconds (for le: 12).

or
HID (Hold [500/25001 Tine out)--Defines the out for the recall of a

before the
or a
hear
Enter: Tik in seconds (for example: 15).

Also~cmntrols the release of an idle attendant console LPKkey.

PBT U?ush-button Timz=-outf-Defines the bemeen
Gits dialed on a trunk line fran a MMF t voice
path fromaMMFtelephoneto a00 line is brokendwbg dialing. The PBT
timer determines quicklythepathis restoredand, therefore, shouldbe
as short as pass
Eater; Tine in s&onds, e.g., 6,
LTd3(tineLockout'@m&=--Defines the length of time that over tone is
apPlied to a station after having been released due to the timer.
After this timt, the station will hear nothinq.
EMer: Time in seconds, e,g.# 15.
UWmmatic CallbackReserve Time)--Defines the length of time that the
led station or trunk in an call is reservedforthecaller ( :
6secmds),
Eater: Tk in -&, eegep 3, /:e,/t-'.i /b" z ._)I“ - : *

HFS (Handsfree Answerbck Station) --A Y" response all calls frcm any
station to a Handsfree Answerback-equipped,EKT to voice announce and be
replied to handsfree.
Enter: Y (yes) or N (no).
FB?A(Handsfree Answerback Attendant)--A calls fr
attendenttoaEl[andsfreeAnswerback-equipped~to anncxmce
replied, to handsfree.

response informs the sys is to

and activates alarm on the console,
 d DID Station)--+ response enables a DID station ri
w-

0 s Code Data Block ( ram signs S

used for feature execution,
0 Data is entered as fol
is I?==&

acter feature desired access

(See Table E- Stan code
assig
:
WCXSS assigned at the factory are in Table E-l. Any
feature not requiring change need not be entered. Features. may be
entemdinanyorder,

Data is enter
e-e responses are sible:

is entered, only port

entryisnecessary,
b--1ndentifi location of .the ERTcircuit to
portnuxrber
1. DFXUl?CBlocation: LOO-Ll.4 '
0nthatFCB:
th circuit on the DEXD in

e, the port justdefin

 of Key Strips+-Informs the system of of gr s of 10
s the EKT 11 have.
1 (for lo-key EKZ) or
_cos (classof Group 'ces+-Assigns one of the 16
of Service are defined using
(o--15),
P--AssignsEXTtooneofthe
f tenant service is not
0 orliftenantserviceis - sel i.R stem Block OSYS
= Y).

ines an inter

Qg (Cal.1 Forward to
tside the systemusing theCallForward-All calls feature
Enter: Y or N.
n (Toll Restricted Class)--Assigns one of the ten classes of Toll
Restriction to the EKT. Classes O--7 are definedin the Toll Restriction
Block UXQLprogram). Class 8 is sin-p toll res
Oorlaredialedas the first or seco digit.
asunrestricted.

e activates the free

response activates the D display on the

Enter: Y (yes) or N ho).
E (Key AssigmentsP-Assigns a DN or feature to one of the flexible keys.
Enter:
of the key to be defined fo aspacebar. Keys
9 (or 19 for 20 starting fran the
ip (the four keys
ing the key number

1 Feature or ssible assig nts

Directory (
 19 ( 1 10
sc!RNNNxxx- Single Call Ring
0 Inmxning calls will ring Em.
= Directory (Station)
=FAmtrllmber=enterDNto S e

e
fordistributedhunt (see
Station Hunt - Distributed:
the hunt le:
X Onaxi&m: 8 stations
x = Distributed Hunt Gr
iv&e Co Lines:
eRing
ring EKT

oXXX=!L'DNas
Features:
AC-AU i.cGdblback
ADL-Au ic Dialing
cm-CallForward-AllCalls
DIS - Display Date Tim&lap
DND- Do Not Disturb

of to sig

PRS- Privacy Release

SCF-speaker-
RND- RepeatLas Dialed
SDS- SpeedDial-System
lfg 2 - SpeedDj."L-Stat+on (controller
- SpeedDial-Station (user of lis
VCFxxx - Voice Page (XXX=DNtobepaged)
FIX- Flash (sends flash toCOline)
W-Release
e P= 11 be repeated until lentries DEL
isentered.

Standard Telephone Data Block

iven conventional telephone.
h conventional telephone in the system.
0 Data is entered as follows:
Wquest+-Indicates program has loaded, ee responses e possible:
-Tocreatea STTData Blocky
-9Balter anexisting SlTData
- To delete a let; existing Data Block,

is enter&, only theport

snecessary,
location of the

ines thedirectory
1, 2 or 3 digits.
a station DN entered above also exists on an EKT that

the DN does not exist on an

Classof Group F-4ssigns one of the 16 classes of
the telephone, ( ces are defined using
pr 1
: ( l!5)*
+4ssigns the station tooneof the possible sys
t:enants.
Enter: tenant service is not selected in Syst
N) e
0 orliftenantserviceis - selectedinSys Data Block DSYS
TEIN= 'II),
(Call Pick-up GroupF4ssign.s the station to one of the 32 sible
groups for use with the Call Pit feature.
Enter: Group number (O-311
)-Defines the station to ich this DN hunts.
1 Fbrward-No Answer features,)
in hunt group,
b) Par Station Hunt - Distri
(N =
(X =
cl
DLG (Dialing )--Defines the t of dialing, if 8 to used by the
station.
 19 (PmLIMmARY) E 12
Enter:DIP for dial pllse
IDN for DTkF.
MtG 0 or 1 for xnmml line (off-hook rings operator 0 or 1).
for hot line (off-
Dial ListF-Assigns one of 25 sonal, lo-number dial
the station a controller of
s the station a user of list

( ning Wne All

-~~-A k--Defines an interruption-protected station. An
Nn response will prevent warning tones from being applied to the station.
Enter: Y or N.

Calls feature

TOL (Toll Restriction C%aSSk-Assigns one of the ten classes of 3311

ZZriction to the station. Classes O--7 are defined in the Toll
RestrictionDataBlock (M0L PrograM. Class 8 is siqle toll restriction:
restricting when 0 or 1 are dialed as the first or second digit, None
defines the stations asunrestricted.
mter: O-8 or None.

asses of
COSare
ess rkstrxted mthisDataBlock.
0 DC0Sprogram assigns a (O--15) to each gr of restrictions to
The number defin ereisthenentered to the 00s
tin theDSTT, DEXTandIYIGPprograms.
o Any numbersnot entered or otherwise defined restrictions.
0 Data is entered as follows:
k?Q (Request)--Indicates program has 1 ed, Theonlyresponsepossibleis
EiZ.
s (Class of !Service)--Defines the COSnun&r (O--15) and the restrictions
to be associated with it. The possible restrictions are listed in Table
H-l.
Enter: COS number, foil by the restriction, in the following
format: 0 Too OVRAce,

In this example, COS0 trunk group 00, erride

and attendant control override.
cos:
Repeat for all COS entries.
 0 ogram defines the office
Toll Restri on feature.
0 eight classes of ml1 Restricti
needs in defining a station8s
udes specific restricti
code table. Fbr convenience,
. tables.
specified
available

0 is entered as follows:
o--I cates * le is

TYPE (Sub ram type>-- e are ee rams thin

program, ee responses arepossible:
PAR- sce.ll~eousParametersTable:
entifies system operating parameters.
cxs- F&krictionClassTable:
ines theeachclass of Toll~es on.
- Area/Office Code Exception Table:
Defines an exception to the dialing privil
the CIE area code table.
Since each sub-program can be entered in ently for the Pr teach
separated by the fol

CodeF-Defines the ar ich

used when analyzing di not contaming an area
codee Da~enteredherewill appearin~eastco&~~~~ting~ataBlock (DICK
programPARtable,HAC
Enter: Area Code N O/

ICC (Interchangeable Codesk--A that interchangeable

codes are used. Interchangeable that have 0 orlas
the secondd
 (P
CcmonCarrier Informs the system
, SIX, etc.) cc access carrier (10
1 Restriction
Dxcl-PAR
or

t for
carrier.
Enter:

(Authorization Code #lb-Xndicat

ization code used with SPCC#l,
enter&will be ignored for lbll Restri
formed on the first 3 or 6 digits fol ng the DN and authorization
: l--12 digits or
:
usi access (10 1 for s not enter orization
.
(Authorization Code as authorization for
P=--12digits or

of Tbll Restriction cl
m response to the t in
DSlTandDXGPprograms.
class nuxber O-7

after the class to r ethatclass fr service,

OPR(Operator and Operator Assisted Cal&)---A Yw response all0 operator
operator assisted calls to this toll restriction class.
Einter: Y (yes) or N (no).
(Xntemational Calls)--44 response all international calls (011,
01) to this toll restr
Enter: Y (yes) or
Distance Directory Assistance+-A response 1
to this toll restriction
Enter:
 Table of this toll
all area codes ose deleted in
in

or denied for
deleted (D) as

(Office Code Table ines the Office

i&ion Class as an
those deleted

for this Toll Restri

to add office ax&s.

D etc.
to delete office

office codes
2209 220-229
2316 231-236
 19 NARY) E 16
e:
es cannot be ed and deleted in the s gh the table,
separatepassisrequiredforeachstep,
The next pr t for 11 be :
irty (32) area/office

table is assi
any one area
ea Code

(class F-Defines the toll. restri s (O---7)

that are subject to this exception table, of classes, up to
nmximumof al18maybeentered.
0 If a toll restriction class table (CLS) is al.1 to dial an area
1, all office codes within that specified area code will be
except those specific office codes sdded below in the OFC
0 If a &ll restriction class 1 is not all to dial an

OFC (Office ice codes that are assigned to this

Office codes may be added (A) or
deleted (D) as single 3 digit c range* cove.r to 10
3 digit office codes. are entered usi digit
ere the first 2 digits are ntoallcodes inthisr e; the
third 'digit represents the start point of the range (frm) for the last
digit of the office code: the fourth digit represents the
range (to) it of the office code. See e
Eider: etc,
to add office cod-,
D ii& t-XXXetc.
to delete office codes,

office codes
220--229
2316 231--236
 19 E 17

cannot be added and deleted Bass cugh le.

separate pass is required for each s

DialDataElock (DSDL)
Speed Dial-System list
Al.1 of thes

catesprogramhasl le:
-tochangeexistingorenter
of the list to
(00 = systa List)
(Ol--25 = Station List)

was entered in respod to RIQ above, no other data is

required.
isrequeststhe

access code, is
for dial tone delay. is
ted as one of the 16 digi

0 Detail Recording Data El 1 defines the

andtypeofcallstobe f trunk QrsuP
a
0 Data is entered as follows:
(Requestb--Indicates program has 1 ee responses are possible:
- tocreatea new table
- to alter existing data
- to clear all existing data
CodelLexqth)--Defines length of used or no
of digits to used (l--12),
 19 18

SKY21 GQ3cial.ized of DN used

to access an spcc ( nize DN and
condition code in

oG!P-Outgoing only
IAO-Incuning and outgoing
mll callsonly

for each trunk gr usedintbe

0 Attendant Data Block UXTT)

sible attendant consoles in
options.

0 is entered as folP
tP--Indicates progr Tbreeresponses arepossible:
create a newdata
cK;- to alter existing data
an!- to delete an existing data block
-NO G4ttendantNumber)-Selects theconsoletobedefined
Enter: Oorl
rP--Selects theport be occupied by the console.
or Attendant Console
IL21 for Attendant Console
le the 1 t feature.

signs the console iculax one or

Eater: Access code of the page zone, All Page or NONE.
 ov 19 PRoG~kwkwG (PREMLIMINIARY) PAGE 19

0 The affic surattent Data I3lock defines the

that control theTrafficb4easurement

entered after each

(System Timme)--Ree the

rtunity for a change.
ime: HHMMSS (24 hour clock), QT CR (no change)

is given in response to

(Start Date)--Defines the te for record

reporting. Ou ts current data andgives an nity for a change,
Enter:start Dat t or CR (no change)
(Start Time)--Defines the s time for record
and reporting. Outputs currentdataandgives an
Einter:Start Time: JBMMSS,or CR (no change)
RPT (Report Parameters):
-SYST (systein Data)
(Attendant 0)
ATT1 (Attendant 1)
T13poo (TrunJcGroup 00)
1 PlYrunkGroup 01)
15
S@l&S e parameters that are t
current (Y or N) is output for
given for a change. /j
 19 (PRECLIMIMY) 20
mter:Y (yes) or N (no) Poll by a CR for each p=arameter.

ogram identifies ich receivers

quipped in the system
ich can

ee responses are sible:

is entered, no
mxt -)--selects the po receiver,
j?O.TZtn~haStWOparts:
1) DRCUPCBlocation (ROO)
2)Circuitnu&erontheDRCUPCB(1-6)
Enter: Port 8smbe.rto b? used (ROOl-RO06)
(Repeat until all circuits are assigned)

response given to

0 Data is entered as follows:

9 (Request)-Indicates program has 1 ed, Threerespo~arepossible:
NEW-Tocreateanewtrunkgroup
CHG- Toalterdatainanexisting DataBlock
GUT- To delete an entire existing Data Block
NCYES:
1. All trunks t be deleted frcm the group using the Pw3==
csmand will be accepted
ed, on.lytheTmnkGroup entered*
tais necessary.
GRP vITn.lnk Gr )--Identifies the
TEN Plknant I=---Indentifies the tto ich the. trunk gr
belongs.
Enter: Tenant OOXTl
FJXUnk )--Identifies' the of

A not possible to enter a change (

Blockmustbedeleted (CWT)
ter:

TIE -TIETrunk
Line
oingk-- 11
service.
Enter: -Inccmingorily
-0utgoing only
-2-way
STp (Advance Step)--Identifies next trunk group in a route*
svce. If a station user at tstoaccessatnmkinthis
are all busy, a trunk from the group identified in
ed.
TrunkGxwp (O--15) oK
XXXSS for the g==P.
ttedi czonflict tsin
f 30 or 300 is used as an access
Enter: AccessCode (1,2or 3digi.W
ass of Service)

(O--151
VI!txnanission)--Wines the transmission ar required for the
The entry made here will the type of PAD
switching done on trunk connecti Table O-2 for loss plan).
Enter: WiC: Non-transmission ted (2-wire circuit with < 2dB
loss)
( re circuit or
re VNL circuit)
Sezrt used by the
 E 22
es an in
response
EMer:Yor
Absorb Digits)--Identifies the digits ch are to be ignored
ses of Toll or Cede Restriction, S&
irst digi
sorbed or (for
to

sl t
1.
Eater:
) translat gits
YOK digit (!?Zr digits (YY) to
TRN2 VJbsnslated 2)--D@fineS absorbed digit (IAB) Lo
iiixted frcmonedigi another digit !Blesameas I used
wer 100 digits are be translated (seeexanples).
Enter:
LEA: IAB =1
= 9#2
= 8#3
Diqits Received frcm Central Office Station DN to Ring
900 thrcugh 999 200 through 299
800 through 819 300 through 319

_ Digits 5900
Received frcm5999
through Central Office 200
Station DN to Rinq
through 299
5800 through 5819 300 ough 319
LEC: IAB =2
TRN2=8#32
Diqits Received frm Central Office Station DN to Rinq
590 through 599 210 through 219
580 through 589 320 through 329

(Toll Restriction one of & M 1

on to classes o--
Rk?StX 1. Class 8 1"
restriction; res are dialed as the first or second
digit. None defines the trunk as unrestricted.
 Enter: O--8 or

0
llB.lst be Rlad@*
P-1 shows the p

e an entire using

is entered, only

1) (defined in Program): Identifies the as king a

t group.
2) Member NuIta3er: a unique to each trunk in a
The numerical order of th texmine the or
thetnlnkswill be selected Tkhighest
will be selected first.
Enter:Groupand
(Trunk Directory b---mr Private Lines Only (Trunk Gr I;
defines a phant to assign private
lines to a station
Enter: 3-digit
Ames response e cess to
nk for th day and night service, i
ter: Y (yes) or
 19 NARY) E2
signs the night sta
2
is

sign a to e DMus for

entry in Sys ta ( 1.
S us
C

or
OlS
CQMfSCtLOnS) .,
Enter: YJ QK N

(Control of Disconnect)--Defines the release control of !L?& DID or

.
ng Party Control, circuit is not released until the
t originated &he call disconnects.
: First Party Release, ei can release the
cmnnection.
(Incanning Dialingk-Informs the aling to
ngcall, ForTIE
DIP - PUl

(Dialing tgoingb-Selects thetyp of tgoing

323,
Enter: PlO ... Rotary Dial 10
Dial 2
( isionl--DeterIuines if an provided
to the distant trunk on incoming &Us. If is entered, the system will
eturn answer supervision.
ter:Yor N
Least Cost Routing Data Block (TABLEQ)
0 Least cost
trunkbasedon the exammes the
dialed, checking the area
tion and the time of day,
 19
o The ICR data block has been divided between utility program DICl &
Dia. The first ICR program aneuus system
pamrenters, the fifteen (15 sixteen (16)
area/office tables to further
program DIG! defines (15) tables of six
or t day selection

(Request)--Indicatesprogramhasl sible
.

scellan PEC entify

systeln operating paranreters.
lprogram to define each area
table,
Z4CC--Mea/Office Code 'ICable: Used in DE1 program to ify an area
code table.
ram to define
ion sequence,
ify Digits Table: in 2 program to define digit
tiontothedialed
for the E Pr teach

t for PAR 11 be:

ICC (Interchangeable Codes)--A that interchangeable
codes are used, Interchangeable thathaveOor1as
the second digit the
three digits fol as
the first three a DDDprefix is not
mter: Y (yes) or N (no)
(Operator TimeoUt)--Mines thetinte, in seco
1 wait for tional digits to be dialed fol
Enter: Tme inseconds (for e: 10)
dial tone after
access code has been dialed.

11 cause the system to give a

en the last choice rcxlte is ing selected,
 19 ( 26
Ares Codeb-Defines the area code in
diakd nlAl&ers
in Toll Restri

TEC (Toll Free calls)--A

.;800) to the route table
informs the system to treat arG
er: Y (yes) or

mdh
DNXXN%Xe@.
todelete semice
(Directory Assistance Calls
stance direct0 assistance calls (WA +
stance Inforruation
long distance dir

tek=Defines the route table to be

directory assistance ls (WA+555+ 1 if

Prefixb-4X!fines the Direct Distance Dialing

ing Plan Area).
eable code as an areacode.

(Route Table
 19 (
(AreaCcdes-Add)--Indicates the area codes to
A xmxinwmof 160 area codes
ins ible
aut

x = o-9
the area
are del
Codes can only

Enter: Table
Code)--Identifies the area le is signed
to,

x=0--9
(Route Table b4pecifies tie to foil
or calls meeting is area/office
table
: RcruteTable (1 - 15)
(Office Codes-Add)-Indicates

toallcC?des

es that are to be
Office codes
may be deleted in the samemanner
or as a rangeof cedes.

I&E
Office Codes
2209 220 - 229
2316 231 - 236
2478
 19 1 28
P= t for

or

Route Eble

(Route Schedule-- W-Defines the time of day interval for the first
of 3 possible routing schedules. andendtimeareentered
a 24 hour clock format.
Einter: Start Time EndTime (for le: 0900 1700)
(Class 3 Routing
acceSsable to station
in

F-Defines the ce
and ICl during .
6) in the order of selection prio~ity~
ting ice (for le: etc.)
or
ne
JCIJ (Class 1 Routing Priority)--Defines the choice sequence
accessable to station dlasse and ICY during sc timinterval,
Ebtertheroutes (RTl- 6) in the order of selection priority.
Enter: Routing Choice (for le: RT4 R!Z3etc,)
or
ne
station class of service for
classes of service for LCR.
routes defined for
SCHE3(Route Schedule - B)--Defines the time of interval for the second,
of Possible routi end of
ScheduleAi
Enter:
iorityk- but for e
ing Choice (for
e

ting &iority)-- for hed.ule

e,
ting Priority+-= for e
w ice (for
or
ne
§CBC (RouteScheduleC)--Defines the interval for the last of
of
are

iority)-- as in e 3 but for

Enter: ting Choice (for etc)
e Cthis"Lkry for IL!3 11 also cause 1
noneforthis schedule.
as and
le:
or
ne
a (Class 1 Routing Priority+-Same as ICl in Schedule B but for
ScheduleCtimeinterval.
Enter: ting Choice (for le: RT 5 etc)
Or
ne

P= t in response to ify digits table)

 (PRELmmwY) 30
ify Digits Table ifies the ify Digits Table
Route Bible (RTl - RT6).
re than one route,

= 2 swnd pause
-5secondpause
(eachpauseccdequalsldigit)

recordedi.ntheSystem
the system as expl

Theteminalis to the .
RS23
connector Uabeled the co piss rear
thIXEC.
In tion to connector, a amnector is provided. By
hing custawc RanswF31conl em, al.1 functions noxmally
parfomsdbythelocal termindLcanbeperfo~fraanar~~locatian.
The TTY and ports can operateata of 300 or 1200 bps, and
zeastandard el ASCII code with one bit, one stop bit and one
parity bit. The system transmits even parity and ignores ths parity bit on
receive side, The is selectedby apush-on/pus f swit located
on the front of the DP (Figure 1). Theassociated is on en 1200
bpsis selected.
 19 E 31

pin assignmenti of e:

1
RXD Received

Designation

Thedatateminalcmnectorislocatedin
anale 25-pin EZAtype connectors are
tOptOhOttOmth@ comectorsarelabeled:

terminalintothe
data terminal. shcmld be set for for full duplex
ation before switching its

event unauthorized Data base, the

system requires an
ramcanbecalledup.
requesting each utility.

e are three levels of authorizati

-digit code that is assigned in the system
all levels are assigned 0000,
Authorization Code Changepmcedure (
activity granted to each 1 is
el 1: Can do all activities of 3.
Canchange the git z 1, *
 19 (P
:Can do all Level .1 activities or
tlatellccde.
3 code.
ly assigned for end user use.

SMDRData
request printouts 0 :

rization e, pr

several
is done

e is not effective enaCE4Tis used, Takecarenottokavethe

authorization code displayed on the screen.

Ys entered (return to Step 21,

if valid code is enter& (pr to request Utility

izatio
after
entered am fr
tea the w *
via a Utility Program is a matter of r
the systw via the data terminal.
are mnemonicsthat are usually abbr

If an improper response is made to a

anueric code.
programin use and

lity : \
ted.
e the previ
 19 E 33
DEL EC31
DEZDEL ECRI r-us&to

:
=Carriqe
al StS a
w 11 ce

to that program. Us

p-F= es rization us the

Authorization Procedure.

To use the

e the authorization

Ll or L2 Programrepeats
Enter: DEL DEL (toabortprogram)

ce tnr st a
Data Elo0k.s.
To use the Print System
0 Perform Authorization Pr
Enter: PSYS(inresponsetoCX
0 pr tisrecei
Enter:Pm.
11 t e
program0
le: RBJPFCIT

IcP3 OK

etc.
_
0 11 prin lete.
Ehlter: Km (to abort

To use the Print sCodeData :

(in response to
tisrecei

e ill t in t
 19 35
le:

etc,
0 11 t is lete.
er: WI

t is :
fthe
:

: Data Block for

thollt L).
: list of al.1 signed t*
:Allstati ical
order of
pie

: Bl ill output in of pr t
first).
: 1 Data Blocks t in order of
firs*),
ta

To use the Print Class of Service Data Block ( 1 Program:

0 response is recei afterprogranis 1

 t ( able

use Print Toll I&estriction :

izati
(in

ice code table

and all offi

use the Print

izatio 1, 2 or 3).
(in r t)

06
07
08
09
10
 19 E 37

use th@ ta :
0 Perform Authorization Procedure ( 1, or 3)
0 enREQ response is receivedafterp
Enter: PRT
prin t in

etc.

0 lete.

To use the Print Trunk Group Data Block ( ram:

0 Perform Authorization Procedure (
Enter:FTGP (in response toOK

The cutput fomat as the input fo t used in the

Program.
0 will be pr ted when the printcut is lete.
Enter:DELDEL CCRI (toabortprogram)

use the Print Trunk Data Block ( 1 Program:

o Perform Authorization Procedure (Level 1 or 2)
Enter:PTRK (in response to OK
 NW 19 ~PRELmmARY)
t is received after programisloeded:

TmnkDataBlockof PoPt
llnai3signe.dtrunk porb
TrunkDataEl~ks assi
output
tI,nT-All co Trunk Data Elloc~
1mTnlnkDataBlocks
TIE--All TIETrunkDataBlockswillbecutplt

1 Private Line Trunk Data

te Station assignments 11

:
output format will be the same as that used for data i in
Program,

To use the Print beast Cost Rating Data Block ( I Program:

0 Perform Authorization Procedure Uevel 1 or 2)
er: PICR (in response toOK
t is received after amisloa&d:
f the following
: All Ieast Cost Routingdatablocks
scellaneousParametersTablewill
lareacodetableswill. beoutp~t.
.I. arm code tables that point to route
output.
: All area/office code tables will be output.
0 Area/office Code Table XX will be output.
I All Area/Office code Tables that point to route
will beoutput,
R!TBlL: All Route Tables will be output.
RTXX: Route Table XX will be output,
EFXX: Al.1 Rcute Tables using Groupxxwillbe
Route Tables using fy Digits Table Xx
ify Digits Table XX

To use the Print ~aI.1 Pick-up Groups ( 1 program:

0 rization Procedure &eve1 1, 2 or 3)
(in response to OK pr
 19 39
0
Eater:
ining D
le:
FIEQW205
GRPOO

e Print Hunting
0 rm Authorizatio 1, or 3)
ter:PHNT (in re t)

11
0 ecmtputformatwill beas in the fol les:
RXQ DN224
223-224-225

etc.

ntenance Pr es assist
the system.
am areprovided:

The and TTRMPrograms are available to 1, 3 users,

the Programrequires Imellor 2 authori

Programtransfers thecontents of the

ent storage,
Using this program has the
t that is given enaData1
residing in system itten on the diskette, thereby
replacing any previously r
 19 (PF@LmmARY)

It is possible, via the System Data &Lock

daily routine and cause
mation that
capturedon
is pr am is also useful for skettes e
To use the Program manually (refer to Table
ization Procedure (Level 1, 2, or 3).
(in response to OK 1
11 respo th wDPG"
ansfer is ete.

en the TrRM Program hwi been loaded, a test sequence can E=fo
Attendant Consoles and EXTs. The test is designed tr, check all
functions of theterminalsinatima efficie&~~.
To use the Program (refer to Tables Al+1 and AE-2):
0 ization 1, 2 or 3).
response
0 11 be printed en theprogramhasl

to the console or EXT to tested, test is as

a) :
o Depress DN to tain dial to
oDial m ( 835) on the dial
* 0 system will respond by lig ngallEKTUzDs,
0 ate the keys and observe the respcmses in sequence s
b) Attendant Console:
0 Depress an LPKkey.
o Dial *TAT (*828) on the dial pad.
0 The syst 1 respond by lighting
0 Operate ys and &serv& the res es in sequencesho in Table AE-2.
Cl n all consoles andEKTs have tested,
Enter:DELDEL [CR]
t
 ThePeripheralIQuipnent'Est(TPER) Programisdesigned toaidin fault
location by disabling and enabling various PCBsand circuits. a faulty
circuit or E?cshas been located, it is disabled until it c replaced
to prevent it frcm interferring syst ation.
Using the TPERProgram, i also possible to determine busy/idle
s of any station, trunk or receiver port, muse the Program:
0 Perform Authorization Procedure ( lor 2).
Enter:TP~ (in response to OK t1
0 11 be printed enthep
Enter one of the following
DSCDXXX
(Diskble iately+-Disables
Of
F!ifzzF
DSTKNNX (Disable
PCB rxmber, i.e, TO1
lights FALTm relat
FALT #2 for circu
(Disable Line Circuit
= station PCBmm&r, = circuitnmber on that
PCB, i,e. l-81, lights FALT LED ielating to that
circuits l--4 and FALT#2 for circuits 5-8) and re
U3nable XXX)--Enables PCB
turns FALTLEDSoff, and re
Ermble )--Emblestnznk
= cucuit number on t PCB), turns FALTLEDs off unless other circuit
is still disabled, and returns REQ .
ExLCNM(:Bnable Line Circuit +Gnables station line circuit
= station line PCE3 nwber, on tha
off unless other cir abled,
t.
DSRCOOX (Disable Receiver Circuit 00X)--Disables iver circuit
00X if it is idle (00 = PCBnumber ROO#X = circu 0nthatPCB
(l---6)), lights the FALT LED relating to that circuit (FALT #l for
circuits 1 & 2; FALT#2 for circuits 3 & 4; FAL,T 3 for circuits 5 & 6)
and returns REQprompt,
EmCOOXmnable Receiver Circuit 00X+--Enables MMF receiver 00X (00 =
PCB nmber ROO, X = circuit rwmber on that PCB), LED off
unless other circuit is still disabled, and returns
DSCIXXX(Disable PCBXXXwhen it s idle)--Disables each circuit on
the PCBas it the appropriate FALTLBD as circuits
aredisabled,
 19 2

-.LIPS (List All Idle 1 system ports (

sI stations the fzbne that
is entered. lete,

(List All Disabled a list of all sys

receivers, stations e in a disabled state at
thetimzthatthe

(Status of Line Circuit ives the status of station line

St&US2
IDL
Em
DIS TTY
DIS CBL
DIS T.LD
e:
51115002
cKT2ExTIDL
en printczt is
(Status 0fTrunkCircxit

TrunkType status2
co IDL
DIS TTY
DIS TLD

printout is lete,
 (P

Returns REQpr en prin t is lete.

tatusofPCBXXX)--Gives thestatusofall
location LXX, Mx or ROO), Printout
d, but 11 list all circuits
order of circui
Returns REQpr en prin t is ete.
CALL TNNX (Set up a monitor link frcxn Trunk to the remote test
center.F--This disusedatar te test center to establish

Onceamonitor linkhasbeene&abl .ishedothertnurkscanbetested.

The trunk to be tested (B) is siezed by a terminal d
and then the test number that is to be dialed, is entered via the
terminal. TheaudioreSponsesaremonitoredatthe test center.
The set-up sequence includes several ste& that are led by system
Following theentry, "CALL II the system pr ts are:
Indicates that the first
return [CR1 st be entered to
Enter: [CR]
'ves the status of
was idle and
advancetothe
o Srs WAIT indicates that the r
(to try again) or [DELI [CR) (
oE?S CNRindicates that the reques not exist in the
system.
Enter: ElXLl[CRl toreturntotheRFQpr
E (Directory Number)--System is requesting the number of the
telephone to be called at the test center.
Enter: DN followed by a [CR]
DDL (Dialing)-System iS dialing. All sufficient time for the
tobedialedandthenentera [CR] to vance theprogram.
Enter: [CR]
tatuS of the connection.
t if lete, and the program
vance to the next pr vl?REc)
*
o STS PDL indicates that the trunk aling
entered.
 19 P NG (PRELIMINAPY) PAGE44
Enter: [CR1 to advance the program
o STS RLSAindicates that the trunk (A) S diSCOM&Xd due to a
malfunction or soma outside influence, such as the distant end
going on-hook or a grcund start trunk. After printing STS RLSA,
the program will return to the RE1;2
pr t autcmatically.-
s point the monitor link test center using
established and the syst s reguesting the
to be tested,
Enter: CALL C?NNX=portnusber of the to be tested)
Indicates that the c was received, A carriage return
stbe enteredtoadvance theprcgram.
Enter: [CR]
~Statusb-Gives status of the connections
f eque idle
ical e to
B-SYinticates t&t the requested trunk The program
to the TRKprmpt toal%owanother

t the requested trunk does not exist in the

system. The program will autcxnatically return to the TRK pronpt
etoallowanothertrunktobeselected.
0 RLSAis cutput if the mmitor link trunk (A) was disesmlected
to a malfunction or soma outside influence such as the
stant end going on-h After printing STS the program
11 return to the REQ t autamticallv.
DN (Directory Numberb-The bunk under test (B) has been si
system is requesting the nmber to be dialed (time,
I etc.).
&ter: DN foll by a ECRI
(DialingF-Systt is dialing via Trumk %a. dialing is
lete, progress tones (ringing, etc,) will be
via the monitor link CIrunk A). When the test lete, enter a
[CR] toreleaseTnmkBandretxrntotheTPX
_ Enter: [CRlwhentestisconplete
STSTM, DDL, PLSA, or PLSB(Status)--Gives status of the connection,
0 STS TLK will be printed in response to a [CR] entered following
thedialing proxpta&ve, The [CR] released the trunkunder test
(B), therefore the cutput indicates the status of the monitor link
(A). The program will automatically return to the TRK
allowanother tnlnktobe selected.
o STS DDL will be printed if a [CR] was entered before dialing
This state is the samas DDLatmve.
0 be printed if the monitor link (Trunk A) is released
unction or scme c&side influence. The trunk under
also be released and the program 11 return to the
0 if the trunk under test (Trunk B) is
ue to a ma nction or scme outside influence.
program will aut tically return to the TRK pr
mother trunk to be selected.
 19

e: tor link trunk (A)

center DN = 730-5000
Test DN = 730-0002
t 03) 21

UNEQ=N3FCBinthat
UIUS=PCBisqui
2. Status: IDL=Idle
lyaisabl
rtdisabl
DIS TKMsOftWare disabled es faulty
1

* nse is
.
/' " \ "/, 1 I

:
Level 3 given in the Adhorization Pr error e is
given.
given in the Authorization pr
. esent
:
.
gives then
 6
Ctl X=Igmre line entered

3,
 Nov. 84 PROGRAMMING
(PRJ%IMINARU P?GE47
D

Authorization Procedure rmst be ccmpleted. If an "OK'"response is

received, proceed as follows:

Ieast Cost Routinq

All PaqeAccess Cede

ita nN 17 ill-a\

NOTES:
1. All Page access code = 1, 2, or 3 digits.
2. N= numberdialed in place of "*" or 'V#l'.
3. Bewaxeof conflicts with the numbering plan and access codes--system will
not always check.
 Nov. 84 PROGRAMMING
(PRELIMINARY) PAGE48
4. CFDNATIMERmust be > RNAor RNAwill prevail.
5. DPTtimer also controls A!IT LPKrelease.
6. A IgYtqresponse allows calls from to a Hahdsfree Answerback
equippedEE?TtobeansweredHands
7. A *Y'* response allows calls from the Attendant to a Handsfree Answerback
equippedEXTto be answe.redHandsfree.
8.CtlX= Ignore line entered
CtlH= I3ackspace ,‘
DEL = Stop printing and return to REQ
DELDEL= Abortprogram ,^
9~I‘ ;
p;'
*

Authorization Procedure nust be coqleted. If an "OK" response is

received, proceed as follows:

1. a) The 3-character feature namefollowed by a space and its aocess code is

entered in response to FIT?.
b) The featuresmaybeenteredin any order and thenewaccess code
overwrites the existing one.
c) Any feature code which is to 'be unchangedneed not be entered.
d) The feature abbreviations and factory assigned codes are:
 Nov, 84 PRGRMMING(PRELIMINARY) PzlGE49
IJa,..
/', *I

la-1
h-L--- -*. - .

Call PiT3G$
1 Hold-All Calls

Universe Night
Charqe Acca
Flash , I
Paqing Zone I men I 1C I

P inu Zone 1
4-a O
.nff Zone Z
I
I
-
P

--
#2 I
Q#2

2.(xX= Ignore line entered

Ctl H = Backspace
DEL = Stop printing and return to RFl;z
D&DEL,= Abort program

:
 Nov. 84 PRCGRAMMI~
(PRELIMINARY) PAGE50

Authorization Procedure nust be ccsrrpleted. If an "OK" response is

received, proceed as follows:

NOTES:
1, NN= PCBlocation
2. X = Circuit number
3. A maxim of two key strips are possible: lo-key EXT= 1; 20-key EXT= 2.
4. There are 16 different COSgroups which are defined in the COSData BLock.
5. There are maximumof 32 Call Pick---upGroups,
6. Classes 0 - 7 are defined in the Toll Restriction Data Block (DIOL) IQ ~0:; p-*"' )"I
Program. Class 8 is 0, 1 restriction. ne is no Toll Restriction.
7. I+Jlaximum
of 30 Displ s assigned.
8. Enter key nu&er f by a space and then the entry. See Table Fl for
possible entry.
9, Key numbersmay be entered in any order and the "KEY" pr t will be
re,oeated until "DEL" is .
10. If KS was ZZrO-19 is al
11. Ctl x= Ignore line entved
Ctl H=Backspace
DEL = Stop printing and return to RnQ
DEL DEL,=Abort program
 Nov. 84 PRGFGMMING(P-1 PiaGE51

I Voice Paqe I
lWTES:
1. NNN = Direct
XXX= HuntD to remove present DN. Also see Station Hunt -
Distributed,,
2. NX is entered in place of the usual hunt DN following the EKT DN
assignment. For exanp?le: N = Distributed Bunt Group Number (0 -
---. ./ X =&xnberMmber(1-8)
j. XXX =?LDN assigned in Trunk Data Block.
4. Maximum ADL keys for entire system is 250.
5. Flash key causes a m.sec. flash (line open) to CO line.
6. LmJx= Port number of m to be signalled.
7. SDC XX makes the station a controller of list #XX,
SW XX makes the station a user of list #XX.
Maximum: 25 personal, lo-nuder Speed Dial-Station lists (XX = 1 -- 251,
8. XXX = DN of station receiving Voice Page. If e DN has nailtiple
appearances, the station having the DN as Pri (key 0) will be called.
 Nov. 84 PIuxmmMING(PRELLMINARY) PPGE52

I I No mrt (destination of the key feature) is assianed

I
,A...: --A23
is 250).

ntered but PUGkey already assiqned).

EREXT22 PVRNNN, PVNNNNis entered but trunk DN NNNis not yet assiqned. I
! EREKT23 ! The inmt DN is trunk DN (VCPNNNHunt DN),
imm nuher of Display EXTsalready assigned bxinaum in 30).
 Nov. 84 PRcx;RAMMIK
(PEmJMImY) PAm 53

AUthOriZatiOn PrOcedure must be COnpletd, If an NOKql

response is
received, oroceed as follows:

-- ..m.-
I 10 I

,if necessary i

1. NN = PCBlocation.
2, X = Circuit number.
3. 3, 2, or 1 digit DNs are all if there is no conflict; i.e., 300 and 30
arenotallowedtogether.
4, There are 16 different CDSgroups which are defined in the 00s Data Block,
5. Thereareamaximum of 32 call Pick-up groups.
6. XXX= the nmber to which this DN hunts.
NX= Station Hunt - Distributed
N = Distributed hunt group nun&r (0 - 4)
x =Membernumber(l-8)
Nom =Nohunt
7. DIP = Dial Pulse; TON= MM?; MNL0 or 1 = Direct Line to ATT 0 or 1;
HTL= Hot Line to DN XXX,
8, SDCXX imakesthe station a controller of list #XX
SW XX makesthe station a user of list #XX
Maximum*25 personal lo-nun&r SpeedDial-Station lists (XX = 1 - 25)
9. Y = wi Waiting feature activated
N= Czmp-onfeature activated
lOClasses 0 - 7 are defined in the Toll Restriction Data Block (DTOL)
Program. Class 8 is 0, 1 restriction. None is no Toll Restriction.
11.m. x = Ignore line entered
Ctl H= Backspace
DEL= Stop printing and return to RIQ
DELDEL= Abort program
 Nov. 84 PRCGRAMMIa
(PRELJMICJARY) PPGE54

imm numbexof Display EXTsalready assigned 0naximm is 301,

1__ .' T. ,,, r I'- .

Authorization Procedure must be completed, If an '"OXWresponse is
received, proceed as follows:

NOTES:
1. Enter a list of all features which are to this group, See
Table H-l, it is a list of feature
2. Default = all features allowed.
3, A maximumof 16 CC6Groups (O-15) are allowed.
4. The CO.5pr twill be repeateduntilDEL,is entered and then aREQ prorq$
will be given.
5*CtlX= Ignore line entered
Ctl H= mkspace
DEL= Stop printing and return to RnQ
DELDEL= Abort program
 ~av. a4 NG (P-NARY) P&SE 55

---
3 IT03 I

---
l T13

1 calls) ICED I

Calf Waitinq
 Nav. 84 PROGRAMMING
(PRELIMINARY) PA(;E56

If an 'OKn response is
received, proceed as follows:

’ I
I
I
I
Possible entries are:
- Misc. Paramters Table
Q;s- Restriction Class Table
Ax!- Area/Office Cod@Exception Table

ram, WhenTYPEpr tis received, proceedas

Authorization Code I
Numberof digits for SPCC.2 Aumi2 1l2orNmE 4
Authorization Code I
NorEs:
1. CoupledwithH?C entry in Leas&Co&Routing (DICl) PARTable. Data
entered here will appar in that table also.
2. Informs the system if interchangeable codes are used. (Office codes with
NO/IX format).
3. SPCCl& 2 entries are theDNof any specialized cmmoncarrier (SPCC)used
(MCI, spcr etc.) or Equal &mess Number(DXXX). data entered herealso
appears in SMDR((DMDR)program. Data entered here will not appear in SMDR
output,
* of digits in the authorization code used.with SPCCl, .%X2. Data
entered here will not appear in SMDRoutput.

Load MVL utility program. WhenTYPEprqt is received, proceed as

follows:
 Nov. 84 PRCCRAMMING
(PRELIMINARY) PSE 57

I NPA-555~XXXX Allo&ed
Area Code Table=Allow A or D 2

\,
.

Notes:
This nunber
will beusedintheDEKT, DSfTandMI;Pdatablocktorespondtothe"~L"
prompt.
2. Defines the Area Code Table of this class as an Allow (A) or Deny (D) type.
o If Allow (A) is entered, the system will allow all area codes mept
those deleted in response to the ACDpro@z,x3),-
o If Derby(D) is entered, the system will deny all area codes except those
added in response to the ACDpr t mote3). --
3, used to Add (A) or Delete (D) area codes fran the table (See Note 2).
e Defines the Office Code Table for this class as an Allow (A) or Deny (D)
tupe-
o If Allow (A) is entered, the system will allow all office codes except
those deleted in response to the WCD" proapt (Nos).
o If Deny (D) is entered, the system will deny all office codes except
those added in response to the "OCD"prorqt (Nos).
5, Used to Add (A) or Delete (D) office codes frcm the table (See Note 4).
Ttanges" we possible (7309 = 730 - 739).

mad DlKlLutility program, WhenTYPEprmptis received, proceedas

follows:

ITEN PROW USEREWRY -1

TYPE
TableNumber 0 31
AreaCode N O/IX, NONE 1
Class Number 0 1 etc., NONE
Office Codes OFC A NXXXMM etc. 2,3 1
I - or - I
I
 Nov. 8 (PRELIMINARY) PAGE58

identifies the area code that this ACEis assigned to. Format is N 0/1x
@3-29, x=4 9). A maximm of eight (8) AK! tables can be assigned to any
oneareacodeand those table mmbers (TNO, Note11 mstbe sequential..
2. Used to add (A) or delete (D) office codes from the table. Office codes
entered will be an exception to the area code and class listed.
Rangesare possible (7309 = 736 - 7391,
3. Codes cannot be edanddeletedin the samepass through the table. A
separate pass is required for each step.
Codes cannotbeaddedanddeleted in the pass through the table. A
se,parate pass is required for each step,

Program : TLoll Restriction Data Block WIOL)

Error Code
-0 (M 0/1x) is out of range.
ER!IIXDOl ric error. (0 91
ERTRDO2 Authorization Code is out of range. (0 12)
EzI!mDO3 Class No. is a& of range (0 7)
EBTRDO4 Numberofareacodeisover 0nax20)
ERTRDo5 !Sk3&erof office code is over 0uax 20)
ERTRDOG is out of range. (0 31)
EzTRDo7 bx 8)

Authorization Procedure mst be If an "OK?response is

received, proceed as follows:
 Nov. 84 PRcmAmING(PRRLIMI~) PAGE59
NOTES:
1. xx = List Nlileer.
00 = System List (90 nurbers maximum).
Ol--25 = Station Lists (10 numberseach maximm).
2. Input procedure is:
Address Code-Space-AccessCcxde-Pause-Dn
For exaqle: 01 9*
3. Stored nunbersmaybe between 1 and 16 digits: *
3-second pause and is counted as one of the 16 digits.
4. If the List Nunber &NO) was 00 (System List), %-digit ess cedes will
he used (lo-
5,Nofurtherpr ; will be given until DEL is entered,
6. Ctl X = Ignor
CtlH=Rackspace
inting and return to
rt program

Authorization Procedure rtplst be leted. If an "OK"'response is

received, proceed as follows:

1. SPCCl& SPCC2 entries are theDNof any SpecializedC nCa.rrier (WCC)

used (MCI, WC, etc.) or Qua1 kess Number (10xXx). Data entered here
also appears in Toll Restriction (rrrOL) PARtable. (Data entered here will
not appear in SMDRoutput).
2. Enter the trunk group numberand type of calls to be recorded on this Trunk
Group:NONS
INC - Incoming Only
OGT- Outgoing Only
IAO- Incoming and Outgoing
ML - Toll Only
INT- Incoming - all
- Outgoing - toll only
 . 84 PEGRAMMING(PWNARY) E 60
3. TGPcontinues to be proc@ed until DE%is entered,
4.ctlx= Ignore line entered
Ctl H= Backspace
DEL= Stop printing and return to REQ
DELDEL= Abort program

Authorization Procedure nust be leted, If an WV response is

received, proceed as follows:

NOTES:
1, XX=AccessCodeof thePage Zoneor All Page.
2, Ctl X = Ignore line entered
CtlH=EWcspace
DEL- Stop printing and return to
DELDEL= Abort program
 Nov. 84 (PRELJMINARY) PAGJZ
61

Authorization Procedure must be leted, If an "OK" response is

received, proceed as follows:

NOTES:
1. RPT= Report Commnd-if the program had been started previously, a re,port
would follow. See Table M-1 for format,
STT= Start Cmmand-usedtoinitialize theprogramaud start the record
keeping reporting activity. (Used for SCH= cm only. Must be entered
after each Rw! request.)
CBS= change Ccmand-used to alter reporting parameters.
OUT=OutCmnand-used to stop repor
2. System outputs the date in its memory M&Day, Year). Anentry
(MMDDYY) will overwrite the existing data. A carriage return (CR) = no
change.
3. System outputs the time in its memory (Hours, Minutes, Seconds1. An entry
(HEWMSS) will overwrite the existing data, A carriage return (CR) = ho
change.
Schedule of Reports:
e 30 = Report every 30 minutes beginning at the.tim listed as STR.DATR(Note
5) andSTR.TIME (Note 61,
60 = Report every 60 minutes beginning at the time listed as STR.DATE(Note
5) and STR.TIME(Note 6).
CMD=Reportonlywhen theRPT comnandis given (Note 1).
5, Date that record keeping and reporting should start. The system outputs
the date in its mmry (Month, Day, Year). An entry (WDDYY)will
overwrite the existing data. A carriage return (CR) = no change,,
6. Tim that record keeping and reporting should start. The system the time
in its memory (Hours, Minutes, Seconds). Ah entry (HHMMSS) will overwrite
the existing data, A carriage return (CR) = no change,
7, Enter Y (yes) or N (no) followed by a carriage return to select the
parameters to be reported (see Table M-2).
8. Ctl X = Ignore line entered
Ctl H= Backspace
Dm= Stop printing and return to REI;2
DELDEL= Abort program
 PR0SAMMIa (PRELIMINARY) P&SE62

I
i RFTFFtClM i MMnnYY

, ““.‘.,
I I

runk Groups Ol--15 are reported in the sameway as Group 00.

Averaqe Tim to Answer

dgoing CallI Peg Cmt

All Trunks Busy Peg count
j%~'~nkGroups 01-15 are reported in the sam way as Group 00.
 Nov. 84 PRaRAMMINc;(PRELIMINARY) EWE 63

Programhas already been started.

been reached or St? was entered previously. (REQ= SIT)
Invalid response. 53ITor KPTwas entered in response to FSQ
but the SCHentry is 30, 60, or NONE.
WI? was entered in response to Rn;;,but the program has not
been started. KorrectSTARTTIME& DATE,enter=SiT)
 0 84 PEuxRmMIm(PmNARY) PZGE64

Authorization Procedure must be If an WX" response is

received, proceed as follows:

the RCVRport RGO=PCBxmmber, X-Circuit 1.

= Ignore line en
Ctl H= Backspace
DEL= Stop printing and r&xt.rn to
DEL DEL= Abort program

Authorization Prxedure mst be cmpleted. If an VK'~ response is

received, proceed as follows:

i 7
3 I8 t
 PRcmmMI:ivG(PRELIMINARY) PZGE65
NOTES:
1, A mximum of 16 Trunk Groups (normally O-15) are possible. If Private
Lines axe to be equipped, the code VVLn is in place of
2, TKTcannotbechanged,DataBlackmstbe r (OUT) and 'data
entered.
3. xx= TrunkGroup tobe stepped to if this group is busy.
4*COSismeaningfulonlyfarT~~SA/DIDT~. 16 CC§groups areprovided
and aredefined in theClass of ServiceDataBlo&.
5. List the digits which are to be ignored for the plrpose of Toll/Code
Restriction. These digits will be outpulsed &t not counted as the first
digit.
6. Enter the number of digits ichare tobe stri frcm an incaning dialed
DN (TIE, DID, or CCSATrunk).
Exzmple: IAB=l
Inccming DN = 8249
RecognizedDN = 249
7, Enter the absorbed:di r
digit or digits, X = I=:
the translated digit
Exaqle: IAS = 1
1 = 9#2 Incaming 9RecognizedDN= 2
TRN2= 8#3 Incoming DN = 849 recognized DN = 349
8. classes 0 - 7 are defined in the Toll Restriction Data Block (D!tQL)
Program, Class 8 is 0, 1 restriction. None is no restriction.
9, Ctl-X = Ignore line entered
Ctl H= =w=-
DE&= Stop printing and return to
DELDEL= Abort program

:’ x = Used, 0 = Not Used

* 84 PRoGRAMMlNG(PREUMINARY) PIu;E 66
 e 84 PRc3csmmNG (PRELIMIWY) P&SE 67
TABLE O-2

Through
Balance
Non ‘NL VNL

Transmission
Non-transmission Compensated
Compensated (2-wire facility
Station Lines/ (2.wire facility 4 2dB loss or
Attendant Lines 4-wire
c 2dl3 loss and impedance
not impendance compensated,
compensated) or 4-wire
facility)

Station Lines/
1
Attendant Lines
8

5
m Norbtransmission Compensated
(2mwire facility * 2dB loss 1 1 1
z1 and not impedance compensated)
l -

EZ
Transmission Compensated
z O
b--z (a-wire facility % 2dB loss
or impedance compensated 1

NOTE.
The rwrnbers in the boxes represent in~ttral through corvwcticm loss i/r l/b’
 Nov. 84 PRcmAMmNG(PRELIMINARY) PAGE68

Authorization Procedure mst be completed. If an * response is

received, proceed as follows:

NOTE:
1. NN= TrunklXBrnmber, X=Circuitnumber.
2. YY- Trunk Group Number (O-15 or PUL).
3. GMNcannotbe changed, Data Blockwstbe removed (OUT) and
entered.
4. This pranp?t is *i$ only for n;P PVL, 'ION is the DN assigned to a. px
kJCis&,:
'; :I
5. is the trunk's Night station. This can alsobe changedby
aning forTIE/CCSA/DlD
.trunks). program to activate te A?cc
to Services.
6. Y or N tells th$ system if Disconnect Supervision can be ted frcxn the
distant end.
7. oPc= Originating Paxty Control, l?PR= First Party Release.
8. Hasmeaning only for TI.E/CCSA/DIDTrunks.
9. Outgoing dialing method:
PlO = Rotary Dial 10 PPS
P20 = Rotary Dial 20 PPS
TON= JYrM.F
10.1s Answer Supervision required to the calling party?
ll.Ctl x = Ignore line entered
Ctl H= Backspace
DEL= Stop printing and return to REQ
DEL DEL= Abort program
 e 84 PRGRAMMING
(PRELIMINARY
1 P&SE69

1 ~CSYF~FEX~IATIEVLIDIDCSA TIE
ll?ORlXIXIXIXfX X X
Y Y

Authorization Procedure mst be completed. If an V?Knresponse is

received, proceed as follows:
ITEM PROW3 USEREknRY
ICR Utility #1 or #2 OK DICl, DuJ2 1
- DISK LOADIN -
w
TYPE PAR, ACT, AM3 (DXl.1 2 I
I Data Tab1e TYP= -a-
RT%,MM! (DIE21 2 I
NOTES:
1, ICR Utilities are divided bet-en two programs:
Enter: --DLCl
___. PAR(Misc. Parameters)
Ear
Mrca Code Table)
AOC(Area/Office Code Table)
DE2 for RTB (Rake Table)
MDT(Mcdify Digits Table)
 e a4 NG (PRELIMINARY) PSE 70
2. If DICl was entered, possible responses are PAR, KT or A!32
If DE2 was entered, possible response are KTBor MDT,

en TYPEis pr ted, proceed as foil

D NNNNNN(DeleteCodes)
Directory Assistance (555) DAC YOIFN I
call Allcw I
Directory Assistance (555) LDl Xx (RcuteTable tobeused
I
I

&forms the system if interchangeable codes areused (Officecodes with

NO/lx format).
2. Defines the area code in which the system is located. Used for routing
dialed numbersnotcontainiq anareacode. CoupledwithHX entry in
Toll Restriction OTC&) PARtable. Data entered hsrewU.appar in that
table also.
3. Codes cannot k added and deleted in the samepass through the table. A
seperate pass is required for each step,

Load DLCl utility program, when TYPEis pranrpted proceed as follows:

 Nov. 84 PRZRAMMING
(PRETJMINARY) P&E 71
NcYrEs:
1. ~iclears RN0114 and assigns all area codes to table RN0 15.
NNOUT.clears RbDNN and assigns area codes frcxn table NN to RND15.
2,InputareacodestobeaddedtothisRNO. A maximumof 160 ties in the
format N O/IX are permitted (N=2 9, X=0 9). At start-up RN15 contains all
possible area codes. As codes are added toRNO114, they are automatically
deleted frcxn RN 15.
3. Input codes tobe deleted from this RNO. As codes are deleted frcmR.NO114
they are automatically added to RNJ 15. Codes can only be deleted from RN0
15 by adding them to another Iwo,

Load DE1 utility program, when TYPEis prcmpted, proceed as follows:

A ~&imum of 800, 3 digit numbers in the format NXX (N=2 9, X=0 9) are
permitt&. Rangesare possible (7309 = 730 - 739).

Load DIC2 utility program, when TYPEis proqked, proceed as follows:

 Nov. 84 PRCGRAMMING
(PfUILIMINARY) PAGE72
NWIES:
1, CUT- Will clear all Rake Tables
N - Will clear Route Table NN.
2. Rake definition -- ' 6 routes, Format is:
XX= Trunk Group = Modify Digits Table to be applied (M-D. Table
must be entered).
3. sting Route Schedule data is printed autmatically after the response to
EQ6prompt is entered.
4. Time of day interval for this routing schedule:
5. Maxhm Ctiinsd entrees for IC3, IC2, LCl is 6 routes. Do not assign the
.saxneroute to store than one class.
6. IC3, IC2, DC1are used in DCCSdata block to define station class of
service. Access permitted to each class is as fol
DC1-Allroutesdefinedfor LCl, DC2, DC3
Lc2 .- Routes defined for LC2, UC3
Ic3 - RoutesdefinedforIC3 only.

program, when TYPEis pr ted, proceed as follows:

Least Cost Routing DataBlock (DIClc

Mean$q
Input tune in seconds is cut of range, (0 99)
lmLCRo1 Area Code (N O/IX) is out of range. (N=2-9, X=0 9)
ExucRO2 Route No. is out of range. (1 15)
ERLCR03 Service Code Error.
EzucRo4 Service Code Over. Q4aximm 10)
ElEucRo5 Table No. is out of range. (1 16)
ERJXRO6 Office Code is cxlt of range. .
fsRJxRo7 TrunkGroupNo. is out of range.
ERlxR08 Modify Digits Table No. is out of range. (1 I.21
ExucRo9 Route No. Error. (RTl-RT6)
ERLCRlO No. of Digits to be deleted is out of range. (0 10)
ESLCR11 Digit to be added is over U&u&mm 20)
l!iRERu Digit to be added is incorrect.
ERuR13 &ric Error. (0 9)
 Nov. 84 PRCC%AMMIN(;
(P-NARY) PAGE73
EiFuml4 Numberof Area Code is over @&&mm 160)
EXURl5 Numberof Office Code is over (?&X~RUKI800)
ERUX16 Schedule time is out of range, (B&O 23, 0 59)
ExCR17 Schedule time error.
EFuCR18 Route No. is double assigned,

leted. If an "CW response is received,

l--The following responses are possible:

Pm= Output System Data Block
ct1 x = Ignore line,entered
Ctl H= Backspace
DEL= Stop printing and return to REQ
DEZDEL= Abort program
 Nov. 84 PRCGEGMMINS
(PRELIMINARY) PAGE7

Authorization Procedure must be coqleted. If an 9X" response is received,

proceed as follows:

ng responses are possible:

PRT= Output System Data Block
ctl x = Ignore line entered
Ctl. H= Backspace.
DEL= Stop printing and return to
DELDEL= Abort program

Authorization Procedure mst be completed, If an "OK" response is received,

proceed as follows: I)

l--The following responses are possible:

EIAILLI-All SDBswill be output in numerical order of &ports (lowest first)
PORNM= Port NNXdatawill beoutput
PORVAC = A list of all unassigned po 11 be outpu
DNALL = All SDBswill be output in cd. order ( st first) by DN
(PDNfor EXTs)
DNNNN= DN NNNdata will be c&put; if it is a mltiple appearanceDN, all
Data Blocks it appears in will be output
EiKTU= All J%!l'SDBswill be cutput in order of PDN(lowest first)
STTWiL= All standard telephone Data Blocks will be output in order of DN
(lowest first)
ctl x = Ignore line entered
Ctl. H= Backspace
DEL= Stop printing and return to REQ
DE&DEL=Abort program
 Nov. 84 PROGRAMMING
(PRELIMINARY) PAGE75

Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an -OK'" response is received,

proceed as follows:

E l-The following responses are possible:

Pm= COSData?3lockwill beoutput
ctl x = Ignore line entered
ctl E = Backspace
DEL= Stop printing and return to REQ
DELDEL= Abort program

Authorization Procedure must be coqleted, If an @OK"response is received,

proceed as follows:

l--T&he following responses are possible:

TRDAU: All Toll restriction-data blocks will. be output.
PAR: Miscellaneous Paramteres Table will. be output.
CISALL: All code tables; area, office and area/officewill. be output for all8
classes,
CILSCNX: All code tables; area, office and area/office will be output for Class
X.
MC&L: All area/office code tables will be output.
AOCMXX:The area code and all office codes for AredOffice Code Table no. XX
will be a&put.
CODXEC:The Area/Office Cede Table relating to area code XXXwill be cxltput.
ctl x = Ignore line entered
CU. H = Backs!oace
DEL= Stop printing and return to FUQ
DfZLDEL= Abort program
 NOV. a4 PRCGUWMING
(PRELIMINARY) E 76

Authorization Procedure must be ccq$eted. If an mOKg"

response is receivedp
proceed as follows:

l--The following responses are possible:

Output all SpeedDial List Data Blocks
=outputSystemSpeed Dial List DataBlock
LfSTfSJ= Output List '#N Data Block
ctl x = Ignore line entered
Ctl. H= BaCkspace
DEL= Stop printing and return to
DELDEL= Abort program

at leted. If an )" response is received,

proceed as follows:

l--The following responses are possible:

- PRT= Output SMDRDataBlock
ctl x = Ignore line entered
Ctl H= Backspace
DEL= Stop printing and return to R3Q
DELDEL= Abort program
 Nov. 84 PRcmAmmG(PmNARY) PAGE77

Authorization Procedure must be ccxnpleted. If an %K* response is received,

proceed as follows:

l--The following responses are possible:

AI&= AllTGPDataBlcckswill beoutput
GE?PXX= 2GPXXDataBlockwill he output
CcX=All00TrunkDataBlockswillheo~tp~t
EEX= AllFxTTunkDataBl~kswillbea;ltput
WAT= All WATSTrunkDats Blocks will be output
TIE= AllTIETnmkDataBlockswillbeautput
DID= All DI~TrunkDataBlockswill beoutput
CSA= All a3ATnlnkDataBlockswillbeoutput
PVL= AllPvLTrunkDataBlo&swillbea~tp~t
ctl x = Ignore line entered
CtlH= -J-pace
DEL= Stop printing snd return to REQ
DELDEL= Abortprogram
 Nav. 84 PROGRAMMING
(PRELIMINARY) PPGE78

Authorization Procedure must be coqleted. If an '( response is r--iv&,

proceed as follows:

following responses are possible:

- All TDBswill be output in numerical order of ports (1 st first)
PORJlNX=n>Bof Port NNXdatawill be output
= A.Uuna.ssigned trunk ports will be output
TGPNN= All TDBsassigned to trunkgrc~pN~will be output,
cm = AllCYaTrunkDataBlockswill beoutput
FEX= All FxTnlnkDataBlockswill beoutput
WA!?2
= All WATSTrunkData Blocks will be output
TIE = All TIETrunkDataBlockswill bemtput
DID = All DIDTmnkDataBlockswill be outmt
CSA= All CCSATrunkData Blockswi.ll be output
NIT = Output the Night Station Assignments for all CO, IX, and WATStrunks
PVIJ= All PvLTrunkmtaBlockswill beoutput
ctl x = Ignore line entered
c&l H = Backspace
DEL= Stop printing and return to REQ
D&DEL= Abortprogram

Authorization Procedure must be cqleted. If an "OK" response is receivedl

proceed as follows:
 NOV. a4 PRCGRAMING(PRELIMINARY) Pm3 79
NOTEl---The following responses are possible:
L&RALL: All Least Cost Routing datablocks will be output.
PAR: Miscelleaneous Paramhers Table will be output,
AcTALr,J:All areacode tableswill bemtput.
242mxWkAllareacode tables thatpointto route number (RN0) will be
output.
AOCAU: All area/office cede tables will be oUtput.
OACWW Area/Office Code Table XX will be out@.
ACCRNXX: All Area/Office Code Tables that point to route rmtber (RNO)XX will
be output.
CODXXX:All area code and area/office code tables relating to area code )[xx
will be output.
RTALIL: All Route Tables will be output.
TGPXX: AllRouteTables usingTru&GroupXXwill tput .
RTMDXX:All Rmte Tables using Modify Digit Table lbe output.
MIzaxx: Modify Digits Table XX will be output.
ctl. x = Ignore line entered
Ctl H= BaCkspaCe
DEL= Stop printing and return to
DEL DEL= Abort program

Authorization Promdure must be ccqleted. If an "CX" response is received,

proceed as follows:
 Nov.84 P NG (PE?ELIMINARY) PPGE80
t?DTEl-The followiq responses are possible:
ALL= Output all Call Pick-up Groups listed by DN
DNXXX= List the numbers of all Call Pick-up Grmps containing DN
ctl x = Ignore line entered
Ctl H= au=kspace
DEL= Stop printing and return to KEQ
DE&DEL= Abortprogram

Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an "CK" response is received,

proceed as follows:

l--The following responses axe possible:

ALL= Output all Hunting sequences
DJXXX= Output all Hunts containing DN
ctl x = Ignore line entered,
Ctl H= Backspace
DEL = Stop printing and return to m
DE&DEL= Abort program

Authorization Procedure must be mnpleted. If an "OK" response is

received, proceed as follows:

ram is loaded and durq is proceeding,

is coqlete.
3. Prcgram aborts automatically.
 MOV. a4 PRCXRAMEK (PEUZLMINARY) PAGE81

Authorization Procedure rmst be cmpleted. If an flOK" response is

received, proceed as follows:

1, P&am is now active; proceed to tested, and enter %

(*a351 and the following commands

SPKRkey off 1 AllL

---

' -'-l key 2

1

I
1 key 6 1;;

I Dial kev 0 I LED9=01

Dial key *
Dial kev #
I Kev StriD 0 IKXDO=On I
Strip 2 ILED2
Strip3 -

, - "IA \" - "AA, c

I I rizn (1 - nr, 17 - Ad=!=\

J Key Strip 19 1 LED 19 = on (18 = off)

 Nov. 84 PRrnNG (PFWXMINARY) P?GE82

* If an '*OK" response is

active; proceed to the sole to be tested, aRd

the following carnMnds

Dial key 7 ICI OPR=on, STRl!VCT= on,Otherz

J Dial key * 1 ICIim=on, STAT- =(

3ZRCALL I Associated LED= on. Others = off

Key Strip 1 MSG I AsscciatedLED=on,Others=off I
Kev StriD 2 HCXD I AllLEm=off
Key Strip 2 EXCLSEX 1 Associated LED= on, Others = off
Key Strip 2 EXCLDEST1 Associated LED= on, Others = off
I Key Strip 2 VEE?/CEG I Associated LED= on, Others = off
 ~av. a4 PRGRAMMING
(PRELIMINARY) PJGEa3

1 Key Strip 2 SPARE I AssociatedLED=on,Others=off r-

I I mh%s = off

I Dial kev a

E. Busv tone via hands&

= Ignore line entered

Ctl H=Backspace
DEL=gyy=REQ
DE&DEL= Abortprcgram

zat * response is received, proceed

as follows:

LbJXl-The following User Entries areinputtedas requiredafter ea&REQ prmpt.

 PR-NG (P-NARY) PKiE 84

T status m oox*~1&2~ -~---- -

I status of K!F3 xxx(l&2~ I CTirmit

.
= FCB RX =Circuitnumber.
 Nov. a4 PRcmMmN(;(PRELIMINARY) PAGE85

Set up monitor
link using
TNNX.

I
II
STSRLSA 1 Auto return to REQprompt i 10 i
. . . or e.. I I
I
I
II
I SrSr2SY i Auto return toTRxprcmpt 1 14 1
I e.. or . . . I I I
II
I
I i *.. I I I
SISRJLSA Auto return toREQ prmpt
I
I
1 -L
:
1. No PCBin that position
uNAs=PCB is mipped but no data is assigned
2. Status: IDL=Idle
BSY=wlsy
DIS Tl!Y=Manuallydisabkd via TIY
DIS C%=EXTport disabled by software due to open cable
DIS TLD=Softwaredisabled due to traffic load (indicates faulty
PC231
3. ctlx- Ignore Line Entered
ctl H = Backspace
DEL = Stop printing and return to R.Q
DELDEL= Abort program
4. [CR] is required to advance program.
5. Request& trunk (A1 is busy. Enter [CR1 to try again or [DELI [CR1 to
return to REX)prompt,
6. Requested trunk (A) does not exist in the system. Enter [DELI [CR1 to
return to EEQprompt.
 NW. 84 PRM;RAMMING
(PRETJIMINARY) PAGE86
7. Enter the test center DN followed by [CR].
8. Allow tim for coqletion of dialing and then enter [CR].
9. Requested trunk was idle and has been siezed.
10. Trunk A O'mitor link) has been released due to a rralfunction or an
outside influence, such as thedistantendgoirq on-hook (Ground Starts,
11. Dialing was notccqletewhen [CR] was entered. Asecmd [CR] is
required,
12, Enter theportnunker UTNNX)of the trunk (B) tobe tested.
l3. Requested trunk was idle and has been siezsd,
14. Requested trunk (B) is busy.
15, Requested trunk (B) does not exist in the system,
16. Enter the DN that should be dialed by the trunk under test foll
IcFtl.
17. After thedialing is cmplete, the audio from the trunk under test will. be
heard via the monitor link. Enter [CR] when the testis coqlete,
18. Test has ended. Programautomatically returns toTRKprcqttopxmit
another trunk to be selected.
19. The trunk under test (B) was released due to tion or cutside
influence, such as the distant end goiq on- nd Start).
200 ICR]was enteredwhileTrunkB still dialing. See note 17.
 Nov. 84 PRGRMMINS (PEtFUMINARY) PAGE 87

I I
IERJBFF I Other hardware causirrgthef3rror. !
 TABLE OF CONTENTS .......................................... i
TABLE LIST ................................................... ii
INTRODUCTION ............................................... 1
General .................................................... 1
Customer Data ..............................................
Utility Programs .............................................
I<eyboardTerminal...........................................
Remote Administration ........................................
Data Format ................................................
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT PROCEDURE ..............................
General. ...................................................
SYSTEM DATA PREPARATION. ..................................
System Data Block ...........................................
Access Code Data Block .......................................
EI<T Data Block .............................................
Standard Telephone Data Block .................................
Class of Service Data Block. ....................................
Code Restriction Data Block. ...................................
Speed Dial Data Block. ........................................
Station Message Detail Recording Data Block. ......................
Attendant Data Block .........................................
Traffic Measurement Data Block. ................................
DTMF Receiver Data Block. ....................................
Trunk Group Data Block. ......................................
TrunkDataBlock ............................................
DATA INPUT PROCEDURES .....................................
Data Terminal Connection .....................................
Authorization Procedure. ......................................
Utility Program Use. ..........................................
Authorization Codes Change. ...................................
DATA OUT PROCEDURES. ...................................... 15
General ....................................................
Print System Data Block .......................................
Print Access Code Data Block. ..................................
Print Station Data Block. ...................................... 16
Print Class of Service Data Block. ................................ 17
Print Code Restriction Data Block ...............................
Print Speed Dial Data Block ....................................
05.09 SMDR DataBlock ............................................
Print Trunk Group Data Block ..................................
Print Trunk Data Block. ....................................... 18
Print Call Pick-up Groups ...................................... 18
Print Hunting Arrangements. ................................... 19
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ................................... 19
Data Dump (DDMP) Program ...................................
EI<T/Attendant Console Test (TTRM) Program .....................
Peripheral Equipment Test (TPER) Program. ....................... 20
APPENDIX #l-System Record Sheets .............................. 52

-i-
A TTY & Modem Connections. ........................................
Utility Programs.. ................................................
AuthorizationCodeChange .........................................
System Data Block.. ..............................................
AccessCode Data Block.. ..........................................
bbreviation & Code List. ................................
EKTDataBlock ..................................................
EKT Directory Number ..........................................
EKT Private CO Line. ...........................................
EKT Features .................................................
Standard Telephone Data Block ......................................
Class of Service Data Block. .........................................
COS Features & Codes ..........................................
Code Restriction Data Block. ........................................
Speed Dialing Data Block ...........................................
SMDR DataBlock .................................................
Attendant Data Block ..............................................
Traffic Measurement. .............................................. 35
Traffic Measurement Report Format. ...............................
Traffic Measurement Parameters. ..................................
DTMF Receiver Data Block. .........................................
TrunkGroupData Block ............................................
Trunk Group Data Block Entries. ..................................
PERCEPTION Loss Plan .........................................
TrunkDataBlock .................................................
Trunk Data Block Entries. .......................................
Print System Data Block. ...........................................
Print Access Code Data Block. .......................................
Print Station Data Block. ...........................................
Print Class of Service Data Block. .....................................
Print Code Restriction Data Block ....................................
Print Speed Dial List Data Block. .....................................
Print SMDR Data Block ............................................
Print Trunk Group Data Block .......................................
Print Trunk Data Block. ............................................
Print Call Pick-up Groups ...........................................
Print Hunting Arrangements. ........................................
Data Dump Program ...............................................
EKT Test Procedure ...............................................
Attendant Console Test Procedure ....................................
Peripheral Equipment Diagnostic Procedure, ............................
Trunk Status Entries. ...........................................
Disk Drive Error Codes. ............................................
 loading is completed, a prompt will be output
to the terminal. The overlay area can accommodate
01.00 General only one Utility Program at a time, therefore when
another program is called up the previous one is
01.01 PERCEPTION is a stored program- erased.
controlled system utilizing an &bit microprocessor
as the central processing unit (CPU). The system NOTE:
memory is made up of both Read Only Memory Any diskette operational failure will cause an
(ROM) and Dynamic Random Access Memory error code to be output to the terminal.
(DRAM) (the small amount of ROM that is provided See Table A E for the listing of the error codes.
contains the “Loader” program for the Floppy
Disk Drive (DFDD)). When the system is first 01.30 Keyboard Terminal
powered up or is reset manually, the remainder of
the Operating System programs and Customer 01.31 The PERCEPTION system is designed
to interface with standard asynchronous keyboard/
Data are loaded into DRAM from the diskette
printer data terminals (a Texas Instruments Model
under the control of the Loader program.
743 or 745, or equivalent, is suitable). An Electron-
Since Dynamic RAM is volatile; that is, ic Industry Association (E IA) RS 232Ctype data
ntents are lost when power is removed, transmission interface is provided and the system
the diskette remains in the system as non-volatile will support data speeds of 300 or 1200 bps. The
storage. terminal connects to the “TTY” connector at the
DCEC connector panel (TTY port pin assignments
01.10 Customer Data are shown in Table A).

01.11 All PERCEPTION options are controlled 01.40 Remote Administration

by entries made in the Customer Data memory.
Tables are provided for defining System Parameters O-l 41 Utilizing a locally-provided MODEM,
and Trunking, as well as individual station features. the PERCEPTION system Utility Programs can
The Customer Data is unique to each system and be called up, and the system programmed and
is usually entered on-site using a keyboard terminal. tested from a remote location via a telephone line.
After the data has been entered into system mem- An EIA RS 232C interface is provided for the
ory, a simple keyboard command causes it to be MODEM and a data speed of 300 or 1200 bps
copied onto the diskette to remain as a permanent is supported.
record.
01.42 The MODEM isconnected to the MODEM
Utility Programs
connector on the DCEC connector panel (MODEM
In addition to the Operating System port pin assignments are shown in Table A).
programs and Customer Data, the diskette also
contains many Utility Programs, which are divided 01.50 Data Format
into three groups:
Utilizing one start bit, one stop bit and
1) Data Input Procedures-used when making one parity bit, the system communicates via the
changes to Customer Data. standard 7-level ASCII code on the TTY and
MODEM ports. The system transmits even parity
2) Data Output Procedures-used for obtaining
and ignores parity on the receive side,
printouts of the contents of the Customer
Data memory.

3) Maintenance Procedures-used when testing

02.00 General
the system.
02.01 The Utility Programs are divided into
When required, a Utility Program iscalled three types: 1) Data Input Procedures
up using a command entered via the keyboard 2) Data Output Procedures
terminal. The system responds by locating the 3) Maintenance Procedures
<- proper Utility Program on the diskette and then
loading it into the memory overlay area. When the 02.02 Each Utility Program has a 4-letter
 DATA OUTPUT PROCEDURES

Pin No. Mnemonic Designation

‘2 1 RXD / Receive Data (from TTY)

.Ir~ Print
Print
Print
Print
Trunk
Trunk
Group
Data
Call Pick-up
Hunting
Data
Block
Group
Arrangements
Block PTGP
PTRK
PCPG
PHNT
X
Y
Z
AA
*Connect to i-12 VDC internally
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Data Memory Dump DDMP AB
EKT/Attendant Console Test TTRM AC
- Peripheral Equipment Test TPER AD

Before the PERCEPTION system data

NOTE:
can be input, option selections must be made and
The MODEM and TTY connectors cannot be
then listed on the System Record (shown in
used simultaneously. One must be “open”
Appendix 1). The System Record will then serve
at any given time.
as a programming guide and installation record.
mnemonic name that is used to identify it and
to call it up from the diskette. An Authorization 2 The System Record contains a form for
Procedure must be executed before a Utility each Data Input Utility Program. The forms are
Program can be called up. identified by the Utility Program name and mne-
monic requested by the system (for example:
The Utility Programs are listed in Table System Data Block-DSYS Program).
B, complete with their mnemonics and the title
of the table that shows its format. 3 Inputting data via a Utility Program is
a matter of responding to the prompts. These
prompts are listed in their proper order in the
System Record Forms and space is provided to
record a response.
DATA INPUT PROCEDURES
Name Mnemonic Table Using the System Record forms to re-
Authorization Code Change DCHG C cord the various choices, make the option selec-
System Data Block DSYS D tions per the instructions in the following para-
Access Code Data Block DACD E graphs.
EKT Data Block DEKT F
Standard Telephone Data Block DSTT G
Class of Service Data Block DCOS H
Code Restriction Data Block DCRD I The System Data Block (DSYS) Program
Speed Dial Data Block DSDL J contains many miscellaneous data entries
SMDR Data Block DMDR K that are meaningful to the system as a whole
Attendant Data Block 1 DATT 1 L rather than any individual station or trunk.
Traffic Measurement Data Block 1 DTRF 1 M
DTMF Receiver Data Block DRCV N Data is entered as follows:
Trunk Group Data Block DTGP 0
Trunk Data Block DTRK P REQ (Request)-Indicates program has loaded.
Since data is always present, only the CHG AAT (Not Used) :
response is possible: Enter: [CR].

TOR (Time of Daily Routine)-Specifies the APX (Not Used):

time of day that the daily routine task (listed Enter: [CR].
after the next prompt) will run.
Enter: 24hour clock time (for example: LNI (Listed Directory Number #I )-Defines
1315 for I:15 pm). the LDN #I for use with DID feature (max-
imum: 3 digits).
D RT (Daily Routine Task)-Specifies the
Enter: 1, 2, or 3 digits.
maintenance tasks to be run at the time spec-
ified in response to TO R.
LN2 (Listed Directory Number #2)-Defines
Enter: DDMP (Data dump) or NONE.
the LDN #2 for use with DID feature (max-
TEN (Tenant Service)-Specifies if tenant ser- imum: 3 digits).
vice is to be used. If “Y” is entered, incoming Enter: 1, 2, or 3 digits.
trunk calls, dial q calls, attendant recalls,
NT1 (LDN #I Night Number)-Defines the
intercepts, etc. will be routed to the proper
destination to which LDN #I calls will be
attendant console (Art. #0 for Tenant #0
routed when the system is in night service (DN
and Att. #I for Tenant #I) according to the
or Universal Night Answer).
response to the TEN prompt in the EKT Data
Enter: 1, 2, or 3 digits or UNA.
Block (DEKT Program), Standard Telephone
Data Block (DSTT Program) and Trunk Group
NT2 (LDN #2 Night Number)-This is prompt-
Data Block (DTGP Program), If “RI” is entered,
ed only if the response to TEN (above) was
the attendant consoles will operate in the
,,Y It. Defines the destination to which LDN
load sharing mode.
#2 calls will be routed when the system is
Enter: Y (yes) or N (no).
in night service (DN or Universal Night Answer).
Enter: 1, 2, or 3 digits or UNA.
ICPI (Intercept #I)-If the attendant takes
control of a trunk group using the trunk group
BLFI (Busy Lamp Field #I)-Defines one of
access control feature, stations calling that
the hundreds groups to be displayed by the
trunk group will be routed to Intercept #I.
console B LF.
This entry defines ICPI as being overflow
Enter: 1 digit (1 kg).
tone (OFL) or attendant (ATT).
Enter: ATT or OF L
--BLF2 (Busy Lamp Field #2)-Defines one of
the hundreds groups to be displayed by the
ICP2 (Intercept #2)-An incoming call from
console B LF.
a DID, TIE or CCSA trunk to a non-existing
Enter: 1 digit (1 b 9).
DN will be routed to Intercept #2 when the
system is in day service and to overflow tone
yvhen night service is active. This entry defines
ICP2 as being overflow tone (OFL) or attend- OFLI (Overflow DN-Attendant Console #O)--
dant (ATT). Defines the destination for calls rerouted from
Enter: ATT or OF L. attendant console #O due to the attendant
overflow facility.
ICP3 (Intercept #3)-A call that is violating Enter: 1, 2, 3 digits or NONE (- UNA).
trunk access restrictions will be routed to
Intercept #3 when the system is in day service NOTE:
and to overflow tone when night service is This data may also be changed by the
active. This entry defines ICP3 as being over- attendant console.
flow tone (OFL) or Attendant (ATT).
Enter: ATT or 0 FL. OFL2 (Overflow DN-Attendant Console #I)-
Defines the destination for calls rerouted from
APG (All Page Access Code)-Defines the All attendant console #I due to the attendant
Page access code (maximum: 3 digits). overflow facility.
Enter: 1, 2, or 3 digits. Enter: 1, 2, 3 digits or NONE (= UNA).
 NOTES: be used by a rotary dial telephone in place
1. This data may also be changed by of I#I.
the attendant console. Enter: 1 digit.
2. OFL2 does not print out when the
system has no tenant service. NOTE:
sl not conflict with DN or other
MC0 (Message Center - Tenant #O)---Defines access codes-not checked by software.
the message center for stations assigned to
Tenant #O (all stations in a non-tenant system). COT (Camp-on or Call Waiting Time-out)-De-
The message center may be attendant console fines Camp-on and Call Waiting feature time-out.
#O or an EKT that is assigned to Tenant #O. Enter: Time in seconds (for example: 30).
Enter: ATTO, DN (1, 2, or 3 digits), or
NONE. RNA (Ring-no-answer Time-out)-Defines the
ring-no-answer time-out for attendant-handled
MC 1 (Message Center - Tenant # 1 )-Defines calls.
the message center for stations assigned to Enter: Time in seconds (for example: 30).
Tenant #I. The message center may be attend-
ant console #I or an EKT that is assigned to A0 F (Attendant Overflow Time-out) -Defines
Tenant #I. the time-out for the attendant overflow facility.
Enter: ATTl, DN (1, 2, or 3 digits), or Enter: Time in seconds (for example: 30).
NONE.
CFD (Call Forward No-answer Time-out)-De-
NOTE:
fines the Call Forward no-answer time-out.
MCI does not print out when the system
Enter: Time in seconds (for example: 12).
has no tenant service.
NOTE:
MMP (Meet-me Page DN)-Defines the phan- Must be less then RNA time or RNA
tom DN used by the attendant to “park” a time will prevail.
call for the Meet-me Page feature (maximum:
3 digits). HL.J (Hold [500/25001 Time-out)-Defines the
Enter: 1, 2, or 3 digits. time-out for the recall of a held call to a single
line telephone.
REM (Remote Access DN)-Defines the phan- Enter: Time in seconds (e.g., 75) or NONE.
tom DN used by the attendant to assign a
trunk for “Remote Access to Services” oper- DPT (Dial Pause Time-out)-Defines the max-
ation (maximum: 3 digits). imum pause allowed before the first digit is
Enter: l,2, or 3 digits. dialed or between other digits dialed from a
DTMF or a rotary dial telephone. Stations
RAC (Remote Access Change Code)-Defines released due to the DPT timer will hear over-
the access code used by the attendant to change flow tone. Used with the line lockout feature.
-
the authorization code that must be entered Enter: Time in seconds (for example: 15).
by outside callers using the remote access
feature (maximum: 3 digits). NOTE:
Enter: 1,2, or 3 digits. Also controls the release of an idle
attendant console LPK key.
ACC * (* Access Code)--Defines the digit to
be used by a rotary dial telephone in place PB-T (Push-button Time-out)-Defines the max-
of izl. imum pause allowed between digits dialed
Enter: 1 digit. on a trunk line from a DTMF telephone.
The transmit voice path from a DTMF tele-
phone to a CO line is broken during dialing.
conflict with DN or other The PBT timer determines how quickly the
access codes-not checked by software. path is restored and, therefore, should be as
short as possible.
ACC # (# Access Code)-Defines the digit to Enter: Time in seconds, e.g., 6.
 LLO (Line Lockout Time)-Defines the length The EKT Data Block (DEKT) Program defines
of time that overflow tone is applied to a sta- all parameters of a given EKT. An EKT Data
tion after having been released due to the DPT Block must be completed for each EKT in the
timer. After this time-out, the station will system.
hear nothing.
Enter: Time in seconds, e.g., 15. Data is entered as follows:

ACB (Automatic Callback Reserve Time)-De- REO (Request)-Indicates program has loaded.
fines the length of time that the called station Three responses are possible:
or trunk in an ACB call is reserved for thecaller NEW - to create a new Data Block
(maximum: 6 seconds). CHG - to change an existing Data Block
Enter: Time in seconds, e.g., 3. OUT - to delete a complete existing Data
Block
HFS (Handsfree Answerback Station)-A “Y”
response allows calls from any station to a /VOTE:
Handsfree Answerback-equipped EKT to voice If OUT is entered, only port number fPOR)
announce and be replied to handsfree. need be given below. No other entry is
Enter: Y (yes) or N (no). necessary.

HFA (Handsfree Answerback Attendant)-A Q (Port Number)-Identifies the hardware

“Y” response allows calls from the attendant location of the EI<T circuit to be defined.
to a Handsfree Answerback-equipped EKT to The port number has two parts.
voice announce and be replied to handsfree. 1. DEKU PCB location: LOO Q L14
Enter: Y (yes) or N (no). 2. Circuit number on that PCB: 1 w 8
For example: The port number of the
MDR (SMDR Equipped)-A “\I” response 4th circuit on the DEKU
informs the system that SMD R is to be equipped in position LO1 is LO14
and activates the MDR alarm on the console. Enter: Port number of EKT (LXXX).
Enter: Y (yes) or N (no).

NOTE:
if OUT command was given above, the port
The Access Code Data Block (DACD) Program just defined will be deleted and the next
assigns the access codes that will be used for prompt will be REQ.
feature execution.
KS (Number of Key Strips)--Informs the
Data is entered as follows: system of the number of groups of 10 feature
keys the EKT will have.
REQ (Request)-Indicates program has loaded. Enter: ‘l (for IO-key E KT) or 2 (for 20-
Since data is always present, only the CHG key EKT).
e response is possible:
COS (Class of Group Services)-Assigns one of
FTR: the 16 Classes of Service to the EKT. (The
Enter: 3-character feature name, a space, Classes of Service are defined using the DCOS
and then the desired access code. program.)
(See Table E-l for feature names Enter: COS Number (0 A, 15).
and standard code assignments.)
TEN (Tenant Number)-Assigns EKT to one
NOTE: ofthe two possible system tenants.
The access codes assigned at the factory Enter: 0 if tenant service is not selected
are shown in Table E-i’. Any feature in System Data Block (DSYS
not requiring change need not be entered. TEN = N).
Features may be entered in any order. 0 or 1 if tenant service is selected
in System Data Block (DSYS
TEN = Y).
PUG (Call Pick-up Group)-Assigns the EKT to SCN NNN XXX -Single Call No Ring
one of the 32 possible groups for use with the Incoming calls will not ring EKT.
Call Pick-up Group feature. NNN = Directory (Station) Number
Enter: Group number (0~31) or NONE. XXX = Hunt number = enter DN to
which this DN will hunt or
WTA (Warning Tone Allowed?)-Defines an code for distributed hunt
interruption-protected station. An “N” re- (see below)
sponse will prevent warning tones from being
applied to the station. Station Hunt - Distributed:
Enter: Y or N. #X = enter in place of the hunt num-
ber above. For example: SCR
CFT (Call Forward to Trunk?)-A “Y” re- NNN #X (maximum: 8 stations
sponse allows calls to be forwarded outside per group)
the system using the Call Forward-All Calls X = Distributed Hunt Group
feature. Number (0 ~4)
Enter: Y or N.
Private CO Lines:
TOL (Toll Allowed?)-An “N” response sub-
PVR XXX - Private Line Ring
jects the station to Toll or Code Restriction.
Incoming call will ring EKT.
A “Y” response permits Toll Calls.
XXX = TDN assigned in Trunk Data
Enter: Y or N.
Block
PVN XXX - Private Line No Ring
MTA (Not Used) :
Incoming call will not ring EKT.
Enter: N.
XXX = TDN assigned in Trunk Data
Block
HFA (Handsfree Answerback Equipped)-A
“Y” response activates the Handsfree Answer-
Features:
back capabilities of the E KT.
ACB - Automatic Callback
Enter: Y or N.
AD L - Automatic Dialing
CFD - Call Forward-All Calls
DIS (Not Used):
DND - Do Not Disturb
Enter: N.
PUD - Call Pick-up-Directed
KEY (Key Assignments)-Assigns a DN or PUG - Call Pick-up-Group
feature to one of the flexible keys. CWT - Call Waiting
CRG - Charge Account (SMDR)
Enter:
1) The number of the key to be defined SIG LNNX - Manual Signalling
followed by a space bar. Keys are num- (LNNX = port number
bered 0 through 9 (or 19 for 20-key of EKT to be signalledi
EI<T), starting from the bottom of the MSG - Message Waiting
vertical keystrip (the four keys under OV R - Override
the dial pad have fixed assignments). PRS - Privacy Release
Key number 0 is always assigned as the SCF - Speaker Cutoff
prime DN for that station. RND - Repeat Last Number Dialed
SDS - Speed Dial-System
2) Feature or DN assignments. The possible
SDC XX - Speed Dial-Station (control-
assignments are as follows:
ler of list XX)(XX = 1~25)
Directory (Station) Number (1, 2 or SDU XX - Speed Dial-Station (user of
3 digits) : list XX)(XX = 1 ~25)
SCR NNN XXX - Single Call Ring VCP XXX -Voice Page (XXX I= DN
Incoming calls will ring EKT. to be paged)
NNN = Directory (Station) Number FLH - Flash (sends flash to CO line)
XXX = Hunt number = enter DN to RLS - Release
which this DN will hunt or
code for distributed hunt KEY-The prompt will be repeated until
(see below) all entries have been made and [DEL] is entered.
 PUG (Call Pick-up Group)-Assigns the station
to one of the 32 possible groups for use with
The Standard Telephone Data Block (DSTT) the Call Pick-up Group feature.
Program defines all parameters for a given con- Enter: Group number (O&31) or NONE.
ventional telephone. An STT Data Block must
be completed for each conventional telephone H[\IT (Hunt Number)-Defines the station to
in the system. which this DN hunts. (Used with the Hunting
and Call Forward-No Answer features.)
Data is entered as follows: Enter: a) Next DN in hunt group.
b) For Station Hunt - Distributed:
REQ (Request)-Indicates program has loaded. #X = enter in place of hunt
Three responses are possible: number above.
NEW -To create a new STT Data Block. (Maximum: 8 stations per
CHG - To alter an existing STT Data Block. gmw)
OUT - To delete a complete existing Data (X = Distributed Hunt Group,
Block. O-J,4.)
c) NONE
NOTE: m (Dialing Type)-Defines the type of
If OUT is entered, only the port number dialing, if any, to be used by the station.
(POR) need be given below. AJo other entry Enter: DIP for dial pulse.
is necessary. TON for DTMF.
MNL 0 or 1 for manual line (off-
POR (Port Number-)-Identifies the hardware hook rings operator 0 or 1).
location of the STT circuit to be defined. The HTL XXX for hot line (off-hook
port number has two parts: rings DNXXX).
1) DSTU PCB location: LOON L14
2) Circuit number on the PCB: 1 ru 8 z (Speed Dial List)-Assigns one of the 25
For example: The port number of the personal, ‘IO-number speed dial lists for use
5th circuit on the DSTU at this station.
in position LO2 is LO25 Enter: SDC XX - Makes the station a con-
Enter: Port Number of STT (LXXX). troller of list XX (XX = 1 ~25).
SDU XX- Makes the station a user
DN (Directory Number)-Defines the directory of list XX (XX = 1 b25).
number (station number) of the station. NONE - No list assigned.
Enter: DN ‘I, 2 or 3 digits.
W> (Warning Tone Allowed?)-Defines an
SMX (Station Mix)-A “Y” response informs interruption-protected station. An “N” response
the system that the DN entered above also will prevent warning tones from being applied
exists on an EKT: to the station.
Enter: Y or N. Enter: Y or N.

Cos (Class of Group Services)-Assigns one CFT (Call Forward toTrunk?)-A”Y”response

of the 16 Classes of Service to the telephone. allows calls to be forwarded outside the system
(The Classes of Services are defined using the using the Call Forward-All Calls feature,
DCOS program.) Enter: Y or N.
Enter: COS Number (0 ~15).
TOL (Toll Allowed?)-An “RI” response
TEN (Tenant Number)-Assigns the station to subjects the station to Toll or Code Restriction.
one of the two possible system tenants. A “Y” response permits Toll Calls.
Enter: 0 if tenant service is not selected Enter: Y or N.
in System Data Block (DSYS
TEN = RI).
0 or 1 if tenant service is selected
in System Data Block (DSYS The Class of Service Data Block (DCOS)
TEN = Y). Program defines the 16 Classes of Service
available in the system. All services controlled numbers listed will be denied. If both types of
by the COS are allowed to all stations unless lists are used for one trunk group, one will be
restricted in this Data Block. an exception to the other unless a conflict
exists (in which case, the DENY will have
The DCOS program assigns a number (0 w ‘I 5) priority).
to each group of restrictions to be used. The
number defined here is then entered in re- Data is entered as follows:
sponse to the COS prompt in the DSTT, DEKT
and DTGP programs. REO (Request)-Indicates program has loaded.
Three responses are possible:
Any numbers not entered or otherwise defined NEW - To create a new list
will have no restrictions. CHG - To alter an existing list
OUT - To delete a complete existing list
Data is entered as follows:
CR L (Code Restriction List Number)-The
REQ (Request)-Indicates program has loaded. number (Ok7) of the list to be created,
The only response possible is CHG. changed or deleted.
Enter: List number (0 ~7).
m (Class of Service)-Defines the COS
number (0 *15) and the restrictions to be NOTE:
associated with it. The possible restrictions If the OlJ T command was entered in response
are listed in Table H-l. to REQ above, no other data is required.
Enter: COS number, followed by the
restriction, in the following format: CLR (Clear)-For NEW and CHG, the next
0 TOO OVR ACO. prompt will be CLR (Clear). An entry for this
prompt is possible only when a NEW list is
Note: being defined. The entry here clears the mem-
In this example, COS 0 will not ory and defines the list as an allow or deny
allow trunk group 00, override We.
and attendant control override.
An “A” entry clears the list of all allow
cos: codes and defines the list as DENY.
Repeat for all COS entries.
A “D” entry clears the list of all deny
codes and defines the list as ALLOW.

The Code Restriction Data Block (DCRD) If CHG was entered in response to request,
Program defines the office codes and area the CLR prompt, along with the original
codes to be allowed or denied by the Code response, will be output and the next
Restriction feature. prompt will be given.

Up to eight lists of up to 1,000 numbers each ALOW (If “D” was entered for NEW or if
can be defined in the Data Block and assigned CHG) :
numbers (0 ~7). The list numbers defined Enter codes to be allowed:
here are entered in the Trunk Group Data NNN NNN NNN etc., to 1,000 codes.
Block in response to the CRL prompt in the
DTGB program. Any toll restricted station DENY-Follows CLR for an “A” entry or
using a trunk in that group will be limited to ALOW for CHG.
dialing the numbers permitted by the assigned Enter deny codes:
lists. NNN NNN NNN NNN NNN

For convenience, the lists may be defined as 3. ee

ALLOW or DENY lists. When an ALLOW list
is used, only the numbers listed. will be per- The Speed Dial Data Block (DSDL) Program
mitted. When a DENY list is used, only the contains all numbers stored on the 9
 Speed Dial-System list and the 25 personal, ACL(Account Code Length)-Defines length of
IO-number Speed Dial-Station lists. All of these account code to be used or no account code.
numbers can be stored by either the attendant Enter: Number of digits to be used (1 rv 12)
console or by a controlling station. or NONE.

The DSDL program allows changes to any SPCCI (Specialized Common Carrier #l)-ln-
speed dial list to be performed from the forms the system of the DN used to access an
maintenance terminal. SPCC (MCI, SPC, etc.). The system will recog-
nize the DN and enter a unique condition code
Data is entered as follows: in the SMDR output.
Enter: SPCC Number NNXXXXX or NONE
REO ( Request) -Indicates program has loaded.
Two responses are possible: SPCC2 (Specialized Common Carrier #2) :
CHG - To change existing or enter new data Same as SPCC #I, but for a second carrier.
OUT - To clear all data Enter: SPCC Number NNXXXXX or NONE

LNO (List Number)-The number of the list J”GJ (Trunk Group)-Defines the type of calls
to be altered or cleared. to be recorded by SMDR for a given trunk
Enter: The list number (00 = System List) group.
(01 m 25 = Station List) Enter: XX YYY
(XX = trunk group number)
NO l-E: (YYY= NONE-No records
If the OUT command was entered in response INC-Incoming only
to REQ above, no other data is required. OGT-Outgoing only
IAO-Incoming and outgoing
STR (Store Number)-This requeststhenumber TO L-Toll calls only
to be stored. INT-Incoming-all
Enter: Address code, space and number in Outgoing-toll only)
the following format:
Example: 1 9”NPANNXXXXX Repeat for each trunk group used in the
2 9”NPANNXXXXX system

NOTE:
In these examples, 9 is a trunk
access code. Therefore, a ‘I*” is The Attendant Data Block (DATT) Program
entered to cause a 3-second pause defines the presence of two possible attendant
for dial tone delay. The “*” is consoles in the system and selects the atten-
counted as one of the 16 digits dant options.
allo wed.
Data is entered as follows:
etail ata
REQ (Request)-Indicates program has loaded.
Three responses are possible:
The Station Message Detail Recording Data NEW - To create a new data block
Block (DMDR) Program defines the account CHG - To alter existing data
code length and type of calls to be recorded OUT - To delete an existing data block
for each trunk group for the SMDR feature.
AN0 (Attendant Number)-Selects the console
Data is entered as follows: to be defined.
Enter: 0 or 1
REQ (Request)-Indicates program has loaded.
Three responses are possible: POR (Port Number)-Selects the port to be
NEW - To create a new table occupied by the console.
CHG - To alter existing data Enter: LOO1 for Attendant Console #O
OUT - To clear all existing data L121 for Attendant Console #I
LKO (Lockout Allowed?)-A “Y” response STR TIME (next prompts)
will enable the lockout feature. 60 - Report every 60 minutes
Enter: Y or N beginning at the time and
date listed asSTR DATE&
PAG (Page Key)-Assigns the console PAGE STR TIME (next prompts)
key to a particular page zone or All Page. CMD - Report only when RPT
Enter: Access code of the page zone, All command is given in re-
Page or NONE sponse to REQ above
NONE - No report
Traffic Measurement Data
(Table M) STR DATE MMDDYY (Start Date)-Defines
the start date for record keeping and reporting.
The Traffic Measurement Data Block (DTRF) Outputs current data and gives an opportunity
Program defines the parameters that control for a change.
the Traffic Measurement feature. Enter: Start Date: MMDDYY, or [CR] (no
change)
Data is entered as follows:
STR TIME HHMM (Start Time)-Defines the
REQ (Request)-Indicates program has loaded. start time for record keeping and reporting.
Four responses are possible: Outputs current data and gives an opportunity
RPT - Report Command: If record keep- for a change.
ing has been started previously Enter: Start Time: HHMM, or [CR] (no
(STT command or STR DATE/ change)
STR TIME), a report will follow
(see Table M-l for format). RPT (Report Parameters) :
SYST (System Data)
STT - Start Command: Initializes the pro-
ATT0 (Attendant 0)
gram and starts the record keeping
ATT1 (Attendant ‘1)
and reporting activity. (Used for
TGPOO (Trunk Group 00)
SCH = CMD. Must be entered after
TGPOl (Trunk Group 01)
each RPT request.)
2 2
CHG - Change Command: Alters reporting
TGP15 (Trunk Group 15)
parameters.
OUT - OUT Command: Stops reports.
Selects those parameters that are to be recorded
(see Table M-2). The current data (Y or N) is
The next prompt (for CHG input) will be:
output for each parameter and an opportunity
is given for a change.
SYST.DATE MMDDYY (System Date)-Re- Enter: Y (yes) or N (no) followed by a
ports the date currently in memory and gives [CR] for each parameter.
an opportunity for a change.
Enter: New date: MMDDYY, or [CR] (no eceiver
change)
The DTMF Receiver Data Block (DRCV) Pro-
SYST.TlME HHMMSS (System Time)-Re- gram identifies which DTMF receivers are to
ports the time currently in memory and gives be equipped in the system.
an opportunity for a change.
Enter: New time: HHMMSS (24 hour The system accommodates one DRCU PCB
clock), or [CR] (no change) which can be equipped with 4 or 6 single chip
DTM F receivers.
SCH XX (Schedule of Reports)-Defines the
schedule for reports. Outputs the current Data is entered as follows:
data and gives an opportunity for change.
Enter: 30 - Report every 30 minutes REQ
-- (Request)-Indicates program has loaded.
beginning at the time and Two responses are possible:
date listed asSTR DATE& NEW - To install a DTM F receiver.
 OUT - To remove a DTM F receiver. JEJ (Tenant Number)-Identifies the tenant
to which the trunk group belongs.
POR (Port Number)-Selects the port to be Enter: Tenant Number 0 or 1
occupied by the DTMF receiver. The port
number has two parts: TKT (Trunk Type)-Identifies the type of trunk
‘I) DRCU PCB location (ROO) to be used in group.
2) Circuit number on the DRCU PCB (l&6)
Enter: Port number to be used (ROOlk NOTE:
R006) it is not possible to enter a change (CHGl
for Trunk Type (TKT). The Data Block
must be deleted (OUT) and a new (NEW)
Data Block entered.
Trunk Grou ata Enter: COT - Local CO trunk
FEX - Foreign Exchange line
The Trunk Group Data Block (DTGP) Program DID - Direct Inward Dialing trunk
defines the parameters for each of the 16 PVL - Private line
possibie trunk groups in the system. A Data CSA - CCSA line
Block must be completed for each trunk group TIE - TIE trunk
in the system. Not all of the prompts listed WAT - WATS line
below are used for all trunk types. The re-
sponse given to the TKT (trunk type) prompt IA0 (Incoming/Outgoing)-Determines if the
will determine which prompts will be given. trunks will give 2-way or 1 -way service.
Table O-l shows the prompts that can be ex- Enter: ICT - Incoming only
pected for each trunk type. (Use the proper OGT - Outgoing only
system record form for the type of trunk being IA0 - 2-way
defined.)
STJ (Advance Step)-Identifies the next .trunk
Data is entered as follows: group in a route advance sequence. If a station
user attempts to access a trunk in this group
m (Request)-Indicates program has loaded. and they are all busy, a trunk from the group
Three responses are possible: identified in response to STP will be selected.
NEW - To create a new trunk group Enter: Next Trunk Group Number (0 w 15)
CHG - To alter data in an existing Data or NONE
Block
OUT - To delete an entire existing Data COD (Access Code)-Defines the access code
Block for the trunk group. I-, 2-, or 3-digit access
codes are permitted if no conflict exists in the
NOTES: system. For example: 3 cannot be used if 30
1. All trunks must be deleted from or 300 is used as an access code or DN.
the group using the DTRK pro- Enter: Access Code (1, 2 or 3 digits)
gram before the OUT command
will be accepted. COS (Class of Service)-Defines system access
2. If OUT is entered, only the permitted to inward dialing trunks, i.e., TIE,
Trunk Group Number (GRPI DID, CCSA. Use one of the 16 Classes of Ser-
must be entered. No other data vice defined by the DCOS program.
Enter: COS number (0 ~15)
is necessary.
TRN (Transmission)-Defines the transmission
GRP (Trunk Group Number)-Identifies the arrangement required for the trunks in the
trunk group number. Sixteen groups are group. The entry made here will determine the
available (0 b’l5). If private lines are to be type of PAD switching done on trunk connec-
used, they all occupy one trunk group called tions (see Table O-2 for loss plan).
PVL. The PVL group replaces group 15. Enter: NTC: Non-transmission Compen-
Enter: Trunk Group Number (0~15) or sated (2-wire circuit with
PVL <2dB loss)
 TRC: Transmission Compensated Enter: Code Restriction List Numbers
(4wire circuit or 2-wire cir- For example: 0 4 5
cuit with > 2dB loss)
VNL: Via Net Loss (4-wire VNL 03.17 Trunk Data Block (Table P)
circuit)
The Trunk Data Block (DTRK) Program de-
STR (Start Arrangement)-Defines the start fines the parameters for each of the trunk
arrangement to be used by the trunks in the circuits within a trunk group. A Data Block
group. must be completed for each trunk circuit
Enter: IMM: Immediate start in the system.
WNK: Wink start
DDL: Delay start The trunk type (TKT) defined for the group
will determine which entries must be made.
WTA (Warning Tone Allowed?)-Defines an Not all prompts are meaningful for all trunk
interruption-protected trunk group (for ex- types. Table P-l shows the prompts to which
ample: data line). An “N” response will prevent responses should be made. (Use the proper
warning tones from being applied to this trunk system record form for the type of trunk
group. being defined.)
Enter: Y or N
Data is entered as follows:
OAB (Outgoing Absorb Digit)-Identifies the
digit which is to be ignored for purposes R EQ (Request) :
of Toll or Code Restriction. This digit will NEW - To create a new Data Block
be outpulsed but not counted as the first digit. CHG - To alter existing Data Block
Enter: Digit to be absorbed or NONE OUT - To delete an entire existing Data
(for example: 1) Block

@ (Incoming Absorb Digits)-Defines the NOTE:

umber of digits that are to be stripped from lf OUT is entered, only the port (POR)
an incoming dialed number from a TIE/CCSA need be specified. No other data is
or DID trunk. necessary.
Enter: Number of digits or NONE
PJFJ (Port Number-)-Identifies the hardware
INS (Digits Inserted Incoming)-Defines the location of the trunk circuit to be defined.
actual digits to be prefixed to an incoming The port number has two parts.
dial number. A maximum of 2 digits are allowed. 1) DCOU PCB location (TOOwT07)
These digits will be prefixed after the number 2) Circuit number on the DCOU or DEMU
of digits defined in IAB above are removed. (1 -J4
Example: Incoming DN = 927 For example: The port number of the
IAB = 1 3rd circuit on the PCB in
INS= 2 position TO2 is T023.
Recognized DN = 227 Enter: Port number of trunk (TXXX)
Enter: Prefix digits (maximum: 2) or
NONE GMN (Group/Member Number)-The Group
Member Number identifies the trunk position
TOL (Toll Allowed?)-An “Iv” entry will toll in the system. The GMN is composed of two
restrict TIE, CCSA, DID trunks. parts:
Enter: Y or N 1) Group Number (defined in DTGP Program):
Identifies the trunk as being a member of
CRL (Code Restriction List)-Defines the code that group (00 rv 15).
restriction lists that are to be consulted when 2) Member Number: a unique number (00~
a toll restricted station or TIE trunk is making 31) is given to each trunk in a group, The
a call using a trunk in this group. The Code numerical order of the number will deter-
Restriction list numbers are defined in the mine the order in which the trunks will
DC RD Program. be selected upon dial access. The highest
 member number will be selected first. calls. For TIE, CCSA, DID trunks only.
Enter: Group and Member Number Enter: DIP - Dial Pulse
(GGMM) TON - DTMF

NOTE: DOT (Dialing Outgoing)-Selects the type of

1. GMN cannot be altered by CHG pro- dialing to be used on outgoing calls.
cedure. The GMN prompt will be fol- Enter: PI0 - Rotary Dial 10 puIses/sec.
lowed by the existing GAIN. P20 - Rotary Dial 20 pulses/set.
2. To change the GMN, the Data Block TON - DTMF
must be deleted (OUT) and a new
Data Block (NEW) entered. @ (Answer Supervision for TIE, CCSA, DID
trunks only)-Determines if answer supervision
TDN
-- (Trunk Directory Number)-For Private will be provided to the distant trunk on in-
Lines Only (Trunk Group PVL); defines a coming calls. If “Iv” is entered, the system will
phantom directory number that will be used not return answer supervision.
to assign private lines to a station. Enter: Y or N
Enter: 3-digit number

[\IIT (Night Number)-Assigns the night station Once the system data has been recorded
for the trunk. Incoming calls on the trunk will in the System Record, connect the data terminal
ring the night station when the system is in and input the data to the system as explained in
night service. If NONE is entered, the call the following paragraphs.
will activate the UNA signal. This parameter
can also be entered and changed by the atten- ata Terminal connection
dant console.
Enter: Night station number or NONE A keyboard/printer terminal (Texas In-
ents Model 743/745 or equivalent) is required
SIG (Signalling)-Identifies the type of signal- to communicate with the PERCEPTION system.
ling to be used on the trunk circuit:
Enter: GRD - Ground Start 2 The terminal is connected to the system
LOP - Loop Start a female-type RS232C connector (labeled
EAM - E&M TTY) located on the connector panel on the lower
LDR - Loop Dial Repeating rear of the DCEC.
OAD - Outgoing Automatic, ln-
coming Dial 41 In addition to the TTY connector,
a MODEM connector is provided. By attaching
DIS (Disconnect Supervision)-Informs the sys- a customer-provided “answer only” modem,
tem whether or not supervision can be ex- all functions normally performed by the local
pected when the distant end disconnects terminal can be performed from a remote
(controls trunk-to-trunk connections). location.
Enter: Y or N
0 The TTY and MODEM ports can operate
CA (Control of Disconnect)-Defines the re- at a speed of 300 or 1200 bps, and utilize a stan-
lease control of TIE, DID or CCSA connection. dard 7-level ASCII code with one start bit, one
Enter: OPC: Origination Party Control, stop bit and one parity bit. The system transmits
circuit is not released until even parity and ignores the parity bit on the
the trunk that originated the receive side. The speed is selected by a push-on/
call disconnects. push-off switch located on the front of the DPEU
FPR: First Party Release, either PCB. The associated LED is on when 1200 bps
trunk can release the con- is selected.
nection.
The speed selection is made simul-
DIN (Incoming Dialing)-Informs the system taneously for the TTY and MODEM ports. These
of what dialing type to expect on incoming two ports are wired in a logical “OR” fashion and
cannot be used at the same time. One must be from the factory, all levels are assigned 6000.
“open”. Codes are changed with the Authorization Code
Change procedure (DCHG).
04.16 The pin assignments of the TTY and
MODEM connectors are: 04.23 The activity granted to each level is as
follows:
TTY :
Pin No. Designation Level 1: Can do all activities of Levels 2 and 3.
2 RXD Received Data (from TTY) Can change the 4-digit codes of Levels
3 TXD Transmit Data ito TTY) ’ 1,2,and 3.
5 CTS Clear to Send*
6 DSR Data Set Ready* Level 2: Can do all Level 1 activities except
7 SG Signal Ground change Levels 1 or 2 codes or read out
8 CD Carrier Detect* Level 1 code.
20 DTR Data Terminal Ready (from TTY) Can change Level 3 code.
“Connect to f 12 VDC internally
Level 3: Normally assigned for end user use.
Can change: Station
Pin No. Designation
2 TXD Transmit Data (to modem) Speed Dial Data
3 RXD Receive Data (from modem)
4 RTS Request to Send (to modem)
5 CTS Clear to Send (from modem)
6 DSR Data Set Ready (from modem) Call Pickup Groups
7 SG Signal Ground Hunt Lists
Can request data dump.
The data terminal connector is located
in the rear (lower left) of the DCEC. Four female 24 To execute the Authorization Pr
25-pin EIA type connectors are provided in a teed as follows:
vertical row. Looking from top to bottom the
connectors are labeled: 1) Plug in and power up data terminal.

- TTY 2) Depress the carriage return key.

-MODEM The system will respond by printing
- SMDR “COD” and will print several characters
- DATA on the spaces to be occupied by your next
entry (this isdoneto mask the authorization
Plug the terminal into the TTY connector. code).

Cl The data terminal should be set for the

proper speed and for full duplex operation before
&itching its power on.

3) Enter the 4-digit code, follovved by a carriage

To prevent unauthorized tampering with
the Customer Data base, the PERCEPTION system The system will print:
requires an authorization code to be entered before “ERROR” if invalid code is entered
any Utility Program can be called up. This auth- (return to step 2).
orization must be entered prior to requesting each “OK” if valid co e is enlered (proceed
to request Utility Program).
utility.

There are three levels of authorization Utilit

(each of which has a unique 4-digit code that is
assigned in the system memory). When shipped Execute the Authorization
then enter the mnemonic of the required Utility in the System Record.
Program after the system responds with “OK”.
0 Authorization Codes Change (Table C)
.32 After the Utility Program name is entered,
the program is loaded from the diskette. When the 1 The DCHG Program changes the auth-
loading is complete, the system will prompt rization codes used in the Authorization Pro-
“R EQ”. cedure.

.33 Inputting data via a Utility Program is 2 To use the DCHG Program:
a matter of responding to the prompts given by
the system via the data terminal. The prompts Complete the Authorization Procedure 1Level
and the required responses are mnemonics that 1 or 2).
are usually abbreviations of the actual English Enter: DCHG [CR] (in response to OK
word required. prompt)

If an improper response is made to a The next prompt will be:

prompt, the system will respond with an error Ll XXXX (Level 1 authorization code)
message. The error message will be a “?” when (XXXX = present code)
the error is obvious but in most cases it will be an
alphanumeric code. The alphanumeric code con- NOTES:
sists of four letters identifying the program in 1. If Level 2 authorization code was given
use and two numbers identifying the error. above, L I will not be output-go to next
prompt (L2).
.35 Brackets are used to indicate control 2. If Level 3 authorization code was entered
code keys on the programming terminal. The above, an error message will be given-
[CTRL] (control) key must be held down while Level 3 cannot change the authorization
simultaneously depressing [Xl or [HI. Depress codes.
the carriage return key whenever [CR] appears.
The following control codes are available when Enter: New Ll code (4 digits) [CR]
using Utility Programs (depress [CR] after each
L2 XXXX (Level 2 authorization code)
code) :
(XXXX = present code)
[CTRL] [Xl - Ignore line entered-same prompt
will be repeated. Enter: New L2 code (4 digits) [CR]
[CTRL] [HI - Backspace-will allow you to L3 XXXX (Level 3 authorization code)
overwrite the previous charac- (XXXX = present code)
ter(s). Enter: New L3 code (4 digits) [CR]
[DELI - May be entered anytime-sys- Ll or L2 Program repeats
tem will stop execution and Enter: [DEL] [DEL] (to abort program)
return to “R EQ” prompt.
[DEL] [DELI-Abort program-ends use of
one utility, system will respond
with “SAVE”. A “Y” entry
will cause the system to copy
all present data onto the dis-
kette. If more changes are to
made, enter “N”. 05.01 The data output procedures allow the
maintenance terminal to request a printout of
When data already exists for a given the data contained in the various system Data
prompt and a change is not required, entering a Blocks.
[CR] will advance to the next prompt without
changing existing data. 05.02 The Authorization Procedure must be
performed before requesting a printout procedure.
.37 Tables D through AC show the format The following Data Blocks may be output for
of each Utility Program. If applicable, each table
is followed by a list explaining the error codes
pertaining to that program. Using the appropriate Class of Service Data Block
tables as guides, enter data previously recorded Code Restriction Data Block
NOTES:
I. XX = List Number.
00 = System List (90 numbers maximum).
0 1 I-W25 = Station Lists (10 numbers each maximum).
2. Input procedure is:
Address Code-Space-Access Code-Pause- DN
For example: 0 I 9 * NPANNXXXX
3. Stored numbers may be any length between I and ?6 digits; ” * ” enters a 3second pause and is
counted as one of the 16 digits.
4. If the List Number (LNO) was 00 (System List), 2-d&it address codes will be used (10 Q 99).
5. No further prompt will be given until [DELI is entered.
6. [CTRL.l [Xl = Ignore line entered
[CTRLI iHI = Backspace
[DELI = Stop printing and return to REQ
L’DELJ [DELj = Abort program

OT system ki our ot range is allow1

coae of station list is out of range (O-9 is allowed).
1 ERSDL 03 1 invalid DN (1 AJ 16 digits are allowed).

ata
Authorization Procedure must be complete If an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

NOTES:
1. SPCC I & SPCC 2 entries are the DN of any Specialized Common Carrier (SPCC) usad {MCI,
SPC, etc.).
2. Enter the trunk group number and type of calls to be recorded on this Trunk Group:
NONE
INC - Incoming Only
OGT - Outgoing OnJy
IA0 - Incoming and Outgoing
TOL - Toll Only
INT - Incoming - all
- Outgoing - toll only
3. TGP continues to be prompted until [DEL] is entered.
4. [CTRLI [Xl = Ignore line entered
[C TR Ll [HI = Rackspace
[DELJ = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DELJ [DELJ = Abort program
 be coinpleted. if art “Cl , proceecl

NOTES:
f. XX = Access Code of the Page Zone or Ail Page.
2. [CTR L J [XJ = Ignore line entered
[CTRLJ LHJ = Backspace
[DELJ = Stop printing and return to R.EQ
[DELJ [DELJ =&OH program

ERATT 08 Input data erased because program aborted during NEW data entry.
ERATT 09 1 Attendant data not assigned to input port (REQ = CHG, OUT).
Procedure - Traffic Measurement
Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

ITEM PROMPT I USER ENTRY 1 NOTE

OK 1 DTRF
- DISK LOADlN6 -
REQ RPT, STT, CHG, OUT 1
SYST.DATE MMDDYY MMDDYY or [CR] 2
SYST.TlME HHMMSS HHMMSS or [CR] 3
SCH J‘xxxr’ 30,60, CMD, NONE or [CR] 4
STR.DATE MMDDYY MMDDYY or [CR] 5
STR.TiME HHMM HHMM or [CR] 6
RPT
SYST Y or N 7
ATT0 Y or N
ATT1 Y or N
TGPOOwTGPl5 Y or N

NOTES:
1. RPT = Report Command-if the program had been started previously, a report would follow.
See Table M- 1 for format.
STT = Start Command-used to initialize the program and start the record keeping reporting
activity.
CHG = Change Command-used to alter reporting parameters.
OUT = Out Command-used to stop reports.
2. System outputs the date in its memory (Month, Day, Year). An entry (MMDDYY) will over-
write the existing data. A [CR] = no change.
3. System outputs the time in its memory (Hours, Minutes, Seconds). An entry (HHMMSS) will
overwrite the existing data, A [CR] = no change.
4. Schedule of Reports:
30 = Report every 30 minutes beginning at the time listed as STR. DA TE (Note 5) and STR. TIME
(Note 6).
60 = Report every 60 minutes beginning at the time listed as STR.DA TE (Note 5) and STR. TIME
(Note 6).
5. Date that record keeping and reporting should start. The system outputs the date in its memory
(Month, Day, Year). An entry (MMDDYY) will overwrite the existing data. A [CR] = no change.
6. Time that record keeping and reporting should start. The system outputs the time in itsmemory
(Hours& Minutes). An entry (HHMM) will overwrite the existing data. A [CR] = no change.
7. Enter Y (yes) or N (no) followed by a [CR] to select the parameters to be reported (see Table
M-2).
8. [CTRL] [XJ = Ignore line entered
[CTR Ll [HI = Backspace
[DELI = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DEL.J[DEL] = Abortprogram
 -3 -
ITEM 1 PROMPT 1 USER ENTRY
Authorization Procedure OK 1 TRF
- DISK LOADING -
REQ RPT
RPT FROM MM DD YY
HH MM SS
TO MM DD YY
HH MM SS
SYST RCV R DLY 0000
ATT 0 IN SVC 0000
WK TIM 0000
INC TRK 0000
INC TIM 0000
0 CALL 0000
LPS BSY 0000
TTA 0000
OVFL 0000
ATT 1 (SAME AS ATT 0)
TRUNKS TGP OO*
INC USE 0000
INC CALL 0000
O.G. USE 0000
O.G. CALL 0000
ATB 0000

GROUP ITEM IME TYPE OF ~~ASU~~M~~~

System DTMF RCVR Delay (3 sec.) Peg Count
Attendant #0 Time in Service ccs
Work Time ccs
Incoming (Trunk) Calls Peg Count
Time Servicing Incoming Calls ccs
Dial “0” Calls Peg Count
All Loops Busy Peg Count
Average Time to Answer SEC
Overflow Peg Count
Attendant #I (Same as Attendant #O)
Trunks Group 00* Incoming Usage ccs
incoming Calls Peg Count
Outgoing Usage ccs
Outgoing Calls Peg Count
Ail Trunks Busy Peg Count
*Trunk Groups 01 AJ 15 are reported in the same way as Group 00.

Program Name: Traffic Measurement (DTRF)

Error Code Meaning
Program has already been started. Either the START TIME has been
ERTRF 01
reached or STT was entered previously. (R EQ = STT)
Invalid response. STT or RPT was entered in response to REQ but
ERTRF 02
the SCH entry is 30,60 or NONE.
RPT was entered in response to REQ but the program has not been
ERTRF 03
started. (Correct START TIME & DATE, or enter: STT)
Procedure - DTM F Receiver Data Block
Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

ITEM PROMPT 1 USER ENTRY NOTE

OK ] DRCV
- DISK LOAQING -
REQ NEW, OUT
Port Number POR ROOX 1
REQ

NOTES:
I. Enter the RCVR port number (ROO = PCB number, X = Circuit number).
2. [CTRLI = [Xl ignore line entered
[CTRLJ = [HI Backspace
[DEL] = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DEL] [DEL] = Abort program

Error Codes

No PCB is equipped in that location.

Authorization Procedure must be completed, If an “OK” response is received, proceed

as follows:

ITEM 1 PROMPT 1 USER ENTRY 1 NOTE

OK 1 DTGP
- QISK LOADING -
REQ NEW, CHG, OUT
Trunk Group Number GRP Owl5orPVL I
Tenant Number TEN Oor I
Trunk Type TKT COT,FEX,DlD,PVL,CSA,TlE,WAT 2
lncoming/Outgoint IA0 ICT, OGT, IA0
Advance Step STP XX or NONE 3
Access Code COD N (NN or NNN)
Class of Service cos Owl5 4
Transmission TRN NTC, TRC, VNL
Start Arrangement STR IMM, WNK, DDL
Warning Tone Allowed? WTA Y or N
Outgoing Absorb Digits OAB 5
Incoming Absorb Digits IAB 6
Digits Inserted Incoming INS 7
Toll Allowed? TOL Y or N
Code Restriction Lists CRL Ow7orNONE 8
NOTES:
1. A maximum of 16 Trunk Groups (normally 0 w 15) are possible. If Private Lines are to be equip-
ped, the code “PVL ” is used in place of 15.
2. TKT cannot be changed, Data Block must be removed (OUT) and NEW data entered.
3. XX = Trunk Group to be stepped to if this group is busy.
4. COS is meaningful only for TiE/CCSA/DlD Trunks. 16 COS groups are provided and are defined
in the Class of Service Data Block.
5. List the digit which is to be ignored for the purpose of Toll/Code Restriction. This digit will
be outpulsed but not counted as the first digit.
6. Enter the number of digits which are to be stripped from an incoming dialed DN (TIE, DID,
or CCSA Trunk).
Example: fAB = I
Incoming DN = 8249
Recognized DN = 249
7. Enter the digits (maximum 2) which must be prefixed to an incoming dialed DN after Incoming
Absorb Digit.
Example: INS = 52 IAB = I
lncom ing DN = 327
Recognized DN = 5227
8. Enter the CRL (Code Restriction List) number of each list that must be checked when a Toll
Denied station is making a call. System maximum is 8 (lists 0 ti 7).
9. [CTRL] [X] = Ignore line entered
[CTR L] [f-l] = Backspace
[DEL] = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DELI [DELI = Abort program

TRUNK TYPES
ICOT 1 FEX 1 iMAT\ PVL 1 DID 1 CSA 1 TIE

cos 0 0 0 0 x x x
TRN X X X X X X X
STR X X X X X X X
 rror Codes
Program Name: Trunk Group Data Block (DTGP)
Error Code 1 Meaning
ERTRG 00 1
ERTRG 01 GRP still has trunk assigned (REQ = OUT).
ERTRG 02 The entered GRP number is already assigned (REQ= NEW).
ERTRG 03 One or more trunks are busv (REQ = CHG).
ERTRG 04 The entered GRP number dkei not exist (iEQ = CHG).
ERTRG 05 Entered advance step GRP is the same as this GRP number.
ERTRG 06
ERTRG 07
ERTRG 08 #I entered but tenant service not enabled in System Data Block.
ERTRG 09 #I entered but Attendant Console #I does not exist.
ERTRG IO Start arrangement conflicts with trunk type.
ERTRG II WTA = Y was entered but trunk type is PAG.
ERTRG 12 IA0 = ICT was entered but trunk type is PAG.
ERTRG 13 The entered GRP number does not exist (REQ = OUT).
ERTRG 14 Access code conflicts with an existing number.
ERTRG 15 Input data erased because program aborted during new mode.

Transmission
Non-transmission

Attendant Lines c 2dB loss and

not impendance

Station Lines/
Attendant Lines

(2-wire facility < 2dB loss

or 4-wire facility)

NOTE:
The numbers in the boxes represent actual through connection loss in c/B.
Procedure - Trunk Data Block
Authorization Procedure must be completed. if an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

ITEM 1 PROMPT 1 USER ENTRY 1 NOTE

OK 1 DTRK
- DISK LOAQING -
REQ NEW, CHG, OUT
Port Number POR TNNX I
Group/Member Number GMN YYZZ 2&3
Trunk DN TDN BBB 4
Night Number NIT NNN, NONE (UNA) 5
Signalling SIG GRD, LOP, EAM, LDR, OAD
Disconnect Supervision? DIS Y or N 6
Control of Disconnect CTL OPC, FPR 7
incoming Dialing DIN DIP, TON 8
Dialing Outgoing DOT PI 0, P20, TON 9
Answer Supervision ANS Y or N 8&10

NOTES:
I. N/V = Trunk PC5 number, X = Circujt number.
2. YY = Trunk Group Number (0 w 15 or PVL).
3. GMN cannot be changed, Data Block must be removed (OUT) and NEW data entered.
4. This prompt is valid only for TGP PVL. TDN is the DN assigned to a private trunk line.
5. NNN is the trunk% Night station. This number can also be changed by the Attendant when making
night assignments (no meaning for TlE/CCSA/DlD trunks).
6. Y or N tells the system if Disconnect Supervision can be expected from the distant end.
7. OPC = Originating Party Control, FPR = First Party Release.
8. Has meaning only for TlE/CCSA/DlD Trunks.
9. Outgoing dialing method:
PI0 = Rotary Dial IO PPS
P20 = Rotary Dial 20 PPS
TON= DTMF
IO. Is Answer Supervision required to the calling party?
1 I. [CTR L] [X] = Ignore line entered
[CTRL] [H] = 5ackspace
[DELI = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DELI [DELI = Abort program

TRUNK TYPES

X = Used, 0 = Not Used

 Error Codes
Program Name: Trunk Data Block (DTRK)
Error Code 1 Meanina
ERTRK 00 1 No PCB is equipped in that location.
ERTRK 01 1 PCB is not trunk type.
ERTRK 02 1 Port is busy (REQ = OUT).
ERTRK 03 1 Port is alreadv assianed fRE0 = NFW) I
ERTRK 04 1 Trunk Group Data Block does not exist.
ERTRK 05 / Member number already assigned.
ERTRK 06 1 Entry conflicts with existing DN or TDN

1 ERTRK
ERTRK
07
08
1 Entered night number does not yet exist.

ERTRK 09 Type of signalling entered conflicts with the trunk type.

ERTRK 10
ERTRK 11 Input data erased because program aborted during NEW mode.
ERTRK 12 The port is not assigned.
ERTRK 13 Another type of data is already assigned to the input port.
ERTRK 14
ERTRK 15 Entered DN already assigned to station (EKT or STT).
ERTRK 16 Entered DN already assigned to another trunk.

Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “OK” response is received, proceed

as follows:

iTEM 1 PROMPT USER ~~~~Y 1 NOTE

Ol< PSYS

REQ

NOTE I-The following responses are possible:

PRT = Output System Data Block
KTRL] [Xl = ignore line entered
[CTRLI [HI = backspace
[DELI = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DELI [DELI = Abort program

pleted. If an “OK” response is received, proceed

as follows:

NOTE I-The following responses are possible:

PRT = Output System Data Block
[CTRL] [Xl = Ignore line entered
[CTRLI [HI = Backspace
[DELI = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DEL.l [DEL] = Abort program
Procedure - Print Station Data Block
Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

f-?-EM PROMPT 1 USER ENTRY 1 NOTE

I OK 1 PSDf3 I
- DISK LOADING -
REQ I I 1
- EXECUTE -
REQ I I I
NOTE I- The folio wing responses are possible:
PORALL = All SDBs will be output in numerical order of ports (lowest first)
PORNNX = Port NNX data will be output
POR VAC = A list of all unassigned ports will be output
DNALL = All SDBs will be output in numerical order (lowest first) by DN (PDN for EKTs)
DNNN = DN NNN data will be output; if it is a multiple appearance DN, all Data Blocks
it appears in will be output
EKTAL L = All EKT SDBs will be output in order of PDN (lowest first)
STTALL. = All standard telephone Data Blocks ~$1 be output in order of DN (lowest first)
[CTRL] [Xl = Ignore line entered
[CTR Ll [H] = Backspace
[DEL] = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DELI [DELI = Abort program

Program Name: Print Station Data Block (PSDB)

Error Code Meaning
ERPST 00 Input PCB number or Circuit number is out of range.
ERPST 01 Input DN does not exist.
ERPST 02 Input port is not assigned to EKT or 500/2500.
ERPST 03 Manual signalling port does not exist.

Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “OK” response is r~cz&A, proceed

as follows:

ITEM PROMPT 1 USER ENTRY NOTE

I OK 1 PCOS
- DISK LOADING -
REQ I I
- EXECUTE -
REQ I

NOTE I-The following responses are possible:

PRT = COS Data Block will be output
[CTRLI [XI = Ignore line entered
[CTRLI [HI = Backspace
[DEL] = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DEL] [DELI = Abort program
 rint Code Restriction Data
Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

- EXECUTE,-
REQ 1

NOTE 7 - The folio wing responses are possible:

ALL = Output Code Restriction Data Block
CRLX = Print Code Restriction List #X
[CTR Ll /Xl = Ignore line entered
[CTR LI [HI = Backspace
[DEL] = Stop printing and return to REQ
[Df L] [DEL] = Abort program

Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “OK” response is received, proceed

as follows:

NOTE I-The following responses are possible:

ALL = Output all Speed Dial List Data Blocks
SYST = Output System Speed Dial List Data Block
LSTN = Output List #N Data Block
[CTRLI [Xl = Ignore line entered
[CTRLI [HI = Backspace
[DELI = Stop printing and return to REC!
[DELI [DELI = Abort program

Program Name: Print Speed Dial List (PSDL)

Error Code 1 Meaning
ERPSD 00 1 List number is out of range (0 N 25 is available).
rocedure - ‘Prim SMDR Data Block
Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

ITEM PROMPT 1 USER ENTRY 1 NOTE

I OK I FMDR
- DISK LQADING -
REQ 1

NOTE I-The following responses are possible:

PRT = Output SMDR Data Block
[CTRL] [X] = Ignore line entered
[CTRL] [HI = Backspace
[DEL] = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DEL] [DEL] = Abort program

Procedure - Print Trunk Group Data

Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

ITEM PROMPT 1 USER ENTRY 1 NOTE

OK 1 PTGP
- DISK LOADING -
REQ I 1
- EXECUTE -
REQ 1

NOTE I-The following responses are possible:

ALL = Ali TGP Data Blocks will be output
GRPXX= TGP XX Data Block will be output
COT = All CO Trunk Data Blocks will be output
FEX = All FX Trunk Data Blocks will be output
WAT = All WATS Trunk Data Blocks will be output
TIE = All TIE Trunk Data Blocks will be output
DID = All DID Trunk Data Blocks will be output
CSA = All CCSA Trunk Data Blocks will be output
PVL = All PVL Trunk Data Blocks will be output
[CTRL] [X] = Ignore line entered
[CTRL] [H] = Backspace
[DEL] = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DELI [DEL] = Abort program

Error Codes
Program Name: Print Trunk Group Data Block (PTGP)
Error Code Meaning
ERPTG 00 Invalid Response.
ERPTG 01 input trunk group number is out of range (REQ=GRPXX).,
Procedure - Print runk Data Block
Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

REQ I I

NOTE I-The following responses are possible:

PORAL L = All TDBs will be output in numerical order of ports (lowest first)
PORNNX = TDB of Port NNX data will be output
POR VAC = All unassigned trunk ports will be output
TGPNN = All TDBs assigned to trunk group NN will be output
COT = All CO Trunk Data Blocks will be output
FEX = All FX Trunk Data Blocks will be output
WAT = All WATS Trunk Data Blocks will be output
TIE = All TIE Trunk Data Blocks will be output
DID = All DID Trunk Data Blocks will be output
CSA = All CCSA Trunk Data Blocks will be output
NIT = Output the Night Station Assignments for all CO, FX, and WATS trunks
PVL = All PVL Trunk Data Blocks will be output
[CTRLI [Xl = Ignore line entered
[CTRL] [HI = Backspace
[DEL] = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DELI [DELI = Abort program

Pr0gram Name: Print Trunk Data Block (PTRK)

Error Code Meaning
ERPTR 00 Invalid response.
ERPTR 01 PCB Number or Circuit number is out of range (REQ = PORNNX).
ERPTR 02 Input trunk group is out of range (REQ = TGPXX).
ERPTR 03 Input port is not assigned to trunk (REQ = PORNNX).

ick-u
Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “Ol<” response is received, proceed
as follows:

iTEM 1 PROMPT- \ USER ENTRY 1 NOTE

OK 1 PCPG

REQ I I
- EXECUTE, -
REQ 1
 NOTE I- The following responses are possible:
ALL = Output all Call Pick-up Groups listed by DN
DNXXX= List the numbers of all Call Pick-up Groups containing DN XXX
[CTRLI [Xl = Ignore line entered
[CTRLJ [HI = Backspace
[DEL] = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DELI [DELI = Abort program

Error Codes
Program Name: Print Call Pick-up Groups (PCPG)
Error Code Meaning
ERPCP 00 Invalid response.
ERPCP 01 Input DN does not exist.

Procedure - Print unting Arrangements

Authorization Procedure must be completed. if an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

[T-EM PROMPT USER ENTRY 1 NOTE

OK PHNT
-DISK LOADING -
REQ I I
- EXECUTE -
REQ 1

NOTE I -The folio wing responses are possible:

ALL = Output all Hunting sequences
[CTRL] [X] = Ignore line entered
[CTRL] [HI = Backspace
[DELI = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DELI [DELI = Abort program

Procedure - Data Dump

Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

ITEM PROMPT USER ENTRY NOTE

OK DDMP
DPG I
DUN 2&3-

NOTES:
I. Program is loaded and dump is proceeding.
2. Dump is complete.
3. Program aborts automatically.
 Procedure - EKT Test Procedure
Authorization Procedure must be completed. If an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

ITEM PROMPT USEFI ENTRY NOTE

OK TTRM
- DISK LOADING -
REQ 1

NOTES:
I. Program is now active; proceed to the EKT to be tested, and enter *TEK ( * 835) and the foi.
lo wing commands in ~txpm~e:

-..~- -..,
8 = On (7 = Off)

Key Strip 11 11 =On (io=offj

,
15 /LED 15=On il4=6ffi

Handset off-hook

.-..---. -,,
(check riQht volume control)

1 Key Strip 2 ILED 2=On (1 =off) EKT

 Procedure - Attendant Console Test
Authorization Procedure must be completed, If an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

ITEM 1 f’R0iVIP-r1 USER ENTRY 1 NOTE

OK 1 TTRM
- DISK LOADING -
REQ 1

NOTE:
I. Program is now active. Proceed to the Attendant Console to be tested, depress an m key,
and enter * TATand the following commands in sequence:

IDial kev 7 1 ICI OPR=on,STATVCT=on, Others=off

ev Strip 1 LPK 4 1Associated LED=on, Others=off

IR

Key-Strip I MSG 1Associated LED=on, Others=off DIS TOD key

Key Strip 2 HOLD 1All LEOs=off

NOTE:
[CTRLI [Xl = Ignore line entered
[CTR Ll [HI = Backspace
[DEL] = TTY = RECJ
[DEL] [DEL] = Abort program
Procedure - Peripheral E. ment Diagnostic
Authorization Procedure must be completed. if an “OK” response is received, proceed
as follows:

BTEM PROMPT 1 USER EiUTRY 1 NOTE

OK 1 TPER
-DISK LOAQING -
REQ I
8 1

- EXECUTE -
REQ 1

NOTE I-The following User Entries are inputted as required after each REQ prompt.

ENTRY DESCRIPTION RESPONSE

DSCDXXX Disable PCB XXX immediately PCB disabled, FALT LEDs on
DSTKNNX Disable Trunk NNX* TRK disabled, FALT LED on, REQ prompted
DSLCNNX Disable Line Circuit NNX* Line disabled, FALT LED on, REQ prompted
ENCDXXX Enable PCB XXX PCB enabled, FALT LEDs off, REQ prompted
Trunk enabled, FALT LED off if all circuits are
ENTKNNX Enable Trunk NNX*
enabled, REQ prompted
Station line enabled, FALT LED off if all circuits are
ENLCNNX Enable Line NNX*
enabled, REQ prompted
DSRCNNX Disable RCVR NNX* RCVR disabled, FALT LED on, REQ prompted
RCVR enabled, FALT LED off if all circuits are
ENRCOOX Enable RCVR Circuit 00X*
enabled, REQ prompted
DSCIXXXX Disable PCB XXXX when idle Each port disabled when idle, FALT LEDs on
LIPS List all idle ports Idle por%=LNNX, TNNX, etc, REQ prompted
LBPS List all busy ports Busy ports= LNNX, TNNX, etc, REQ prompted
LDPS List al! disabled ports Disabled ports= LNNX, TNNX, etc, REQ prompted
Type (Note I) Status (Note 2)
500/2500 IDL
EKT BSY, DIS CBL
STLCNNX Status of Line Ckt NNX*
UNEQ D IS TTY
UNAS D IS TLD
R EQ prompted

Type (Note I) Status (Note 2

WAT IDL
FX BSY
TIE D IS TTY
STTKNNX Status of TRK Ckt NNX*
co D IS TLD
CCSA R EQ prompted
UNEQ
UNAS

STRCNNX Status of RCVR 00X* Status= IDL, BSY, DIS, ENEQ, UNAS, REQprompte
STCDXXX Status of PCB XXX Circuit #I = same as STLC, STTK, STRC
Circuit #2 = same as STLC, STTK, STRC
Circuit #3 = same as STLC
Circuit #4 = same as STLC, REQ prompted
-NN = PC6 number, X = Circuit number.
 DESCRIPTION 1 RESPONSE
Set up monitor System User Note
link using TNNX. WAIT [CR1 4
STSTLK . . . or Auto advance to DN prompt
STS WAIT.. . or [CR1 5
STS OV R [DELI tCR1 6
DN DN [CR1 7
DDL [CR1 8
STSTLK...or Auto advance to TRK prompt 9
STS RLSA . . or Auto return to REQ prompt 10
STS DDL [CR1 II
TRK CALL TNNX 12
WAIT tCR1 4
STS TLK . . . or Auto advance to DN prompt 13
STSRLSA...or Auto return to REQ prompt 10
STS BSY . . . or Auto return to TRK prompt 14
STS QV R Auto return to TRK prompt 15
DN DN [CR] 16
DDL [CR] when test is complete 17
STS TLK . . . or Auto return to TRK prompt 18
STS RLSA . . or Auto return to REQ prompt 10
STS RLSB . . . or Auto return to TR K prompt 19

1 STS DDL 1 [CR1

NOTES:
I. Type: UNEQ = No PC5 in that position
UNAS = PCB is equipped but no data is assigned
2. Status: IDL = Idle
BSY = 5usy
DIS TTY = Manually disabled via TTY
DIS CBL = EKTpor? disabled by software due to open cable
DIS TLD = Software disabled due to traffic load (indicates faulty PCB)
3. [CTRL] [XJ = Ignore line entered
[CTRLJ [HI = Backspace
[DELJ = Stop printing and return to REQ
[DEL] [DELI = Abort program
4. [CRJ is required to advance program.
5. Requested trunk (A) is busy. Enter [cRJ to try again.
6. Requested trunk (A) does not exist in the system. Enter [DELJ [CRJ to return to REQprompt.
7. Enter the test center DN followed by [cRJ.
8. Allow time for completion of dialing and then enter KRJ.
9. Dialing is complete, program advances to TRK prompt.
IO. Trunk A (monitor link) has been released due to a malfunction or an outside influence, such as
the distant end going on-hook (Ground Start).
I I. Dialing was not complete when [CRJ was entered. A second [CR] is required.
12. Enter the port number (TNNX) of the trunk (B) to be tested.
13. Requested trunk was idle and has been sieved.
14. Requested trunk (B) is busy.
15. Requested trunk (B) does not exist in the system.
16. Enter the DN that should be dialed by the trunk under test followed by a [CRJ.
17. After the dialing is complete, the audio from the trunk under test will be heard via the monitor
link. Enter [CRJ when the test is complete.
18. Test has ended. Program automatically returns to TRK prompt to permit another trunk to be
selected.
19. The trunk under test (B) was released due to a malfunction or outside influencer such as the dis-
tant end going on-hook (Ground Start).
20. [CR] was entered while Trunk B was still dialing. .See note 17.
 Error Codes
1 Procwam Name: Fioww Disk Drive Error
\ Error Code \ Meanina I
ERFD 01 File is closed.
ERFD 02 Read error.
ERFD 03 Write error.

ERFD 09 File is write protected.

ERFD IO File not found.
ERFD II Volume not initialized.
ERFD 12 1 File already exists.
I
ERFD FF 1 Other hardware causing the error.
 ITEM PROMPT ENTRY
REQ CHG
Time of Daily Routine TOR
Daily Routine Tasks DRT
Tenant Service? TEN
Intercept #I ICPI
Intercept #2 lCP7
Intercept #3 lCP3
All Page Access Code APG
Not Used AAT
1 Not Used APX I [CR]* 1
Listed Directory Number *I LNI
Listed Directory Number #2 LN2
LDN #I Night Number NT1
LDN #2 Night Number NT2
Busy Lamp Field #I BLFI 1
Eusy Lamp Field #2 BLF2
Overflow DN - Attendant Console #O OFLI
Overflow DN - Attendant Console #I OFL2
Message Center - Tenant #0 MC0
Message Center -Tenant #I MCI
Meet-me Page DN MMP
Remote Access DN REM
Remote Access Change Code
“ * ” Access Code
“#‘I Access Code . .v..s ,,

Camp-on (or CWT) Time-out COT

Ring No Answer Time-out RNA
Attendant Overflow Time-out AOF
Call Forward No Answer Time-out CFD
-. -
L
Hold (500/2500) Time-out HLD
Dial Pulse Time-out DPT
Push-button Time-out -.
PRT
Line Lock-out Time-out LLO
Automatic Callback Reserve Time ACB
Handsfree Answerback-station HFS
Handsfree Answerback-attendant HFA
SMDR Equipped MDR

*[CR1 = Depress Carriage Return

 ITEM PROMPT ENTRY*
REQ CHG
Feature FTR
Feature FTR 1 I
Feature FTR 1 I
Feature FTR
Feature FTR
Feature FTR
Feature FTR

Feature FTR 1
Feature FTR 1
Feature FTR 1
I
Feature FTR
Feature FTR
Feature FTR
Feature FTR 1
I
Feature FTR
Feature FTR
Feature FTR
Feature FTR
1 Feature I FTR t
Feature FTR
Feature FTR
FTR
Feature FTR
Feature FTR
Feature FTR
Feature FTR
Feature FTR 1

Feature FTR
Feature FTR
Feature FTR

*Enter name and access code in this column.

 ITEM
ITEM PROMPT ~~TRY~~TRYE~TRYE~T~Y ENTRY ENTRYENTRY ENTRY
REQ
Port Number POR
Number of Key Strips KS
Class Of Service cos
Tenant Number TEN
Call Pick-up Group PUG
Warning Tone Allowed? WTA
Call Forward to Trunk? CFT
Toll Allowed? TOL
Not Used MTA N N N N N N N N
HFA Equipped? HFA
Not Used DIS N N N N N N N N

Prime DN only! KEY0

KEY 1

KEY 2

KEY 3

KEY4

KEY 5

KEY6

KEY7

KEY8

KEY 9

KEY IO

KEY II

KEY 12

KEY 13

KEY 14

KEY 15

KEY 16

KEY 17

l<EY 18

KEY 19

NOTE: Use multiple sheets as required. Sheet - of

Port Number POR
Directory Number DN
Statton Mix SMX
Class Of Service ,I cos , , t > r
Tenant Number 1 TEN t
Call Pick-up Group PUG
Hunt Number HNT
Dialing Type DLG
Speed Dial List SDL
Warning Tone Allowed? WTA
Call Forward to Trunk? CFT
Toll Allowed? TOL

1 1
!TEM PROMPT ENTRY ENTRY ENTRY ENTRY ENTRY ENTRY ENTRY ENTRY
REQ
Port Number POF?
Directory Number DN
Station Mix SMX
Class Of Service cos
Tenant Number TEN
Call Pick-up Group PUG
Hunt Number HNT
Dialing Type DLG
Speed Dial List SDL
Warning Tone Allowed? WTA
Call Forward to Trunk? CFT
Toll Allowed? TOL

1 @xBticl 1
ITEM PROMPT ENTRY ENTRY EN-i-RYENTRY ENTRY ENTRY ENTRYENTRY
REQ
Port Number POR
Directory Number DN
Station Mix SMX
Class Of Service cos
Tenant Number TEN
Call Pick-up Group PUG
Hunt Number HNT
Dialing Type DLG
Speed Dial List SDL
Warning Tone Allowed? WTA
Call Forward to Trunk? CFT
Toll Allowed? TOL

NOTE: Use multiple sheets as required. Sheet- of

r

ITEM PROMPT ENTRY

REQ
Class Of Service cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos ~ l--m-
cos
cos I I I I I I
L
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
cos
?-.,.-
LUb
cos
cos
cos
cos 1
, I I
cos
cos
cos

NOTE: Use multiple lines as required.

 ITEM PROMPT ENl%Y
REQ
Code Restriction List Number CRL
Clear ‘CLR
Allow Codes ALOW

Deny Codes DENY

IVOTE: lose a separate sheet for each Code Restriction List. Sheet ----.--of-
 ITEM PROMPT 1 ENTRY ENTRY ENTRY
REQ 1 I
List Number LNO
Store Number STR

ITEM PROMPT 1 ENTRY ENTRY ENTRY

REQ 1 I
List Number LNO
Store Number STR

ITEM PROMPT 1 ENTRY ENTRY ENTRY

REQ 1 I
List Number LNO
Store Number STR

NOTES: Sheet of
I. Use one column for each station list.
2. Use multiple columns ‘for system list.
3. Use multiple sheets as required.
 Trunk Group TGP
Trunk Group TGP
Trunk Group TGP
Trunk Group TGP
Trunk Group TGP
Trunk Group TGP
Trunk Group TGP
Trunk Group TGP
1 Trunk Grow I TGP 1 TGP02
Trunk Group TGP TGP03
I

Trunk Group TGP

Trunk Group TGP
TGPIO
TGPI 1
TGPl2
TGP13
TGP14
TGPl5

ITEM PROMPT ENTRY

f?EQ
Port Number POR
 TRUNK TYPE: CO/FX
ITEM PROMPT ENTRY
REQ
Trunk Gt-oup Number GRP
Tenant Number TEN
Trunk Type TKI-
Incoming/Outgoing IA0
Advance Step STP
Access Code COD
Transmission TRN
Start Arrangement STR
Warning Tone Al!owed? WTA
Outgoing Absorb Digits OAB
Code Restriction List CRL

TRUNK TYPE: CO/FX

ITEM 1 PROMPT 1 ENTRY
RCn 1 I I I I I I I
8 us.--

GRP
TEN
Trunk Type TKT
lnrnrninfl/~~~tooino
..--...... ~, ---a-.. a
IA0
Advance Step STP
I Access Code COD
TRN
Start Arrangement STR
Warning Tone Allowed? WTA
Outgoing Absorb Digits OAB
Code Restriction List CRL

TRUNK TYPE: VWATS

I ITFM
ITEM I w2nwv
PROMPT 1 ENTRY
REQ I I I I I I I
Trunk Group Number GRP
Tenant Number 1 TEN 1
Trunk Type 1 TKT 1 1
Incoming/Outgoing IA0
Advance Step STP
Access Code COD
Transmission TRN
Start Arrangement STR
Warning Tone Allowed? WTA

NOTE: Use multiple sheets as required. Sheet -.,----of

i TRUNK TYPE: TlE/CCSA I
ITEM PROMPT ENTRY
REQ
Trunk Group Number GRP
Tenant Number TEN
Trunk Type TKT
Incoming/Outgoing IA0
Advance Step STP
Access Code COD
Class Of Service cos
Transmission TRN
Start Arrangement STR
Warning Tone Allowed? WTA
incoming Absorb Digits IAB
Digits Inserted Incoming INS
Toll Allowed? TOL

TRUNK TYPE: PVL (Private Line)

ITEM 1 PROMPT 1 ENTRY
REQ
Trunk Group Number GRP
Incoming/Outgoing IA0
Transmission TRN
Start Arrangement STR
Warning Tone Allowed? WTA

TRUNK TYPE: DID

ITEM PROMPT ENTRY
REQ
Trunk Group Number GRP
Tenant Number TEN
Trunk Type TKT
Incoming/Outgoing IA0
Advance Step STP
Access Code COD
Class Of Service cos
Transmission TRN
Start Arrangement STR
Warning Tone Allowed? WTA
Outgoing Absorb Digits OAB
Incoming Absorb Digits IAB
Digits Inserted Incoming INS
Code Restriction List CRL

NO 7-E: Use multiple sheets as required. Sheet -of

TRUNK TYPE: CD/FX/WATS PCB (T ) PCB (T )
ITEM PROMPT ENTRY ENTRY
REQ
Port Number POR
Group/Member Number GMN
Night Number NIT
Signalling SIG
Disconnect Supervision DIS
Dialing Outgoing DOT

TRUNK TYPE: TlE/CCSA PCB (T ) PCB (T 1

~Tisvl PROMPT ENTRY ENTRY
REQ
Port Number POR
Group/Member Number GMN
Signalling SIG
Disconnect Supervision DIS
Control of Disconnect CTL
Incoming Dialing DIN
Dialing Outgoing DOT
Answer Supervision ANS

TRUNK TYPE: DID PCB (T ) PCB (T 1

ITEM PROMPT ENTRY ENTRY
REQ
Port Number POR
Group/Member Number GMN
Signalling SIG
Disconnect Supervision DIS
Control of Disconnect CTL
Incoming Dialing DIN
Dialing Outgoing DOT
Answer Supervision ANS

NOTE: Use multiple sheets as required. Sheet of

TABLE of CONTENTS ......................................... i

GENERAL ..................................................

Summary Description ......................................

ES ................................

STANDARD TELEPHONE OPERATION ...........................

General information ........................................

Making Calls ..............................................
l-folding Calls ..............................................
Consultation Call ..........................................
Call Transfer ..............................................
Conferencing .............................................
Camp-onCalls ............................................
CallWaiting ..............................................
Automatic Callback ........................................
Call Pick-up Directed .......................................
Call Pick-upGroup .........................................
Call Forwarding ...........................................
tJniversal Night Answer .....................................
Paging ...................................................
iMeet-me Page ............................................
Speed Dial-System .........................................
Speed Dial-Station .........................................
Repeat Last Number Dialed ..................................
Executive Override .........................................
Least-Cost Routing .........................................
Account Number Recording .................................
DoNot Disturb ............................................
MessageWaiting ..........................................

ELECTRONIC KEY TELEPHONE OPERATION .....................

General Information ........................................

TABLEB-EKTDN LEDI~~I~ATIONS ...........................

akingCalls ..............................................
oldingCalls ..............................................
ConsultationCall ..........................................
CallTransfer ..............................................
 I?

Conferencing ............................................. 9
Privacy Release ............................................
Camp-onCalls ............................................
Call Waiting .............................................. 1
Automatic Callback ............ ............................ 1
Call Pick-up Directed ................ .......................
Call Pick-up Group .........................................
Call Forwarding ...........................................
Universal Night Answer ................................ .....
Paging ......................... ................... .......
Meet-mePage .. .............. ............................
Speakerphone .............................................
Handsfree Answerback/Speaker Cut-off . . . . . . . ~. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..O....................
SpeedDial-System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..O.............O......
Speed Dial-Station .................................. .......
Repeat Last Number Dialed ..................................
Automatic Dialing .............. ............................
Manual Signalling .........................................
PrivateLine ...............................................
Executive Override .........................................
Least-Cost Routing .................................. .......
Account Number Recording .................................
Do Not Disturb ............................................
MessageWaiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-.............
Message Center Operation ..................................

ATTENDANT CONSOLE OPERATION . . . . s.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Information ........................................

ConsoleDisplay Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..-..............
Busy LampField ...........................................
Incoming Call Identification ..................................
Calling Source Number ......... ............................
Classof Service . . . . ..O....................................
Call Destination Number ....................................
Call Destination Status .....................................
ConsoleKeyboard ..........................................
Volume Control ............................................
Handset/Headset ..........................................
EmergencySwitches .......................................
Console Operation .........................................
Incoming Call Handling .....................................
TimedRecall ..............................................
Attendant Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Originating a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HoldingaCallonan 1 @IKey ............................... 2
Through Dialing ........................................... 2
Trunk-to-trunk Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SerialCall ................................................
Exclusion Keys (Splitting) ...................................
Verify ....................................................
Paging ...................................................
Meet-mePage ............................................
Attendant Conference ......................................
Overflow .................................................
.loin Key ..................................................
Position Busy .............................................
Activating Night Service ....................................
Night Answering Connections ...............................
Remote Access to System Services ...........................
eedQial-System .........................................
nkcontrol .............................................
Interposition Call/Transfer ..................................
Account Number Recording .................................
MessageWaiting ..........................................
Display and Set Date/Time ..................................
Cancelling All Call Forwarding ...............................
System Initialize ...........................................
Emergency Transfer ........................................
 has a capacity of 120
e system provides a
wide variety of basic and optional features to
users of either conventional rotary dial or touch-
employs stored pro-
tone telephones, as well as to users of Toshiba
gram control, digital svvitching and custom LSI
electronic key telephones.
circuitry.
Three different electronic key tele-
Utilizing the same electronic key EKTs) are available with this system.
telephone as the latest Toshiba See Paragraph Electronic Key Telephone
tronic Key Telephone systems, Operations, for ils on the EKTs.
combines the functions of conventional private Attendant Con-
The
branch exchange (EPA X) systems and elec- sole’s digital display provides the operator with
tronic key telephone systems (EKTS) into a sin- all the information required for easy operation.
gle design while remaining compatible with Two attendant consoles may be equipped in the
existing switching and station equipment. system.

ial Standard tone-continuous, proceed to dial.

Standard tone-three short pulses followed by a continuous tone, proceed

with feature execution.

Standard tone-60 pulses per minute; the connection or trunk line you’ve
dialed is busy.

Same as busy tone-l 20 pulses per minute; call is blocked due to dialing
error or service restrictions.

Standard tone-‘l second on, 3 seconds off, your call is ringing.

A single muted warning tone during conversation indicates a call is waiting.

Two short warning tones during conversation indicates a call is waiting.

A short tone burst (repeated every 15 seconds) is applied whenever the

attendant enters the conversation, and when a station user enters your
conversation using the Executive Override feature.

s **
A single ring every 4 seconds.

1 A double ring at 4second intervals,

*On an EfU these special signal tones are heard via the speaker.
**On an EKT these ringing signals are heard via the speaker.
r

To reconnect the call:

I) Lift the handset.

02. Dial tone must be heard before se- IV0 TE.

lect particular feature. If you have just lifted If you do not return to the call within a pro-
the handset, you will hear dial tone. If you are grammed time period your telephone will
engaged in a conversation, however, you must ring to recall you.
obtain “Recall Dial Tone” before activating an-
other feature, such as transfer, etc.
This feature enables you to consult
During a conversation, Recall Dial
with either an inside or outside line while you hold
Tone is obtained by “flashing” the hookswitch
another call.
(plunger) located in the cradle that holds your
handset. To flash, momentarily depress the hook- To consult:
svvitch (for about X second). In response, you will
hear Recall Dial Tone, which is three short bursts 1) Flash the hookswitch.
of dial tone, followed by continuous dial tone. Original connection goes on hold.
You will hear recall dial tone
in alls
2) Dial the desired number*.
To call another station:
To return to original connection:
I) Lift the handset.
1) Flash the hookswitch twice.
You will hear dial tone.
The first flash will actually conference all
21 I the station’s number. three lines.
You will hear the call progress tones.
2) Resume conversation.
3) Hang up when the call is completed.
WO TES.
0 To make an outgoing call: 1. If you hear a busy tone after dialing the
station number or trunk access code,
I) Obtain dial tone. flash the hookswitch once to return to
the original call.
2) Dial the required trunk access code.
2. To return to the originalcallafter access-
Trunk Access Codes: ing a trunk, flash the hookswitch &vice.

3.1 To transfer a call:

I) Request the party to wait.

You will hear outside dial tone.
sh the hookswitch.
3) Dial the desired telephone number. Original connection goes on hold.
You will hear recall dial tone.
3) Dial the desired number*.
0 To hold a call:
4) When the called party answers, announce
sh the hookswitch. the call.
You will hear recall dial tone.
Connection on hold. 5) Hang up to transfer the call.

IHB. *IV0 TES.

Hear dial tone. 7. If you hear a bwsy tone after dialing the
station number or trunk access code,
3) Hang up or dial another call. flash the hookswitch Q
 the original call. .‘I Two short warning tones while you are
2. To return to the originalcallafteraccess- talking with someone advise you that your attend-
ing a trunk, flash the hookswitch t ant has an outside call waiting. You have three
choices:

I) Ignore the call-it will be returned to the

.“I
It is possible to add a third party to an attendant.
existing two-party conversation, and the added
party can be on either a station or an outside line. 2) Terminate your existing call, and accept the
Any of the three parties may disconnect at any- new call.
time, leaving the remaining two parties con-
3) Hold the existing call, and accept the new
nected. (The system will refuse to connect certain
call. In this mode, it is possible to alternate
types of trunk lines.)
between the two calls until the conversations
To initiate a conference: are terminated.

the hookswitch. I To t the waiting call and termi-

riginal connection on hol 63 existi I:
You will hear recall dial tone.
I) Hang up.
2) Dial the desired number*. Your telephone will ring in the usual
manner.
3) Flash the hookswitch when the new party
ers. 2) Answer the new call.
3-party conference commences.
To accept the waiting call while holding
.I To return to the original connection: the existing call:

I) Flash the hookswitch. ‘1) Flash the hookswitch.

The third party will be released and the Original connection goes on hold.
original connection will remain. You will hear recall dial tone.

*NQ TES: 2) Dial q m.

7. If you hear a busy tone after dialing the You will be connected to the waiting call.
station number or trunk access code,
To return to the original call:
flash the hookswitch ce to return to
the original call. I) Flash the hookswitch.
2. To return to the original call after acces- New call goes on hold.
sing a trunk, flash the hookswitch
2) Talk to the original call.

NOTE:
A short warning tone while you are It is possible to alternate between the two
talking with someone advises you that an incom- calls indefinitely by successive hookswitch
ing call has been parked at your station by the flashes.
attendant.
To disconnect one call and remain
To accept a camp-on call: connected to the other call:
mplete the original call and hang up. I) Hang up while connected to the call you wish
Your telephone will ring. to terminate.
2) Answer the new call. Your telephone will ring.

NOTE: 2) Answer the remaining call.

Camp-on and Call Waiting are mutually NOTE:
exclusive.
Camp-on and Call Waiting are mutually
exclusive.
(x2.1 7.Q 2) Dial q B.

(X2.1 7.1 If you attempt to call another station or 3) You will hear recall dial tone.
access a trunk and receive a busy tone, you can
4) Dial the station number that is ringing/on
request to be signalled when the desired station or
hold.
trunk is idle. You may continue to use your tefe-
You will be connected to that call.
phone in the usual manner while awaiting a
callback.

Q2.17. To activate Automatic Callback: Call Pick-up Group allows you to an-
swer a call that is ringing at a station within your
1) Flash the hookswitch.
designated group without knowing exactly which
2) Dial q a. station number is ringing.
You will hear recall dia I tone.
To use Call Pick-up Group:
3) Hang up and wait for callba ck, or dial another
1) Obtain dial tone.
call.
21 lB/7J
.‘t 7.3 When the desired connection becomes
You will be connected to any call that is
idle your telephone will ring in short bursts. You
ringing at any station in your group.
must pick up the call within six seconds or your
request will be cancelled.

To answer Automatic Callback: Call Forwarding enables you to direct

your station’s incoming calls to another
Lift the handset.
station.
4 If the called party is a trunk, you will hear an
outside dial tone (proceed to dial). To use Call Forwarding:

NOTE. 1) Obtain dial tone.

If the call was made using Least Cost Rout- 2) Dial q m.
ing, the callednumber willbe dialedautomat- You will hear recall dial tone.
ically at this point.
3) Dial the number to which calls are to be
W If the called party is a station, that station will forwarded.
ring and you will hear the ringback tone.

4 If you hear overflow tone, the station or trunk You will hear dial tone.
you called has been previously called, hang The number is stored.
up and wait to be called again.
NOTE.
To cancel Automatic Callback: You may continue to place outgoing calls
from your telephone while Call Forwarding is
1) Lift the handset.
in effect.
2) Dial ~~~~~~.
02.ZQ.3 To cancel Call Forwarding:
You will hear recall dial tone.
Callback is cancelled. I) Obtain dial tone.
irec 2) Dial [qm]Tj.
Call Forwarding is cancelled.
Pick-up Directed allows you to
answer a call which is ringing or on hold at a iVC?Ed nswer

station other than your own.

.I To answer an incoming call when the
To use Call Pick-up Directed: night bell is heard:

1) Obtain dial tone. 1) Obtain dial tone.

2) Dial am. .3 To store or change a telephone
You will be connected to the incoming r:
call.
Notify the attendant (the Speed Dial-System direc-
3) Speak to the caller tory is controlled by the attendant console).

4) Use Call Transfer to connect the call with the Q2.25.Q

desired station.
5.1 If your telephone is equipped with
Q2.22.Q Speed Dial-Station, you can establish a personal
directory of up to 10 telephone numbers.
Q2.22.1 To page:
.25.2 To use Speed Dial-Station:
I) Obtain dial tone.
1) Obtain dial tone.
2) Dial the access code (see below) for the
desired zone. 2) Dial q m.

3) Dial the Speed Dial address code (0 - 9).

The system will dial the stored number.
(location)
ZONE 1 To store or change address codes:
ZONE 2
NOTE.
ZONE 3
A Speed Dial-Station directory may be
ZONE 4
shared by several stations. However, only
ZONE 5
one of these stations is designated as the
ALL ZONE
controller, and only the controller can store or
3) Speak slowly and distinctly, and repeat your change numbers.
message.
I) Obtain dial tone.
.23. eet-

This feature will automatically connect ear recall dial tone.

you to a call that has been “parked” for you by the
3) Dial the assigned single-digit code (0 - 9).
operator. If you are away from your telephone, the
operator may park the call and direct you via the 4) Dial the number to be stored (I 6 digits
page system to dial an access code. maximum).

To answer a Meet-me Page: NO TE.

1) .Obtain dial tone at any telephone. It may be necessary to insert a pause to allow
for dial tone delay. If so, depress the key q
2j Dial the access code given by the operator. after the trunk access code.
You will be connected to the caller im-
mediately. 5) IH.
You will hear recall dial tone.
Number is stored.
cc. As many as 90 telephone numbers can
be stored in your Speed Dial-System directory.
The system automatically stores the
Q .I2 To use Speed Dial-System:
last number you dialed. Therefore, if you reach a
1) Obtain dial tone. busy number or no answer, and wish to try again,
simply request the system to redial the number.
2) Dial mm.
To redial the last number:
3) Dial the SDS address code ( 10 - 99).
The system will dial the stored number. I) Obtain dial tone.
2) Dial mp[. i) You will hear busy tone.
The system will automatically redial the ii) Activate the Automatic Callback
number. feature.

CCQLi ec0r

0 Executive Override allows you to enter Your system automatically records the
an established conversation. The original parties details of some or all of the calls you make to or
receive a warning tone prior to you being con- receive from outside the system. Recorded calls
ferenced. may be assigned account numbers for billing pur-
poses ( digits).
To override a busy station:
To record an account number before
1) After reaching the busy line, flash the hook-
dialing a call:
switch.
Busy tone changes to recall dial tone. 1) Obtain dial tone.

2) Dial q m. 2) Dial /$/a.

A warning tone is given to the existing
3) Dial the account number on the dial pad
connection.
t digits).
A 3-way conference now exists (any one
en the number is completed, you will
of the parties can leave the conference
hear dial tone again.
and the other two will remain connected).
4) Dial the call in the usual manner.
NOTE.
A short tone will be heard every 15 seconds To record an account number during a
by all parties during the override condition. call (incoming or outgoing)-At any time before
disconnect...

I) Ask your party to wait.

will automatically se-
lect the least costly route (trunk group) for the call 2) Flash the hookswitch.
that you wish to make. If that route is busy, the Connection on hold.
next best route will be selected (if permitted by You will hear recall dial tone.
your class of service).
lm@.
To use Least-Cost Routing: You will hear recall dial tone.

I) Obtain dial tone. 4) Dial the account number on the dial pad
f digits).
2) Dial the LCR access code
en the number is completed, you will
3) Dial the number you wish to call. hear recall dial tone again.
a) If a trunk allowed by your Class of Service
5) Flash the hookswitch.
is available:
i) Your call will be dialed automatically 6) Resume conversation.
over the proper trunk.
ii) You will hear call progress tones.
iii) Proceed with conversation when the
This feature allows a station to give a
party answers.
usy indication whenever the user does not wish
NOTE. to be disturbed.
As a programmable option you will receive a
To activate DND:
I’ -sec. duration warning tone just prior to the
system advancing to the last choice routing. 1) Obtain dial tone.

b) If no trunks are available: 2) Dial q a.

3) Hang up. ped model), and either 10 or 20 flexible assign-
ment keys (hence the identification of IO-key
2.30.3 To cancel DND: “S” model, 1 O-key and 20-key).
1) Obtain dial tone
0. All the feature keys are plainly
marked as to their purpose: the three or four
keys (depending on model) positioned horizon-
3) Hang up. tally have fixed assignments: @KR ] turns
Do Not Disturb feature is no longer speaker on and off in speakerphone mode (if
active. equipped); mUTE/MlC ] * (if equipped) mutes the
--.-
NOTE. microphone during the speakerphone mode;
Outgoing calls and features will still func- g?GF] is used to transfer and conference calls;
tion while telephone is in the DND mode. To and the @OLD]--- key holds calls (the remaining
all incoming features the telephone will IO or 20 keys are assigned flexibly).
appear to be busy.

EKT (identified
This feature allows the attendant or herein as an “S” model) is not a Speaker-
other Message Center to inform a station user phone, as it is not equipped with a micro-
that there is a message waiting. Your station will phone. Paging, however, may be heard via
receive a double ring every 20 minutes. its speaker, and on-hooking dialing is still in
effect. It is equipped with IO keys that may
To cancel Message Waiting be assigned as directory number (DN) pick-
1A) Obtain dial tone. ups or as access keys to any of the station
custom calling features.
2A) Dial the Message Center
Speakerphone
3A) Collect message(s). ys that may be
assigned as directory number (DN) pickups
4A) Hang up.
or as access keys to any of the station cus-
. . . or . . . tom calling features.

1 f3) Obtain dial tone. The expanded 20-key Speakerphone EKT

has an additional IO keys that may be flexi-
33) lP]fl.
Message waiting cancelled. bly assigned as DN pickups or feature
access keys.
36) Hang up.
All EKTs feature modular handset
* NOTE. cords and are connected to the system via 4-
If you go off-hook while your station is being conductor modular line cords.
signalled by the message waiting feature,
you will be connected automatically to the
The dial tone level on the 5“ model
Plessage Center.
EKT is controlled by a sliding volume control
located on the face of the telephone. A 3-position
switch on the bottom of the EKT adjusts ring tone
and voice-announcement volume. On the Speak-
erphone EKTs, the voice and ring tone volume
.I All electronic key
levels are controlled by separate volume controls
telephones (EKT) have been designed to provide located on the rear of the telephone. The .controi
easy access to the wide range of features offered on the right-hand side adjusts speaker volume for
by the Toshiba telephone system. Each is equip- dial tone and voice level; the left-hand side control
ped with a push-button dial pad, speaker, three adjusts ring tone and voice-announcement
or four fixed feature keys (depending on equip- volume.
 IV0 TE:
Several iID ihrnination states are used to indicate the status of a DA!

0.5sec. on, 0.5~sec. off-indicates incoming call.

2.0-sec. on, 0.125-sec. off, 0.125sec. on, 0.125-sec. off-

indicates a DN in use at your EKT.

Steady on-indicates a DN in use at another station.

0.05sec. on, 0.05-sec. off-indicates a call on hold at your EKT.

0.37’5~sec. on, 0.125-sec. off-indicates a call on hold at

another station.

DN idle.

Dial tone must be heard before se-

particular feature. If you have just lifted
the handset (or depressed the I=/ key), you will To call another station:
hear tone. If you are engaged in a conversa- I) CXXain dial tone in one of the following
tion, ever, you must obtain “Recall Dial Tone” ays:
re. During a con- a) Lift the handset-your prune
one is obtained by either selected automatically if it is
ate feature key or follow- ime line is on the bottom key in the
w positioned wertically).
. ..O!-...
key.
. ..OF-...
c) For on-hook

r. 1%is not necessary

(For convenience, handset unless you wish to use it.
I the station’s number.
You will hear the call progress tones.
ang up when the call is completed.
To make an outgoing call:
btain dial tone.
OFF OFF
ial the required trunk access co
Trunk Access Codes:

released.
 You will hear outside dial tone. You will hear recall dial tone.
The DN LED indication goes from l-use to
3) Dial the desired telephone number. l-hold.
dls 3) Dial the desired number.*
To hold a call: 4) When the called party answers, announce
press the ]FIO~] key. the call.
DN LED indication goes from l-use to 5) Hang up to transfer the call.
l-hold.
Connection on hold. *If you hear a busy tone, return to the original
party by depressing the DN key.
2) l-lang up.

To reconnect the call:

Using the Conference ]C??? key, it is
1 A) Lift the handset. a third party to an existing two-
If the on-hold call was on your prime DN party conversation. The added party can be on
key, you will be reconnected immed- either a station or an outside line. It is possible for
iately. any of the three parties to disconnect at anytime,
DN LED indication goes from l-hold to leaving the ~ernai~i~g two parties connected. (The
l-use. system will refuse to connect certain types of
‘I B) Depress the DN key(this is necessaryonlyfor trunk lines.)’
on-hold calls not on the prime DN key). To initiate a conference:
DN LED indication goes from l-hold to -~.
l-use. 11 press the EONA key.
Original connection goes on hold.
I You will hear recall dial tone.
This feature enables you to consult The DN LED indication changes from l-
with either an inside or outside line while you hold use to l-hold.
another call. 2) Dial the desired number.
To consult: 3) Depress the &QyF] key when the new party
~.--~~...
‘I ) Qepress the [CONF] key.
Original connection on hold. The DN LED indication changes from l-
You will hear recall dial tone. hold to l-use.
DN LED indication goes from l-use to A 3-party conference commences.
l-hold. To return to the original connection:
2) Dial the desired number. press the appropriate DN key.
The third connection will be released and
To return to original connection:
the original connection will remain.
press the appropriate DN key. se
DN LED indication goes from j-hold to
l-use. By operating the Privacy Release @?$I
Third party is disconnected. key, if equipped, you can allow another station
user, who shares your DN appearance, to join an
2) Resume conversation. established conversation. ,4 maximum of five con-
ferees (station or trunk), including your own sta-
tion, can be included in the conversation.
To transfer a call:
To release privacy:
I) Request the party to wait.
I) Depress the bRF$ ] key.
21 press the [COtiF] key. The DN LED vvill begin to wink wherever
Original connection goes on hold. it appears.
2) The second station user depresses the To accept the waiting call while hold-
appropriate DN key.
The DN LED will change to l-use rate at
Depress the imi key.
both stations.
The CWT LED lights steadily.
The conference begins.
The DN LED indicates l-hold.
3) Repeat to add other stations. You will be connected to the waiting call.

NOTES. To return to the original call:

1. Anytime you release privacy, you can
Depress the appropriate DN key.
re-engage it immediately by depress-
The CWT LED starts to flash.
ing the DN key.
The DN LED indicates l-use.
2. Any station that is a party to the con-
versation can release the privacy. NOTE.
It is possible to a rnate between the two
caJ1.s i~de~i~ite~ y sejecting either the
A short warning tone from your EKT [mq key or DN key.
speaker (while you are talking with someone)
To disconnect one call and remain
advises you that an incoming call has been
connected to the other call:
parked at your station by the attendant.
‘1) Hang up while connected to the call you
To accept a camp-on call:
wish to terminate.
1) Complete the original call and hang up. The remaining call will appear, in the
Your telephone will ring. hold condition, at the DN key.
DN LED will flash.
press the DN key.
2) Answer the new call. You will be connected to the remaining
call.
NOTE:
Camp-on and Call Waiting are mutually NOTE:
exclusive. Camp-on and Call Waiting are mutually
exclusive.

Two short warning tones from your

EKT speaker and a flashing CWT LED advise you If you attempt to call another station
that your attendant has an outside call waiting. ss a trunk and receive a busy tone, you
You have three choices: can request to be signalled when the desired
station or trunk is idle. You may continue to use
1.) Ignore the call-it will be returned to the your telephone in the usual manner while await-
attendant. ing a callback.
2) Terminate your existing call, and accept the To activate Automatic Callback:
new call.
press the IXb’ key.
3) Hold the existing call, and accept the new You will hear recall dial tone.
call. In this mode, it is possible to alternate The ACB LED lights.
between the two calls until the conversa-
2) Hang up and wait for callback, or dial
tion(s) are terminated.
another call.
To accept the waiting call and termi-
When the desired connection be-
existing call:
comes idle your telephone will signal once, the
Rang up. ACB LED will wink and the DN LED will flash.
The CWT LED will go off, and the new call You must pick up the call within six seconds or
will ring at your E>KTin the usual manner. your recluest will be cancelled.
 To answer Automatic Callback: or access code) enables you to direct all of your
station’s incoming calls to another station.
Lift the handset.
4 If the called party is a trunk, you will hear an To utilize Call Forwarding:
outside dial tone (proceed to dial).
IA) Depress the m-1 key.
RIO E: CFD LED will wink.
If the calf was made using Least Cosi Rout-
2A) Dial the nu*mber to which calls are to be
ing, the called number will be dialed automat-
forwarded.
ically at this point.
-.
If the called party is a station, that station will 3A) Depress the [ CFDI key.
W CFD LED will light steadily.
ring and you will hear the ringback tone.
. ..or (if a / CFm key is not provided)..
d If you hear overflow tone, the station or trunk
you called has been previously called, hang 1 B) Obtain dial tone.
up and wait to be called again.
ZB) Ima.
To cancel Automatic Callback: You will hear recall dial tone.
Qepress the @CB] key. 3B) Dial the number to which calls are to be
ACB LED goes off. forwarded.
Callback is cancelled.
W IH.
You will hear dial tone.
The Call Pick-up Directed feature The number is stored.
key or access code) allows you to answer a Al0 TE.
call which is ringing or on hold at a station other You may continue to place outgoing calls
than your own. from your telephone while Call Forwarding is
in effect.
To use Call Pick-up Directed:
To cancel Call Forwarding:
1) Obtain dial tone.

press the KY@ key or dial a . q l A) Depress the [ra key.

2) The CFD LED will go off.
You will hear recall dial tone.
Call Forwarding is cancelled.
3) Dial the station number that is ringing/on
...or (if a [ CFDT key is not provided)...
hold.
You will be connected to that call. I B) Obtain dial tone and dial /~J~j~j.
Call Forwarding is cancelled.

The Call Pick-up-Group feature cG/

key or access code) allows you to answer a call To answer an incoming call when the
that is ringing at a station within your designated night bell is heard:
group without knowing exactly which station
I) Obtain dial tone.
number is ringing.

To use Call Pick-up Group:

2) Dial q m.
You will be connected to the incoming
1) Obtain dial tone. call.

2) Depress the [-CPg key or dial am. 3) Speak to the caller.

-.
You will be connected to any call tha t is 4) Use Call Transfer to connect the call wit :hi :he
ringing at any station in your group. desired station.

The Cal I Forwarding feature ([ c[D 1key To page:

1) Obtain dial tone. I) You will hear a ringing tone.

2) Dial the access code (see below) for the 2) Leave the handset on-hook.
desired zone.
3) Depress the key of the DN or private line that
Pagin CC@SSCodes is flashing.
(location) The LED will flash at the l-use rate.
ZONE I
ZONE 2 4) Speak at a normal voice level in the direction
ZONE 3 of the telephone.
ZONE 4 5) Depress the [SPKfl key when the call is
ZONE 5 completed.
ALL ZONE
NOTES.
3) Speak slowly and distinctly, and repeat your 1. To change from Speakerphone to hand-
message. set, lift the handset.
2. TQ change fmm handset to Speaker-

0 This feature will automatically connect 5epress and hold the @FW key.
you to a call that has been “parked” for you by the Return the handset to on-hook.
operator. If you are away from your telephone, the ase BKk] key.
operator may park the call and direct you via the
page system to dial an access code.

NO TE.
you may continue to place outgoing calls This programmable (depending upon
from your telephone while Call Forwarding is EKT model) feature allows you to reply handsfree
in effect. on voice page calls and (optionally) on the follow-
ing types of calls:
5.2 To answer a Meet-me Page: q Station-to-station on standard DN keys
0 Calls from the attendant console
I) Obtain dial tone at any telephone,
NOTE:
2) Dial the access code given by the operator. If the Speaker Cut-off (SCO) feature is acti-
You will be connected to the caller vated (SC0 LED on), the Handsfree Answer-
immediately. back feature is disabled and all calls ring your
e (for EKTs so equipped) telephone in the usual way.

To make an outside call with Speaker- To answer a call handsfree:

phone (on-hook dialing): u will hear a single tone.
1). Leave the handset on-hook. DN LED will indicate l-use.
SC0 LED will flash.
2) Depress your DN key or a private line key (if SPKR LED will light.
available).
The LED will flash at the l-use rate. 2) Speak in the direction of the telephone.

3) You will hear dial tone. 3) Lift the handset if you wish to speak privately.

4) Dial the desired telephone number NOTE.

If the aitendant is announcing an outside call
5) Speak at a normal voice level in the direction and you do not pick up the handset, the
of the telephone. handsfree connection will be broken when
the attendant releases and the outside call
6) Depress the /StKR] key when the call is
will ring the DN key in the usual manner.
completed.
To activate Speaker Cut-off:
To receive an incoming call (on Speak-
erphone): Depress the @Ca key.
 SC0 LED will go on. I the SD address code (0 - 9).
Call will now ring at your EKT. The system will dial the stored number.

To release Speaker Cut-off: To store numbers or change address

codes:
Depress the &CO] key.
SC0 LED will go off. NO 7-E.
Handsfree Answerback is active A Speed Dial-Station directory may be
shared by several stations. However, only
one of these stations is designated as the
.I This feature allows you to be con- controller, and only the controller can store or
nected automatically to the speaker of a specific change numbers.
EKT. Leave the handset on-hook.
11
To voice page: 3 press the j%JC] key.
The SDC LED begins winking.
I) Obtain dial tone.

press the appropriate voice page key. 3 igit code (0 - 9).

You will hear one ring tone. 4) Dial the number to be stored (‘I 6 digits
VP LED will flash once. maximum),
3) Wlake announcement. NO E-:
It may be necessary to insert a pause to allow
NO l-E:
lf that person is busy on another DiV or has
for dial tone delay. If so, depress the key q
after the trwnk access code.
SC0 engaged, you will hear ring tone until
answered. lf that DN is busy, you will hear 5) press the [SDC] key.
busy tone. The SDC LED goes off.
Number is stored.

one numbers can

The system automatically stores the
number you dialed. Therefore, if you reach a
To use Speed Dial-System: busy number or no answer, and wish to try again,
simply request the system to redial the number.
I) Obtain dial tone.
To redial the last number:
2) Depress the [~!?l%~]key or dial q m
I) Obtain dial tone.
3) Dial the §DS address code (I 0 - 99).
The system will dial the stored number. press the m] key or dial m q
The system will automatically redial the
To store or change a telephone number.

Notify the attendant (the Speed Dial-System direc-

tory is controlled by the attendant console). The Automatic Dialing 1 ADL~.] key al-
lows you to store and automatically dial any tele-
phone number (up to 16 digits) by depressing a
If your telephone is equipped with single key. The stored number can be a station
ial-Station, you can establish a personal number, access code, or outside number.
directory of up to 10 telephone numbers.
To dial a stored telephone number:
To use Speed Dial-Station:
I) Obtain dial tone.
1) Obtain dial tone.
- .-. press the Bw key.
2) Depress the \ ZQC] or 1 SDU] key. The telephone number will be dialed.
 2.3 To store a telephone number: The OVR LED will flash.
A warning tone is given to the existing
1) Leave the handset on-hook.
connection.
2) press the L/$0 key. 2) A 3-way conference now exists (any one of
The ADL LED will wink. the parties can leave the conference and the
3) Dial the telephone number to be stored (16 other two will remain connected).
digits maximum). NOTE:
NOTE. A short tone will be heard every 15 seconds
It may be necessary to insert a pause to allow by all parties during the override condition.
for dial tone delay. If so, depress the key q
after the trunk access code.
will automatically se-
4) Depress the 1x1 key. lect the least costly route (trunk group) for the call
ADL LED goes off and the telephone that you wish to make. If that route is busy, the
number is stored. next best route will be selected (if permitted by
m3llk-l your class of service).

This feature allows you to signal a spe- To use Least-Cost Routing:

1) Obtain dial tone.

To signal the station: 2) Dial the LCR access code
press the m key. 3) Dial the number you wish to call.
The SIG LED will flash once.
A single tone will be heard via the speaker of a) If a trunk allowed by your Class of Service
the called EKT. is available:
i) Your call will be dialed automatically
over the proper trunk.
This feature allows an outside line to ii) You will hear call progress tones.
appear directly at a key on your telephone, thereby iii) Proceed with conversation when the
bypassing the attendant console. party answers.

To make a call on a private line: NOTE.

As a programmable option you will receive a
I) Depress the q
key. 1 -sec. duration warning tone just prior to the
The PL LED lights. system advancing to the last choice routing.
You will hear outside dial tone.
b) If no trunks are available:
2) Proceed to dial. i) You will hear busy tone.
To receive a call on a private line: ii) Activate the Automatic Callback
feature.
1) The line will ring at your telephone.
The LED will flash.

2) Depress the q key. .‘I Your system automatically records the

of some or all of the calls you make to or
receive from outside the system. Recorded calls
may be assigned account numbers for billing pur-
Executive Override allows you to enter poses ( digits).
an established conversation. The original connec-
tion receives a warning tone prior to you being To record an account number before
conferenced. dialing a call:

To override a busy condition: I) Obtain dial tone.

I) Depress the md key. 2) Depress the mi key or dial q m

3) Dial the account number on the dial pad 3B) Hang up.
L..-..- digits). To cancel
DND:
When the number is completed, you will
---.
hear dial tone again. l/4) Depress the pND 1 key.
DND LED goes off.
4) Dial the call in the usual manner.
Do Not Disturb feature is no longer active.
To record an account number during a
. .. or . . .
call (incoming or outgoing without a [?Ikq key)-
At any time before disconnect... 9 B) Obtain dial tone.

I) Ask your party to wait. 2B) Dial mp[/??j.

3 press the [CON7 key.

Connection on hold. Do Not Disturb feature is no longer active.
You will hear recall dial tone.
A’0 TE.
3) DialmB. Outgoing calls and features will stiJl function
whine telephone is in the mode. To aI/
incoming calls the telephone will appear to
4) Dial the account number ( digits). be busy.
When the number is completed, you will
hear recall dial tone again.

5) Depress the appropriate DN key. This feature allows the attendant or

ssage Center to inform a station user that
6) Resume conversation. there is a message waiting. Your station will show
the Message Waiting LED on or will receive a
To record an account number during a double ring every 20 minutes.
I (incoming or outgoing on an EKT with a /-??I
key)-At any time before disconnect... To obtain messages and cancel Mes-
aiting at the station:
‘l ) Ask your party to wait.
I) Obtain dial tone.
21 press the 1-1 key.
Connection on hold. 24 press the m key.
DN LED indicates l-hold. Automatically rings the Message Center.
CRG LED illuminates.
.. . or . ..
3) I the account number ( digits).
2B) Dial Message Center number.
When number is completed, the call is Rings the Message Center.
reconnected automatically.
3) Collect message(s).
4) Resume conversation.
m 4) Hang up.

To cancel Message Waiting at the

This feature allows a station to give a station:
busy indication whenever the user does not wish
to be disturbed. 14 hile the EKT is idle depress the imi key.
MSG LED goes off.
To activate DND: Message waiting is cancelled.
I A) Depress the [DNq key. .. . or . . .
DND LED illuminates.
1 B) Obtain dial tone.
...or...

1 B) Obtain dial tone. Message waiting cancelled.

3B) Hang up.

 Al0 TE. operations of the m key (located on the face of
If you go off-hook while your station is being the console).
signalled by the IViessage Waiting feature,
you will be connected automatically to the
Message Center. .‘I The Incoming Call Identification (ICI)
essa enter atio
display is a backlighted panel that indicates the
type of call that is currently connected to a console
The following applies only if your EKT is Loop jTk-1 key. Twelve different displays are
designated as the Message Center. possible:

.3 To leave a message waiting signal: TIE: Tie trunk

co: CO trunk
I) Dial the appropriate station number. WAT: WATS trunk
2) If busy or no answer, depress [%!] key. FX: Foreign exchange trunk
MSG LED on (both stations). OPR: Dial “0” call
The Message Center MSG LED goes off RCL: Recall
when the connection is broken. SER: Serial call
I-ILD: l-leld call recall
.3 To cancel message waiting by mes- TIM: Timed reminder (Camp-on, RNA,
sage center: etc)
LNI: DID call to listed directory number
IA) Dial the appropriate station number. I
2A) Depress m?$ key. LN2: DID call to listed directory number
MSG LED goes off (on both stations). 2
INT: Intercept
. . . or
rce her
1 B) Dial [‘?%jmEj.
All Message Waiting conditions are clear. .I The Source (SRC) display is a 3-char-
7-segment LED display that gives the at-
tendint the number of the calling station or trunk.

Your attendant con- .I Class of Service (COS) is displayed as a

been de e easy access to acter, 7-segment LED display, giving the
the wide range of features offered by your Toshiba attendant the Class of Service of the calling station
telephone system. The console is equipped with a or trunk.
Display Panel, Keyboard, Volume Control, and
either a handset or headset. Adetailed description
of the console features and operations is found in The Destination (DEST) display is a 3-
the following text. -segment LED display showing the
.Q SC&? station or trunk number called by the attendant.

.I The console display panel includes a

Busy Lamp Field and the following displays: ln-
.I The Status (STATUS) display is a back-
coming Call Identification, Calling Source Num-
lighted panel which indicates the status of the
ber, Class of Service, Call Destination Number,
called station or trunk. Eight different displays are
and Call Destination Status.
possible:
.o =Y
RNG: Called station is ringing.
.I The Busy Lamp Field (BLF) displays BSY: Called station is busy.
100 2-digit numbers (00 - 99), and is equipped DND: Called station is in Do Not Disturb
with a “hundreds group” identifier that shows mode.
which group is currently being displayed. The dis- FWD: Called station is forwarded to the
play alternates between groups in response to number now displayed as DEST.
 RST: Attempted connection is not al- The upper horizontal row of keys, with
lowed. tion of the m/ key, are all equipped
HNT: Called station was busy and hunt- with LEDs and (reading from left to right) are
ing has occured to the number labeled:
now displayed as DEST.
VCT: Called number does not exist or is NITE: Activates the fixed, flexible and
disabled. universal night answering
TLK: Attendant is in a voice connection features.
with the called party. POS BSY: Used to “busy out” one position of
a 2-console system.
SPARE: Reserved for future use.
The console keyboard design includes l3uzz: Allows the attendant to select
a display window, two horizontal rows of ‘i 0 keys whether or not a signal tone will
each, a 12-key dial pad, and a vertical row of four be heard during a Call Waiting
keys. condition.
CONF: Activates an attendant confer-
The faceplate display window houses ence (up to 6 parties, including
ing displays: the attendant console).
OVERFLOW: Transfers waiting calls to an alter-
4 Trunk Group Busy (TGB) provides IO num-
nate answering point.
bered LEDs to indicate the status of trunk
VER/Cl-lG: Overrides a busy station, trunk or
groups 0 - 9.
DND condition. It is also used to
b) ALARM LEDsfor MAJOR, MINOR and MDR: record an account number when
extending a call.
MAJOR: Alarm occurs when the system is EXCL DEST: Excludes destination party from a
not functional and is accompan- 3-way conversation.
ied by an emergency transfer. EXCL SRC: Excludes the source party from a
MINOR: Alarm indicates that either the 3-way conversation.
system clock is not set or that l-lOLD: l-lolds calls connected to Loop
there is a ringing power failure. keys.
MDR: Alarm indicates a problem with
external SMDR equipment. The dial pad is of the standard l2-key
alpha-numeric configuration .and is used to dial
d Call Waiting (CW) LED indicates that an both internal and outgoing calls from the console.
unanswered call is waiting for the attendant.
The four keys in the vertical row on the
The lower horizontal row of keys are all right of the console are not equipped with LEDs,
equipped with LEDs and (reading from left to right) and are labeled (from top to bottom):
are labeled:
DIS TOD: Displays the time and date from
MSG: Activates Message Waiting fea- the system clock. While being
ture if console is designated as displayed the clock can be cor-
the Message Center. rected.
SER CALL: Activates Serial Call feature. BLF: Used to alternate between the
SP DIAL: Activates the Speed Dial-System “hundreds groups” displayed on
feature. the console.
JOIN: Connects two parties which have RLS SRC: Disconnects source party from a
reached the attendant on two dif- Loop key.
ferent j-LPK] keys. RLS DEST: Disconnects the destination party
PAGE: Provides the attendant with a di- from a Loop key.
rect, push-to-talk access to one
paging zone or All Page.
LPK 1 - 4: The four Loop Keys are used for
, answering and originating calls. A volume control for the console tone
RLS: Releases the console from any signal is located on the rear of the console below
type of connection. the Busy Lamp Field housing.
 for the called party to answer before
depressing the [ RtSikey,
Your console may be used with either
2. If the call remains unanswered after
a handset or headset (whichever is the most
( ) seconds, the call will be re-
comfortable and convenient for you to use),
twrned to yowr console as a Timed Recall.
which may be plugged in on either side of the
unit. Also, the handset cradle may be mounted To extend a call to a busy directory
on either side of the console. number (with Camp-on/Call Waiting):
erlc es 1) Dial the directory number.
The EXCL SRC LED lights steadily when
Two switches are located on the
the first digit is dialed.
underside of the console. These switches are for
The voice path to caller is broken.
emergency use only and are labeled as follows:
DEST is displayed as digits are dialed.
EMT: The Emergency Transfer switch STATUS displays BSY.
allows the attendant to set the a) If you hear nothing (Camp-on), go to
EMT circuits manually in the step 2.
event of a system malfunction. b) If you hear ring tone(Call Waiting), go to
INT: The Initialize switch is used to step 4A.
reset the system logic in the c) If you hear busy tone, go to step 3B (it
event of a system malfunction. indicates that Camp-on/Call Waiting is
not possible for one of the following
reasons:
i) Another call is previously in Camp-
on/Call Waiting (only one is allowed
er an incoming call:
per station).
1) You will hear an incoming call signal. ii) Camp-on/Call Waiting is not per-
ICI lights and SRC is displayed. mitted due to system restrictions
The LPK LED flashes. (called station is dialing or in a con-
ference call).
press the appropriate b] key.
The LPK LED lights and signalling stops. press the @XCt DEa key.
The EXCL DEST LED lights.
3) You are connected to the call. The EXCL SRC LED goes off.
Make an appropriate response. You have a voice connection with the
To extend a call to an idle directory caller.
3A) If the caller wishes to wait:
1) Dial the directory number. press the m key.
.
The EXCL SRC LED lights steadily when The LPK LED and all displays go off.
the first digit is dialed. The RLS LED lights.
The voice path to caller is broken. Console becomes idle.
DEST is displayed as digits are dialed.
STATUS displays RNG. NOTE.
You will hear ring tone. If the call remains wnanswered for
( ) seconds? the call willbe retwrned
press the 1 -RtS 1key.
to yowr console as a Timed Recall.
The LPK LED and all displays go off.
The RLS LED lights. 35) If the caller does not wish to wait or if no
Console becomes idle. Camp-on is allowed:
Caller hears ring tone.
4B) Depress the FDET]
-~~. key.
NOTES. Called party is released from console.
1. If you wish to anncounce the call, wait DEST display is cleared.
 Another DN may be dialed, if requested. press the appropriate jLPK\ key.
The LPK LED lights steadily.
press the m key.
The EXCL SRC LED lights.
The LPK LED and all displays go off.
Signal stops.
The RLS LED lights.
STATUS displays TLK.
Console becomes idle.
You have a voice connection with the
DEST party.
SRC party is separated from the con-
If an extended call remains unans- versation.
wered for ( ) seconds, the call will be
returned to your console. 3) Depress the WkST] key.
The DEST party (recalling party) is dis-
u will hear an incoming call signal. connected.
The ICI lights (TIM). You have voice connection with the
SRC and DEST are displayed. SRC party.
The LPK LED flashes.
STATUS is displayed: 4) Process the call in the same manner as a
RNG for ring-no answer. newly answerad call.
BSY for Camp-on, Call Waiting.

2) Depress the appropriate \eK] key.

To call a directory number:
The LPK LED lights and signalling stops.
11 Depress an idle [LPK] key.
3) u are connected to the call.
The RLS LED goes off.
Make an appropriate response. The LPK LED lights.
4A) If the calling party (SRC) wishes to wait:
2) Dial the directory number.
54 press the m key. DEST is displayed as the digits are
The LPK LED and all displays go off. dialed.
The RLS LED lights.
3A) If the directory number is busy: ’
Console becomes idle.
STATUS displays BSY.
4B) If the calling party (SRC) does not wish to You will hear busy tone.
wait:
.- .- 3B) If the directory number is idle:
press the [RLS DEST[ key. STATUS displays RNG.
The DEST and STATUS displays go off. You will hear ring tone.
Called station is released. Party answers, STATUS changes to
Another DN may be dialed, if requested. TLK.
You have a voice connection with called
6B) Depress the m key.
party.
The LPK LED and all displays go off.
The RLS LED lights. 4) Depress the hRg key to terminate the call.
Console becomes idle. The LPK LED and all displays go off.
The RLS LED lights.
Console becomes idle.
A station user, while talking to an-
other party, may recall the console for the pur- To call an outside number:
pose of asking the attendant to take a message
1) Depress an idle [LPK] key.
or to “park” the call on a busy station.
The RLS LED goes off.
u will hear an incoming call signal. The LPK LED lights.
ICI lights (RCL).
SRC, COS, DEST are displayed. 2) Dial the desired trunk access code.
The LPK LED flashes. DEST displays trunk number.
 STATUS displays TLK. calling (SRC) party.
You will hear trunk dial tone.
3) Dial the desired trunk access code.
3) Dial the desired number. The EXCL SRC LED lights steadily.
The outgoing trunk number is displayed
4A) If the call is to be transferred to a directory as DEST.
number: STATUS displays TLK.
a) Depress the FA key. The voice connection with the calling
b) Proceed as in Paragraph or party is broken.
You will hear trunk dial tone.
4B) press the m key to terminate the call.
press the m key to terminate the call.
The LPK LED and all displays go off.
The RLS LED lights.
The RLS LED lights.
The calling (SRC) station may dial on the
Console becomes idle.
selected trunk

In some cases you may wish to ho1

call on an EF.g key while you gather more A call from outside the system that
information or page someone. een answered at your console can be con-
nected to an outgoing line.
To hold a call:
To make a trunk-to-trunk call:
Depress the m] key.
LPK LED winks. ‘l ) Dial the desired trunk access code.
RLS LED lights. The EXCL SRC LED lights.
All displays go off. Outgoing trunk number is displayed as
Calling/called party on hold will hear fVlOl-f, DEST.
if equipped. STATUS displays TLK.
You are free to originate or answer calls on You will hear trunk dial tone.
other m keys.
2) Dial the directory number.
To reconnect:
press the m key.
press the appropriate m key. RLS LED lights.
The LPK LED lights. All displays go off.
The RLS LED goes off. The LPK LED goes off or winks (LPK on
ICI, SRC, COS, DEST, STATUS displays go hold), depending on the type of trunk
involved in the connection.
v:u have a voice connection with the SRC
(DEST) party. PI0 TE:
Some types of trunk lines give no signal
when the distant party disconnects, and
this makes awtomatic release of a trwnk-to-
Requests may be received from sta- trwnk connection impossible. If yow attempt
tions or TIE line users for dialing access to to establish a connection between two swch
numbers or trunks from which they are trwnks, the connection wiilbe made bwt the
restricted. call will remain on the LPK in a “hold” con-
dition. Yaw will be reqwired to enter the call
1) u will hear an incoming call signal. periodically to verify its statws and, wlti-
ICI lights (OPR). mately, to disconnect it.
SRC, COS are displayed.
The LPK LED flashes. To re-enter a trunk-to-trunk call:

press the appropriate m key. press the m key.

The LPK LED lights steadily. The LPK LED lights steadily.
Signal stops. ICI, SRC, DEST, STATUS displays go on.
You have a voice connection with the A 3-way conversation is established.
2A) If the conversation is still in progress: call.

34 Depress the m key. To talk to the calling party privately:

The RLS LED lights.
Depress the im](Exclude Destination) key.
All displays go off.
The EXCL DEST LED lights.
The LPK LED winks (LPK on hold).
ay talk to the cat&-r rty privately, the
2B) If the call has been completed: party cannot hear

press the wsl key. To form a 3-way conversation from

DEST is disconnected. either an EXCL SRC or EXCEL DEST condition:
DEST, STATUS displays go off.
press the appropriate 1-1 key.
4.B) Depress the w key to terminate the call. The EXCL SRC or EXCL DEST LED will go off.
The LPK LED and all displays go off. You and the other two parties may converse
The RLS LED lights. freely.
Console becomes idle.
o release a call while in any of th
itions ~c~~~~c~i~~ the calling an
called parties):
For an incoming call that requests two
stations: press the m key.
The LPK LED and all displays go off.
1) Depress the m] key. The RLS LED lights.
SRC and DEST parties and connected.
2) Dial the first station number and extend the
call using standard procedures.

When the call is completed and the The Verify feature enables you to ascer-
eon user hangs up, the call will be returned to tain the status of an station or trunk to determine if
your console with an ICI display of SER. Repeat a problem exists or to interrupt a call in an emer-
above steps if a third station is required, otherwise gency situation.
process as a standard call.
To verify station status:

press an idle 1x1 key.

Use of the Exclusion ( and The LPK LED lights.
-1) keys enables you t way
connection and allows you to converse privately 2) Depress the r-1 key.
with either the “source” or “destination” party. The VER/CHG LED lights.
When you are involved in a 3-way connection it is
3) Dial the station number.
possible to:
DEST displays the station number.
1) Talk privately with the party (DEST).
44) If the station is busy:
2) Talk privately with the o party (SRC). A 2-second warning tone is injected into
the conversation on the called station.
3) Form a 3-way voice connection consisting of A 3-way conversation is established at
yourself, and both the calling and called the end of the warning tone.
parties. A X-second warning tone is repeated
To talk to the called party privately: every 15 seconds for the duration of the
3-way connection.
Exclude Source) key.
NO TE:
party privately, the At this point it is possible to release either
party cannot hear you. pat-ty from the conversation by depressing
either the 1-1 or [RLSSRCjkey.
IV0 TE:
The fxc/ude .Sowce condition activates auto- 54 Depress the m key.
matically vvhen you start dialing to extend a VER/Cj-iG & LPK LEDs, all displays go off.
 NO TE.
Console is idle. The PAGE LED lights steadily when the page
Existing conversation continues. zone (or Al! Page) is being used by you or a
station user. Your I-!%?%] key gives yaw
preemption capability. Any page in progress
The station rings. when yaw operate the mj key willbe cwt
The VER/CHG LED goes off. off and yaw wiflbe connected. It is important,
STATUS displays RNG. therefore, to observe the LED status when
yaw cannot hear that paging is in progress.

To page from an idle console:

To verify a trunk status:

press an idle im-1 key.

The LPK LED fights.
The RLS LED goes off.
2) Depress the -1 key. The idle LPK LED lights.
The VER/CHG LED lights. Page access code is displayed as DEST.

3) Dial the trunk access code followed by the

2) Make your announcement.
DEST displays the trunk co
lease the 1-1 key.
number.
PAGE and LPK LEDs go off.
he trunk is busy:
A 2-second warning tone is injected into DEST, STATUS go off.
the conversation.
A 3-way conversation is established at To page from an active 1x1 key:
the end of the warning tone.
I) Depress the /m\ key.
A X-second warning tone is repeated
The PAGE LED lights.
every 15 seconds for the duration of the
The EXCL SRC LED lights.
3-way connection.
2) IVlake your announcement.
NQTE:
At this point it is possible to retease either 3) Release the [IX@/ key.
party from the conversation by depressing PAGE LED goes off.
either the 1-1 or 1-1 key. The EXCL SRC LED goes off.
The LPK LED winks.
The RLS LED lights.
LPK LEDs, all displays
The paging assignments in your sys-
tem are:
Console is idle.
Existing conversation continues.

4B) If the trunk is idle: (location)

The trunk is seized. ZONE I
The VER/WG LED goes dark. ZONE 2
STATUS displays TLK. ZONE 3 ~~ ~~
You will hear trunk dial tone. ZONE 4
5B) Proceed as with a usual call. ZONE 5
LL ZONE
I=] key -
Your console provides for direct push-
to-talk access to one paging zone (or All Page) via
the [%$?%I key. Additional paging zones (if equip- This feature will allow you to “park” a
ped) can be accessed by depressing an idle 1x1 call while you page the called party. The called
key and dialing the proper access code. party can then pick up the call automatically by
dialing the access code from any station in the wink.
system. Console and new party are conferenced
with existing connection(s).
To park a call: COS displays number of conferees, not
including the console.
I) Dial the meet-me page access code .
5) Repeat steps 2 through 4 to add another
2) Depress the m key.
party.
3) Using the PAGE system, instruct the called
party to dial access code . To release from conference:

Depress the m key.

The CONF LED indication changes to steady.
You can set up a conference call for as The LPK LED goes off.
five people (including a maximum of two The RLS LED lights.
trunk lines) plus yourself, at the request of either a Console is idle.
station user or an outside caller. The starting point Conference continues.
for a conference can be any of the following
To recall the console by a conferee (sta-
conditions:
1:
4 Console has answered an incoming call from
a station or trunk and that party is to be the I) Station user flashes hookswitch, or depres-
first member of the conference. the m\ key on an EKT.
Console signals.
b) Console dials the first conference member on The LPK and CONF LEDs flash.
an 1x1 key in the usual manner.
press the appropriate 1x1 key.
4 Due to an Attendant Recall, the console has a Signal stops.
3-way connection on an m key. The atten- The LPK and CONF LED indications
dant must establish a 3-way voice connec- change to steady.
tion through a second operation of the m] Console and recalling party have a voice
key prior to proceeding to step I. connection.
Remaining conferees continue to con-
To conference:
ference.
press the [ml key. 3) Proceed from step 4, Paragraph
The CONF LED winks.
The voice connection between the con- To reenter the conference:
sole and existing connection(s) con-
tinues. You can reenter the existing confer-
COS displays number of conferees. equired. ,4 warning tone will be inserted
into the conference before you are connected.
2) Dial the next conference member.
- The console voice connection is split press an idle ITI key.
when the first digit is dialed, but the voice The RLS LED goes off.
connection between any existing confer- The LPK LED lights.
ence members continues.
The CONF LED indication changes to 2) Proceed from step 1, Paragraph
steady.
The dialed number appears in DEST.
STATUS displays RNG. When your console becomes very
You will hear ringing tone. usy, rt IS possible to divert calls that have been
waiting unanswered for over ( ) seconds
3) Called party answers.
Console has a voice connection with the
to an alternate answering point. Substituting q
for the trunk access code and equipment number,
called party.
use the Nig ing connection instructions
press the 1-1 key. (Paragraph to designate the alternate
The CONF LED indication changes to answering point.
 To engage overflow: ing calls from being assigned to your console.
Calls will be diverted to the second console in the
Depress the [ml key. system.
The OWL LED lights.
Overflow is engaged. NO 7-E.
If your system is equipped with just one con-
To disengage overflow: sole, the -1 key will have the same
Depress the DVxl key. effect as the imF\ key.
The OWL LED lights. To use Position
Overflow is disengaged.
Depress the -1 key.
If only one console is in the system (or the
The mi key allows you to connect other console is in POS BSY), the POS BSY and
nother LPK line. In a typical NITE LEDs light (system is in Night Service).
operation; a call has returned to your console If the other console is active in the system,
red on LPK ##I, and the called party must POS BSY LED lights.

Depress the /m] key. press the 1-1 key.

The POS BSY LED goes off.
The NITE LED goes off (if it was on).
The RLS LED lights. Your console is now active.
Page -the c ww
lled party calls attendant. All LPK keys must be idle before acti-
The LED for LPK ##2 flashes. vating this feature; use single or multiple console
The RLS LED goes off. instructions (depending upon your system’s
ICI, STATUS, COS are displayed. design).
Depress ITI key #2 to answer the call. Single console:
The LED for LPK #Z lights.
I) To activate Night Service:
Inform party #2 of the call on LPK #I.
a) Depress either the /m/ or -1
press the mj key.
ICI, STATUS, COS displays go off. The NITE and POS
LPK #2 goes on hold. All existing Night Service selections
are activated.
press m/ key #I. The RLS LED goes off.
The LED for LPK #2 goes off.
The LED indication for LPK #I changes plug the handset/headset
from wink to steady. Console keyboard is removed from
ICI, SRC, COS LEDs light and identify the service.
original call on LPK #I.
DEST displays DN from LPK #2. 2) To cancel Night Service:
STATUS displays TLK. Plug in the handset/headset.
A 3way conversation is established. Console keyboard is activated.
The NITE and POS BSY LEDs go off.
Depress the m key.
The RLS LED lights.
The LPK #I LED and all displays go off.
System is in Day Service.
The RLS LED lights.
The two parties remain connected. Multiple Consoles:
I ) To activate Night Service:
The 1-1 key allows you to make a) Depress either the /ml or imj
your console *‘busy,” preventing additional incom- key.
 i) If the other console is still active: I the directory number (DN).
POS BSY LED lights. Dial tone stops after the first digit is
Your console is removed from dialed.
service. DN is displayed as DEST.
ii) If the other console is already in POS The LPK LED lights.
BSY: You vvill hear dial tone.
NITE and POS BSY LEDs light.
System is in Night Service, all 5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 to make additional
existing Night Service selections assignments.
are activated. press the [ RL5] key.
plug the handset/headset. The RLS LED lights.
Console keyboard is removed from The NITE and LPK LEDs go off.
service. Al0 TE.
2) To cancel Night Service: If a non-existent DAl is dialed* you will hear
th& overflow tone. Depress the [<tS DEST] key
Plug in the handset/headset. and redial.
Console keyboard is activated.
The NITE and POS BSY LEDs go off. Universal Night Answer
The RLS LED lights. press an idle [ LPK ] key.
System is in Day Service. The LPK LED lights.
The RLS LED goes off.

Night connection assignments are press the IkITE ] key.

stored in system memory. Set-up is required on/y The NITE LED flashes.
upon initial installation or when changes are You will hear dial tone.
required Flexible night answering allows any 3) Dial the trunk access code followed by its
number of trunks to be assigned to the same sta- uipment number.
tion. Any trunks not assigned a night Dial tone stops when the first digit is
cause the Universal Night Answer (UN dialed.
be activated. The first two digits are displayed as DEST,
but shift to SRC when the number is
Flexible Night Answer:
completed.
I) Depress an idle 1 LPK 1 key. The LPK LED goes off and dial tone
The LPK LED lights. returns when the number is completed.
The RLS LED goes off.
IV0 TE.
press the [v!lTj key. If a non-existent access code or trunk num-
The NITE LED flashes. ber is dialed, you will hear the overflow tone.
You will hear dial tone. Depress the [RLS SRC 1 key and redial.

3) Dial the trunk access code followed by its 4) Depress the [ RLS] key.
equipment number. The RLS LED lights.
Dial tone stops when the first digit is The NITE and LPK LEDs go off.
dialed. IV0 TE.
The first two digits are displayed as DEST, l?epeat above steps to make additional
but shift to SRC when the number is assignments.
completed.
The LPK LED goes off and dial tone St@ erwices*
returns when the number is completed.
This feature allows a user outside of
IV0 TE. your system to access the system services via an
If a non-existent access code or trunk mm- exhange network connection. The user dials a
ber is dialed, you will hear the overflow tone. preselected exchange number to connect to your
Depress the LRLS SRC] key and redial. system and then dials a 3-digit authorization code.

*Future feature.
The user may then make a call just as it is done To make a call with Speed Dial-System:
from inside the system normally.
press an idle 1 LPU key.
9.2 The authorization code used by the The LPK LED lights.
e user is controlled by the Attendant Con- The RLS LED goes off.
sole and may be changed anytime.
2) Depress the &m key.
3 The trunk(s) used for this service (and,
re, the exchange number dialed by the out- 3) Dial the 2-digit address code for the tele-
side user) may be permanently fixed or may be phone number you wish to call.
assigned by your console each time it is needed (it The system will dial the number for you.
is a programmable option). In addition, the trunks
may be arranged to operate in the Remote Access
mode in both Day and Nite Service or Nite Service To store a number:
only.
I) Depress the [%%q key (&I not depress an
To assign or change the authorization pq key).
The SP DIAL LED flashes.
I) Depress an idle [-LPK ] key. 2) Dial:
The LPK LED lights. a) The 2-digit address code (‘I 0 - 99) you
The RLS LED goes off. wish to associate with the telephone
number.
2) Dial the feature access code
b) The trunk access code.
3) Dial the authorization code c) The q key (this inserts a 3-second pause
to allow time for trunk dial tone to appear).
41 press the w key. d) The telephone number.
The RLS LED lights.
The LPK LED goes off. 3) Depress the bp--Dm key again.
Console becomes idle. The SP DIAL LED goes off.
The code and telephone number are
To select trunk(s) to be used with stored.
ccess to system in both Day and Nite
service:
Process as in Night Answer Connec- Your console allows you to control
tions using the number as the station access to any trunk group for the purpose of allo-
number. All trunks assigned to this number will cating special facilities. When you have taken con-
function in the Remote Access to System mode trol of a trunk group, a station user trying to access
during both Day and Nite Service. that group will be routed to your console (ICI dis-
plays OPR). (In some systems a few executive
To select trunk(s) to be used with
stations will be allowed to override your control.)
ccess to system in Nite service only:
The caller’s name should be listed to be called
Process as in Night Answer Connec- when a trunk is available.
tions using the number as the station
To take control of a trunk group:
number. All trunks assigned to this number will
function in the Remote Access to System mode 1) Depress an idle r?KJ key.
during Nite Service only. The LPK LED lights.
The RLS LED goes off.
2) Dial mF]F], followed by the trunk access
Speeddialing allows you andothersta- code.
tion users to use a 2-digit code in place of a full The TGB (trunk group busy) LED lights.
telephone number when making calls. The Speed Trunk control is in effect.
Dial-System list of telephone numbers must be
stored via the attendant console, but, once stored, 3) Depress the m key.
all numbers are accessible to all stations. A maxi- The RLS LED lights.
mum of 90 telephone numbers may be stored. The LPK LED and all displays go off.
 If a station user calls a controlled trunk:

1) User dials the access code. If your system is equipped with more
Console signals. than one console serving the same customer, it is
The LPK LED flashes. possible for the consoles to call each other and to
ICI lights and SRC and COS are displayed. transfer calls from one to the other.

2) Depress the appropriate m-1 key. To call console-to-console:

The LPK LED lights.
an idle m&T/ key on the c
A voice connection is established with
caller.
PK LED lights.
NO TE. e RLS LED goes off.
lfa trunk is available, proceed as in ,*Through
2) Dialj77jm on console#l (ormm onconsole
Dialing,‘. If no trunk is available, take the
cat/et--s name and station for a ca//back and
DEST displays 02 (01).
then release.
STATUS displays RNG.
To pass a trunk to a station: You wilf hear ring tone.

I) Depress an idle m] key. nswers.

The LPK LED lights. changes to TLK.
The RLS LED goes off. You have a voice connection between
consoles.
I the station number.
DEST displays station number. 4) Depress the w key.
STATUS displays RNG. The RLS LED lights.
The LPK 81 EXCL SRC LEDs and all dis-
tion answers. plays go off.
STATUS changes to TLK.
To transfer a call console-to-console:
4) Dial the trunk access code.
SRC displays station number. IV0 TE.
CQS displays station COS. Console #2 can be interchanged freely with
DEST displays trunk access code and console # 7 in the following instructions.
number.
EXCL SRC lights. I) Console #I answers an incoming call (start-
You will hear trunk dial tone.

5) Depress the m key. ICI and SRC displays on.

The RLS LED lights.
The LPK & EXCL SRC LE 2) Console #I dials n . q
plays go off. DEST displays 02.
Station is free to dial on trunk. STATUS displays RNG.
EXCL and SRC LEDs light.
To release trunk control (TGB LED is
3) Console #2 answers.
STATUS changes to TLK on console #I.
1) press an idle rmj key. A voice connection is established be-
The LPK LED lights. tween consoles.
The RLS LED goes off.
To return to start condition:
2) Dial q @m, followed by the trunk access
press the [Em] key.
The TGB (trunk group busy) LED goes off. Call returns to console #I.
Trunk control is released.
To transfer:
press the m key.
The RLS LED lights. press the w key.
The LPK LED goes off. The RLS LED lights.

*Future feature.
 3) Depress the I=] key.
The MSG LED goes off (if it was on).
.53. Your system automatically records the The Message Waiting condition is
ails of some or all of the calls you make to or cleared at called station.
receive from outside the system. Recorded calls
may be assigned account numbers for billing pur- To cancel a!! Message Waiting signals:
poses ( digits).
press an idle 1 LPKT key.
Perform the following before extending The RLS LED goes off.
The LPK LED lights.
.53.3 To record an account number: 2) I the “all clear” access code
I) Start from a standard voice connection. All Message Waiting conditions in the
The LPK LED is on. system are cancelled.
ICI and SRC displays are on. press the m key.
2) Depress the PER/m key.
Connection goes on hold.
The VER/CHG LED lights.
3) Dial account number on the dial pad
t digits).
Your telephone system has an internal
en number is complete:
clock that must be set to the correct date and time
VER/Cl+G LED goes off.
in order for features such as Traffic Measurement
b) The talking connection is reestablished.
and Station Message Detail Recording to be
4) Process the call in the usual manner. effective.

essa To display date:

If your console is designated as the Depress the 1-1 key.
Message Center, you indicate to the called station The date is then displayed:
that a message is waiting
SRC cos DEST
To leave a message waiting signal: Month W Year
1) Process the call in the usual manner. To set date: ~
2) If busy or no answer: Enter the &digit date (via the dial pad) in the fol-
lowing format:
3A) Depress the mj key.
MMDDYY
MSG LED lights.
MW indication is set. ple: For January I, 1983, enter 010183.
The new date will appear in the display.
3t3) Depress the [R-j key.
DEST & STATUS displays go off. To display time:

4) Proceed as with a standard call. Depress the mml key.

The date is then displayed:
To cancel Message Waiting:
SRC cos DEST
I) Depress an idle [m] key. t-4ow-s Minutes Seconds
The RLS LED goes off.
The LPK LED lights. To set time:

2) Dial the station’s directory number. Enter the S-digit time (via the dial pad) in the
DEST is displayed as the digits are dialed. following format:
MSG LED shows status of the MW LED of IiHMMSS
the called station (i.e., if Message Waiting For example: For 930 AM, enter 093000.
is active on that station, the LED will be
on). *he new time will appear in the display.
 NO TE. To initialize the system:
The time is displayed and entered in the 24-
how **military,’ form (for any hour after 12 ‘l) Depress the 1
noon, add 12). The MAJ LED lights momentarily.
e.g. 9:30 AM is 093000 The RLS LED goes off.
9:30 PM is 2 13000 NITE & POS BSY LEDs light after MAJ
LED goes off.
To start the clock and clear the display: MIN LED lights.

Depress the mSem/ key a third time. 2) Depress the mj key.

Display clears System switches to operation.

31 t the system time and date.

MiN LED goes off.
It is possible.for the Attendant Console
o cancel all Call Forwarding arrangements set up 4) Proceed with usual system operations.
by station users.
E ersy Transfer
To cancel all call forwarding:
If the system goes completely out of
press and idle nw] key. and the MAJOR ALARM lamp is not on,
The RLS LED goes off. the Emergency Transfer switch (located on the
The LPK LED lights. underside of the console on the side nearest the
dial pad) can be used to manually set the system
I the call forwarding cancel code into Emergency Transfer operation. Operating the
All CFD arrangements are cancelled. switch will disconnect all existing calls and con-
nect the designated stations directly to the outside
3) Depress the m key.
The LPK LED goes off. lines.
The RLS LED lights. To operate the Emergency Transfer:
Console becomes idle,
Depress the r%q button:
S-t@ e The MAJOR ALARM LED lights.
The Initialize (INT) switch located on To restore normal operation:
the underside of the console is used to reset sys-
tem logic in the event of a system malfunction. Depress the /Fm] button:
This switch should be used prior to resorting to the The MAJOR ALARM LED goes off.
Emergency Transfer switch.
 TABLE of CONTENTS. .............................................. i
GENERAL ........................................................ ‘I
FAULT CLASSIFICATION ........................................... ‘I
FAULT CLEARING PROCEDURES .................................... 1
DEFECTIVE APPARATUS RETURNS ..................................
FAULT IDENTIFICATION AND ELIMINATION PROCEDUR *~tii~.~~..i~ iii
TABLE A-EKT STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USI
TABLE B-EKT STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING OHMETER ... z
TABLE C-STT STATION CABLE CONTINUITY CHECK USING OHMETER ... 3
FLOW CHARTS
CHART NO. l-FAULT CLASSIFICATION ...........................
CHART NO. 2-LOADING FAULTS .................................
CHART NO. 3-POWER FAULTS ................................... -l-l
CHART NO. 4-RINGING POWER FAULT ............................ 13
CHART NO. 5-TIME SWITCH CLOCK FAULT. ....................... 14
CHART NO. 6-DPMU FAULTS .................................... 15
CHART NO. 7-DRCU FAULTS .................................... 16
CHART NO. 8-DCOU/DEMU FAULTS 17
CHART NO. 9-DEKU/DSTU FAULTS. ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
CHART NO. IO-SMDR,TTY OR MODEM FAULTS ....................
CHART NO. II-STATION FAULTS. ................................
CHART NO. 12-lNlT/LOAD KEY FAULTS ........................... 22
CHART NO. l3-MAJOR ALARM FAULTS ........................... 23
CHART NO. l4-CO/TIE TRUNK FAULTS ...................... 2
CHART NO. 15-ATTENDANT CONSOLE FAULTS ............... ::::: 25
CHART NO. l6-COMMON STATION FEATURE FAULTS ............... 26
CHART NO. 17-SPEECH PATH OR DIAL TONE FAULTS. .............. 30
CHART NO. ‘l8-DATA/SPEECH PATH OR DIAL TONE FAULTS. ........ 33
CHART NO . 19-DIALING FAULTS ...................... 35
CHART NO. 20-RINGING/RING BACK TONE FAULTS ..... :::::::::: : 37
CHART NO. 21-MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS ......................... 39

I FLOW CHART SYMBOLS. a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 DCEC BACKPLANE.. ........................ ................ ..... .. 4;
Q-i.01 This section describes the maintenance
procedures used for the diagnosis of faults in the
PERCEPTION Electronic Business Communication
systems. Faults are classified and then cleared by
replacing apparatus and performing operational
tests in the sequences prescribed by the fault
clearing flow charts in Paragraph 05. 3.02 Faults in PERCEPTION are cleared by
replacing PCBs, EKTs, STTs, Attendant Consoles,
power supply or DFRA, as instructed in the
flow charts.
Q2.01 A fault classification flow chart is pro-
vided to ensure that fault clearing is pursued in 03.0 Five symbols are used in the flow charts.
a logical sequence (Chart No. II. These symbols are identified in Figure I.

Q2.02 In the flow charts an assumption is made The flow charts are sequentially arranged
that the fault was discovered and reported by a ermit rapid fault localization within PERCEP-
station user. All faults, therefore, are classified TION. All fault clearing must begin vvith the Fault
according to the way they would appear at the Cfassification F/ow Chart, which is arranged in
EKT, STT, Attendant Console or DCEC. the correct fault locating sequence.

2.03 Faults and associated flow charts are If more than one station appears faulty,
organized into the following categories: but these faults are still classified as station faults
(as outlined in the flow charts), one station at a
Flow Chart Title time can be corrected.
1 Fault Classification
2 Loading Faults 03*Q6 Alarm and fault indicators, if failing,
3 Power Faults may not be corrected with these flow charts.
4 Ringing Power Fault However, when an indication does appear, it is
5 Time Switch Clock Fault used as an aid in finding that particular fault. If
6 DPMU Faults a fault occurs and the fault indicator does not
7 DRCU Faults function, the PCB on which the indicator is located
8 DCOU/DEMU Faults is to be replaced at the first opportunity.
9 DEKU/DSTU Faults
10 SMDR, TTY or MODEM Faults 03.W The following precautions must be
11 Station Faults observed when handling PCBs.
12 IN IT/LOAD Key Faults
13 MAJOR ALARM Faults
14 CO/TIE Trunk Faults
15 Attendant Console Faults Drop a PCB.
‘l6 Common Station Feature Faults
17 Speech Path or Dial Tone Faults Stack one PCB on top of another.
18 Data/Speech Path or Dial Tone
Faults Handle a PCB without discharging any static
19 Dialing Faults electricity from your person by touching
20 Ringing/Ring Back Tone Faults the grounded DCEC.
21 Miscellaneous Faults
Touch PCB contacts with your fingers.

Before attempting to clear any fault,

ensure that it is in the PERCEPTION system and
not caused by associated external equipment such
as wiring, MOH source, etc.
 START AND END OF
A FLOW CHART SEQUENCE

IMPORTANT NOTES
AFFECTING THE FAULT
CLEARING PROCEDURE

0
PROGRESSION TO OR FRO
ANOTHER FLOW CHART LOC
LETTER WILL DENOTE EXACT E
OR EXIT POINT TO/FROM SPECIFIC FLOW CHART (FC)

I 1

STATEMENT OF A
REQUIRED ACTION

tag can remain attached during the testing and

repair process.
When defective PERCEPTION appa-
ratus is shipped for repair, the apparatus must CM.03 If different and/or additional faults are
be packed in a suitable container (an original created in the system by substituting a PCB, tag
type box is highly recommended). and return the substitute PCB as a defective unit.

a) Anti-static containers for all PCBs.

b) Plastic bags for EKTs, Attendant Consoles,

etc.
In the following flow charts two differ-
erms are used when refering to single line
NEVER WRITE ON THE APPARATUS telephones. If “2500” is used, a DTMF standard
ITSELF! Describe the nature of the defect on an telephone with “Touch-tone” dial pad is being
information tag, and attach the tag to the front referenced. If “STT” is used, DTMF and rotary
of the unit with string (not wire) so that the dial sets are being referenced.
 5) At the modular block, measure the resistance
between all wire combinations. The proper
readings are as follows:

NOTE:
Perform the following at the locations in-
dica ted:
7. Modular block: Check all station cables.
2. MDF: Check cables from DEKlJ to MDF.

1) Disconnect the EKT.

*NOTES:
2) Using a DC voltmeter, measure between the 7. The green-red and black-yellow measure-
wires of the two pairs to verify the presence ments sould be within 10% of each other.
of the following readings: 2. 55 ohm is a maximum reading.

24
24
24
1 R Red 2 R Yellow 24
I T Green 1 R Red 0 NOTE:
2 T Black 2 R Yellow 0 Perform the following a-t the locations in-
dica ted:
1. Modular block: Check all station cables.
3) An improper reading indicates an open, crossed
2. MDF: Check cables from DSTlJs to MDF.
or shorted wire.
I) Disconnect the STT at the wall.
4) For the fvlDF-to-EKT cable, a more precise
check is made using an ohmmeter per Table B.
2) At the MDF remove the bridging clips.
*Nominal voltage-within the power supply
3) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance
limits of 23.2~28.2 VDC while under AC
between the two wires at the modular block.
power.
The measurement should exceed 1 MOhm.

4) At the MDF, place shorting jumper wires

between the two wires (T and R).

5) At the modular block, measure the resistance

between T and R. Verify maximum 300 ohm.
1) Disconnect the EKT at the wall.

2) At the iVlDF, remove the bridging clips.

3) Using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance

between all combinations of the four wires
at the modular block. All measurements should
exceed 1 MOhm.

4.) At the MDF, place shorting jumper wires

between the T and R of pair #‘i (green-red)
and the T and R of pair #2 (black-yellow).
 Please read the
maintenance
procedures before

Start here to
classify faults gn
the PERCEPTION

YES

Switch main circuit NOTE: See Section

breaker (power) IO@ 100-200,
to ON. Installation,
* Wait approx. 30 Paragraphs ll.Ol&
seconds for the 11.02 (System
system to load. Power-up).

NO
 Fro

To

FALT LED on

NO
NO

To

NO
NO

YES

NO
NO

YES
NO

NOTE: This is
no fault. To
extinguish the
LED, set time and
date on attendant
console or with
the LYTRF Program.

To

YES

To

NOTE: Verify
Fro

key on the DPMU

* Wait a few
seconds for
initialize to

Depress the LOAD

key on the DPMU

0 Wait approx. 30
seconds for re-
load to complete.

cycle completed?
 all station- / riisl ‘”+n”o
- . - . . “ . . ”
\
to-station calls
< work properly?

YES NO

or TIE trunk

NO

To

TTY or MODEM

YES

Fault should have

been classified,
return to Page 4.
 Start here to
c/ea;&;;Ying I--------

Go to Page 4

the disk drive Replace the

r
Replace the

L-l--
Replace the
DCCU.

YES

defective unit(s)
 From From

Tag the DPMU

as defective -
do not reinsert.

Depress the LOAD

key momentarily.
----
Verify loading is
completed.

YES
1

NO

Replace the
DPMU and DCCU Replace the
with a known DFRA.
good pair.

NO

To
defective unit(s) -----
e Tag the DPMU and To
DCCU as defective,
Do not reinsert.
voltages within

Call the Service

Center for
assistance.

YES

Tag the
defective unit(s)
and return
for repair.
 Fro

Start here to
clear PO wer
faults.

Switch main
circuit breaker
to OFF.

Switch main
circuit breaker Open the rear
to OFF then back cabinet connection

Disconnect the DC
power supply cables
to JZOI and J202.

b If this is a power
supply “LED off”
fault, depress the
circuit breaker(s)
(.Sl%Sl4) that
correspond(s) to the
LED(s) that was/were
off.
* Switch the main
NO circuit breaker ON.

e Switch main circuit

breaker to OFF.
e Depress the circuit
Replace the
breaker(s) 6l~Sl4
that correspond(s) power supply.
to the LED(s) that Tag and return
it for repair.
is/are off.
* Switch main circuit
breaker to ON.

Measure ail DC
supply voltages
on J201 and J202.
From

0 B2
Page 11

Disconnect the
power supply.
Tag it and return DFRA power cables
(~80/81 and J51).

Remove all
PCBS.

To

supply “LED off”

fault, depress the
circuit breaker (S’l&
Sl4) -that corres-
ponds to the LED(s)
that was (were) off.
a Switch the main
circuit breaker ON.

Problem is on the
backplane. To
clear it, refer
to Figure 2 on fault cleared?
Page 40.

;’ LED (si bknb

off or the DC
1’
voltages being
llM’PORTANi7
out of .specs.
Make .sure power I.----
is off whenever ona at a time.
removing/inserting
a PCB or connecfor. e if a power fault
occurs. reolace the

defective t~nit(s)
CB/DFRA also
From

fA

Measure the
ringer voltage at
the backplane,
between pins 27
and 28 on DPMU.

The DFRA or
DCCU has a faulty
indicator. Replace
the defective unit
at a convenient
time.
 From

Start here to

Go to Page 4
to classify
fault.

The following instructions

will cause all calls in
progress to be disconnected -
and no new calls will be
established.
Do not continue while
there are calls in progress.

* Replace the DTCU,

* Verify that the
clock LED is
flashing.
TB 100-8504 Page 1 of 1
March 25, 1985

Both the LCD EKT and attendant console require a high volume of control data from
the central control. If LCD EKTs and an attendant console are connected to the first half of a
DEKU PCB, one or the other might malfunction during high traffic conditions.

Therefore, LCD EKTs should not be installed at the following ports:

I ) If the attendant console is assigned to port number LOOI, do not assign an LCD EKT to
port numbers LO02, LOO3 or LOO4.

2) If the attendant console is assigned to port number Ll21, do not assign an LCD EKT to
port numbers Ll22, Ll23 or Ll24.

Toshiba America, Inc.

Telecommunicatmn Systems Division
2441 Michelle Drive, Tustin, CA 92680 (714) 730.5000
111 Business Park Drwe, Armonk, N.Y. 10504 (914) 273-l 750 TSD 85-03-020
TB 100-8503 Page 3 of 3
March 1, 1985

b) The strapping terminal consists of six pins labeled A C D E F andapairof

insulated shorting bars. The bars can connect two pairs of adjacent pins. Select
the desired option according to the following table. (Note: The table is printed on
each DLSU PCB for reference.)

Battery to Ground Dial Pulse: A-B & E-F

Loop Dial Pulse: B-C & D-E

3) Loop Current Detection Level:

a ) For proper detection of incoming digits, adjustments are required based upon
the CO line loop resistance. Selections are made using the strapping terminals,
see Figure 2.

TB 104-Circuit #1 TB 304-Circuit #3
TB 204-Circuit #2 TB 404-Circuit #4

b) The strapping terminal consists of four pins labeled a b c and an insulated

shorting bar. The bar can connect any pair of adjacent pins. Select the desired
option according to the following table.

0 - 8OOQ c-d (least sensitive)

800 - 1.5KQ b-c (mid sensitive)
1.5KQ and above a-b (most sensitive)

MOTE:
The CO line loop resistance values are arbitrary and are used as an initial strapping
guide. If the incoming digits are not being detected properly, move the strapping
terminal to a different sensitivity position and test for proper operation.

c) Install the DLSU PCB(s)-one for each group of four circuits-in the slots
designated TOO - TO7 in the DCEC.
 MEMORANDUM
---m--w---

To: Tech Tips

Erom: John Brady
Date: March 6, 1985
Subject: Headset Hook Switch Control

Open jack set box* Remove mute switch wires from switch0
solder them togetherP tape and store*
Solder two lengths of wire to the switch about i foot long-
Route these wires along the coil cord to the phone. Lift mod
jack and lay the wires at bottom of slot. Replace mod jack-
Route the wires aiong the left side of EKT. Solder to top and
bottom of hook switch.

JB:sh
r

TB loo-8502 Page 1 of 2
February 10, 1985

ersio -03 ms
Some software errors have been discovered in the Version A-03A
software that could cause difficulty in some applications.

LCR will not advance tothemostexpensive route more than 15 times if the Warning
Tone Allowed (WTA) prompt in the PAR sub-program of the DLCI Program is set to
N. To correct this problem, set WTA prompt to Y.
End-to-end signalling is not possible from an EKT when using LCR, and the most
expensive route is selected when Warning Tone Allowed (WTA) prompt in DLCl-
PAR is set to Y. When WTA is set to N end-to-end signalling is possible.
It is not possible, usin to dial a Direct Distance Dialing Prefix (DDP) before a
service code (such as 1 and still have the ability to dial a service code without a
prefix (such as 911) on-interchangeable area code (ICC = N in the PAR
sub-program of the DLCl Program). If ICC must be N, a direct trunk access for a
1 ‘I call is suggested.
ttendant Console operation:
The Attendant Console, with a call on a loop key(LPK), cannot use the System Speed
Dial feature to conference or provide a trunk-to-trunk connection.
The Attendant Console cannot use LCR to add calls to an attendant conference-the
attendant must use direct trunk access.
Toll restricted stations (TOL = 0 - 8) that require the attendant console to access a
trunk or LCR and dial a number (through dialing) will cause the trunk to disconnect
after the DPT (DSYS Program) has timed out, unless the attendant depresses the
loop key m before the release key m.
Attendant Overflow:
1) The Call Waiting (CW) LED on the attendant console does not extinguish when
the incoming call is sent to the overflowfacility. Also, if the overflowcall returns
to the console there is no tone burst.
2) During an overflow call, the ring no answer timeout (RNA) does not agree with
the programmed RNA prompt.
Example: DSYS Program RNA= 12, but actual RNA timeout for the overflow
station is 22 seconds.

Toshiba America, km.

Telecommunication Systems Division
2441 Michelle Drive, Twtin, CA 92680 (714) 730-5000
TB 100-8502 Page 2 of 2
February 10, 1985

Traffic Measurement (DTRF Program):

The trunk group outgoing usage (CCS) is calculated incorrectly. The value indicated
must be divided by a factor of 2.
Peripheral Equipment Test (TPER Program):
When using the remote trunk test (CALLTNNX) portion of this program, the system
will not dial some directory numbers (DN) properly. When a directory number with the
digit “0” is entered, the system will pause instead of outputting the digit “0”.
Conference Key:
After an outgoing trunk call has been made via direct trunk access, the m/ key
cannot be used until the Dial PauseTimer (DP,T) has timed out. When using LCR to place
an outgoing call, the pl key can be used immediately.
ccess to Services:
If LCR is accessed to make an outgoing call and it selects a Specialized Common
Carrier (SPCC) when using Remote Access to Services (incoming), only the first seven
digits are dialed (the SPCC Authorization Code and dialed number are not output).
irect Inward Dialing (DID) Station:

The call forward busy (CFB) feature for a DID station, even though removed from
the station class of service (DUOS Program), still forwards to the console when the DID
station is busy.
tandard 2500 set (DT

If the QTRK Program answer supervision (ANS) prompt is set to Y, and a 2500 set
station accesses an outgoing TIE trunk, then accesses an outgoing CO trunk through a
second PBX, the DTMF receiver will remain connected to the station. Therefore, the CO
trunk’s terminating end cannot hear the 2500 set station. Changing the ANS prompt to
N allows the DTMF receiver to disconnect after the push-button timer (DSYS Program)
has timed out.

,
TB 100-8410 Page 1 of 2
December I, 1984 NEW SOFTWARE INT
systems shipped after December 1,1984 will be equipped with
Version A-03 software.

Version A-03 offers all of the features available in the present Version A-02D plus
the following:

Least Cost outing-Provides automatic routing over alternate trunk facilities

based on the dialed number and a customer-specified selection algorithm.
Stated briefly; the LCR capabilities are as follows:

Routing Tables - 15
Routes (choices) per Route Table - 6
Time of Day changes - 3
Area Code Tables - 15
Area/Office Code Tables - 16
Modify Digit Tables - 12

Enhanced Toll Restriction-provides toll restriction with 10 station classes. The

6-digit restriction has 32 area/office code tables and can also deal with two
Specialized Common Carriers (MCI, SPRINT, etc.) in either the present “Access
Number and I.D. Code” method or the Equal Access (1 OXXX) method.

LCD Display EKT-with Version A-03 software, erceptiun is compatible

with the soon to be released EKT 2205 LCD telep ne. A maximum ofthirty(3())
of these 20-key LCD Display EKTs can be equipped. The features of the display

Time and date

Dialed number (manual or speed dial)
Speed dial verification

Availability of the EKT 2205 LCD will be announced via a separate bulletin.

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)-requires a new LoopTrunk PCB called the DLSU. The
DLSU occupies one DCOU position; serves four DID trunk lines and has a list
price of $600. Availability of the DLSU will be announced via separate bulletin.

CCSA Access*

Remote Access to Services*

DN lncrease- will accept up to 200 directory numbers.

*See General Description

Division of Toshiba America. Inc.

2,441 >Iichelle Drive. Tustin, C.4 92680 (71.&I 730-x)00
I I I l3usiness Park Drive. Armonk. K.Y lOSO-$ (9141 273. I750
TB 100-8410 Page 2 of 2
December 1, 1984

INT~OQ~~TI OFTVWARE (continued)

Station Set Mix-automatic bridging (no privacy) is provided when a DN is shared
by an EKT and a standard telephone.

Chain Dialing From Standard Telephone-prior to the dialing timeout, multiple

speed dial codes can be used from a 500/2500-type telephone.

Call Waiting-changed to give the calling party MOH or silence instead of ringback
tone.

§MDF? Date Output-the date is printed once every hour.

SMDFI/SPCC--the SMDR feature is enhanced to deal with SPCC (MCI, SPRINT,

etc.) calls by absorbing the access number and authorization code and printing
only the final DDD number.

SMQFI-the following condition codes are added:

P = Date/Time Change
Q = System Initialize
S = Date Printed (occurs at 60-minute intervals)

Toshiba Telecom intends to update all existing systems with Ver-

sion A-03 software, and is presently formulating a progra hat will accomplish this
plan. Shortly, via a separate bulletin, all dealers will be informed of the specific details.

Version -03 Installation Procedure-if the system is operating with Version

A-02D software, proceed as follows:

1) Remove Version from disk drive and insert Version A-03.

2) Perform data dump (DDMP) procedure.

3) Customer data is now on Version

-03 by depressing load switch. (System down for approximately 30

seconds.)

EKT, DSTT, and DTGP Programs willequal None-which

means No Toll Restrict!on.

5) Program customer data to include new features as required.

Programming Procedures, Section 00-100-300, of the erceptiorf ln-

stallation 24 Maintenance Manual is being revised to include the new software. A
preliminary version of the revised manual section is attached, and will be replaced with
a finalized version as quickly as possible.

IlWPORTANT NOTE:
Do not dwmp data (~5~P) from Version A-03 to Version A-02D diskette.
LDN #I Night Number NT1
LDN #2 Night Number NT2
Busy Lamp Field #1 BLfl
Busy Lamp Field #2 8LF2
Overflow DN-Attendant Console ##O ClFLl
Overflow DN-Attendant Console #I OFL2
Message Center-Tenant #O MC0
Message Center-Tenant #l flC1
Meet-me Page DN NNP
Remote Access DN REtI
Remote Access Change Code RW
‘I*” Access Code FCC*
“#“ Access Code FCC~
Camp-on (or CWT) Timeout COT
Ring No Answer Timeout RN$
Attendant Overflow Timeout flOF
Call Forward No Answer Timeout CFD
Hold (500/2500) Timeout HLD

’ [CR 1~ Depress Carriage Return.

Feature

*Enter the name and access code in this column.

Not Used MTQ N N N N N N N N
HFA Ewipped? HFR
Display EKT? DIS

Prime DN only! KEY 0

KEY 1

UEY 2

KEY 3

l<EY 4

KEY 5

KEY 6

l<EY 7

KEY 9

KEY 10

l<EY 11

KEY 12

KEY 13

l<EY 14

KEY 15

l<EY 16

l<EY 17

KEY 19

Sheet
IVOTE: Use multiple sheets as required. Sheet of
NOTE: Use multiple lines as required.